Inventory Management Software

InvenTrack

Master Inventory, Maximize Potential

InvenTrack is an innovative SaaS platform designed to empower SMBs in managing their inventory with precision and ease. By offering real-time inventory monitoring, automated reorder alerts, and intelligent demand prediction, InvenTrack eliminates stockouts and oversupply, optimizing operational efficiency. Seamlessly integrating with existing ERP systems, this user-friendly, cloud-based solution enhances collaboration across multiple locations with robust security protocols. InvenTrack equips businesses with data-driven insights, reducing costs, improving cash flow, and elevating customer satisfaction, ultimately redefining inventory management for a more profitable and streamlined future.

Subscribe to get amazing product ideas like this one delivered daily to your inbox!

InvenTrack

Product Details

Explore this AI-generated product idea in detail. Each aspect has been thoughtfully created to inspire your next venture.

Vision & Mission

Vision
Empowering SMBs with intelligent inventory mastery for a seamless supply chain revolution.
Long Term Goal
In the coming years, InvenTrack aims to revolutionize inventory management for SMBs worldwide, leveraging cutting-edge AI and data analytics to anticipate market trends and optimize supply chains, enabling businesses to thrive sustainably in a rapidly changing global economy.
Impact
InvenTrack transforms inventory management for SMBs by offering real-time monitoring and automated reorder alerts, which collectively enhance stock accuracy and prevent costly stockouts and oversupply. With intelligent demand prediction algorithms, businesses gain insight to anticipate inventory needs, streamlining operations and reducing waste. Its seamless integration with existing ERP systems and user-friendly interface reduces training time and operational disruptions, fostering efficiency. By providing secure, cloud-based data access, InvenTrack promotes collaboration across locations, ensuring that decision-makers can manage inventory from anywhere, anytime. The platform's comprehensive capabilities lead to reduced operational costs, improved cash flow, and heightened customer satisfaction, establishing InvenTrack as an indispensable tool for inventory excellence and business growth.

Problem & Solution

Problem Statement
Small and medium-sized businesses often struggle with inaccurate inventory tracking and forecasting, leading to frequent stockouts or oversupply, increased operational costs, and decreased customer satisfaction.
Solution Overview
InvenTrack addresses the challenge of inaccurate inventory management for SMBs with its real-time inventory monitoring, which ensures precise tracking of stock levels at all times. Automated reorder alerts prevent stockouts by notifying managers when it's time to restock, while intelligent demand prediction algorithms anticipate future inventory needs, minimizing the risk of oversupply. The platform's seamless integration with existing ERP systems allows for minimal disruption and user-friendly adoption. By offering cloud-based access, InvenTrack enhances collaboration across multiple locations, and its strong security protocols protect sensitive business data. This comprehensive solution reduces operational costs, improves cash flow, and ensures businesses consistently meet customer demand efficiently.

Details & Audience

Description
InvenTrack is a cutting-edge SaaS platform crafted to revolutionize inventory management for small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs). Tailored for business owners and supply chain managers, this innovative solution eliminates the challenges of manual inventory tracking and forecasting errors. InvenTrack thrives on its core features: real-time inventory monitoring, automated reorder alerts, and intelligent demand prediction algorithms. These unique capabilities work harmoniously to avert stockouts and oversupply, ensuring businesses consistently meet customer demand without excess. Designed with a user-friendly interface, InvenTrack effortlessly integrates with existing ERP systems, setting a new standard for ease of use and minimal training requirements. Whether operating in retail, wholesale, online, or offline environments, this cloud-based platform empowers managers to access inventory data anytime, anywhere, enhancing collaboration across multiple locations and teams. InvenTrack’s robust security protocols guarantee the safety and privacy of sensitive business information, providing peace of mind for users. With its data-driven insights, InvenTrack offers businesses the tools to make informed decisions, streamline operations, and boost customer satisfaction. As a result, users experience reduced operational costs, improved cash flow, and a stronger bottom line. This makes InvenTrack the quintessential hub for inventory management excellence, aligning with its vision to revolutionize inventory practices with intelligent, automated solutions. Experience the future of inventory management with InvenTrack, where smart tracking meets superior forecasting.
Target Audience
Small and medium-sized business owners and supply chain managers, aged 30-55, focused on optimizing inventory management and reducing operational costs through technology.
Inspiration
InvenTrack was born from a firsthand observation of the persistent challenges faced by small and medium-sized businesses in managing their inventories effectively. This insight emerged through interactions with numerous SMB owners who consistently grappled with outdated systems and manual processes that led to frequent stock discrepancies, missed sales, and unnecessary costs. These struggles highlighted the pressing need for a more intuitive and precise solution that could alleviate these inefficiencies and empower businesses to thrive. The motivation to create InvenTrack stemmed from a desire to democratize access to cutting-edge inventory management tools that were previously only available to larger enterprises. By harnessing advancements in real-time monitoring and intelligent algorithms, the aim was to level the playing field for smaller businesses, equipping them with the means to anticipate demand accurately and optimize their stock. Recognizing the transformative potential of technology in streamlining operations, InvenTrack was envisioned as an accessible, seamless, and integrated platform that not only addressed immediate inventory challenges but also facilitated long-term strategic growth. The core aspiration behind its creation was to help SMBs achieve operational excellence, reduce costs, and enhance customer satisfaction, ultimately boosting their competitiveness and potential in the market.

User Personas

Detailed profiles of the target users who would benefit most from this product.

D

Demand Diva

Age: 35, Gender: Female, Education: Bachelor’s degree in Supply Chain Management, Occupation: Demand Planner, Income Level: $80,000 - $100,000.

Background

Growing up in a family of small business owners, Demand Diva developed a strong understanding of the retail landscape. She pursued a degree in supply chain management and started her career in inventory management at a large corporation. After gaining experience, she transitioned to a demand planning role in an SMB that necessitated more nuanced inventory strategies. Outside of work, she enjoys analyzing market trends and attending industry webinars to sharpen her skills.

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Demand Diva needs sophisticated forecasting tools that integrate seamlessly with existing systems to provide accurate demand predictions. She requires intuitive dashboards for monitoring inventory trends, and effective communication capabilities with suppliers to coordinate stock levels accurately.

Pain Points

Her main pain point is dealing with unpredictable market fluctuations that can lead to inaccurate forecasts, resulting in lost sales or excess stock. Additionally, she struggles with manual data entry processes that could lead to errors and last-minute scrambles to adjust orders.

Psychographics

Demand Diva values precision and reliability. She is motivated by data and enjoys the challenges of forecasting and planning. With an analytical mindset, she is interested in continuous improvement and aspires to innovate inventory processes. She believes in teamwork and regularly collaborates with various departments to refine processes and expectations, ensuring efficient operations.

Channels

Demand Diva mainly relies on online channels such as industry-specific forums, webinars, and LinkedIn for professional networking and insights. She also engages with internal communication platforms like Slack and email for team collaboration.

O

Operational Optimizer

Age: 42, Gender: Male, Education: MBA in Operations Management, Occupation: Operations Manager, Income Level: $90,000 - $120,000.

Background

The Operational Optimizer discovered a passion for logistics while studying for his MBA. He began his career in a manufacturing company, where he learned the intricacies of operational flow. After years of managing inventory processes, he joined a fast-growing SMB looking to refine its operational strategies. He is an advocate of lean methodologies and enjoys coaching teams on process optimization.

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

The Operational Optimizer needs robust analytics tools to measure performance across departments. He requires an easy way to access and share data with team members, facilitating informed decision-making and identifying operational inefficiencies.

Pain Points

His pain points include resistance to change from his team and the challenges of integrating new technologies. He finds it difficult to align all departments towards common efficiency goals and often faces delays in operational execution due to miscommunication.

Psychographics

He values efficiency and is motivated by performance metrics. A firm believer in continuous improvement, he prefers structured environments but is adaptable to change. Outside of work, he enjoys reading about innovative business strategies and implementing new methodologies in his personal life.

Channels

He engages frequently on professional platforms like LinkedIn for industry insights and attends conferences. Internally, he uses tools like Trello and Asana for project management, alongside regular team meetings for updates.

R

Retail Revamp Specialist

Age: 30, Gender: Female, Education: Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration, Occupation: Retail Manager, Income Level: $60,000 - $75,000.

Background

With a background in customer service, the Retail Revamp Specialist transitioned into retail management after showcasing her potential in inventory control. She thrives in fast-paced environments, focusing on creating appealing in-store merchandising strategies. Her experience with customer interactions drives her passion for understanding inventory dynamics, allowing her to better cater to customer needs.

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

The Retail Revamp Specialist needs inventory management tools that allow real-time monitoring of stock levels, as well as insights into customer purchasing patterns. She requires resources for training her team on inventory practices and increasing efficiency in the stock replenishment process.

Pain Points

Her main pain points include dealing with frequent stockouts of popular items, excess inventory of less popular products, and the challenge of training staff quickly in using inventory systems effectively. Additionally, she often grapples with the pressure of monthly sales targets and seasonal trends.

Psychographics

She is customer-centric, driven by the desire to provide excellent service and enhance customer satisfaction. She enjoys learning about consumer behavior and market trends and values teamwork. Her interests include fashion, retail marketing strategies, and DIY merchandising ideas.

Channels

She prefers visual and interactive online platforms such as Instagram and Pinterest for inspiration; she also utilizes retail management forums for knowledge sharing. Internally, she connects via team chats and scheduling software for weekly briefings.

C

Cost-Conscious Controller

Age: 45, Gender: Male, Education: Master’s degree in Finance, Occupation: Financial Controller, Income Level: $100,000 - $130,000.

Background

Growing up in a frugal household, the Cost-Conscious Controller developed a keen sense of budgeting and finance early on. With a solid educational foundation in finance, he has spent over 20 years in various financial roles. His recent venture into an SMB allowed him to focus on inventory management and supply chain finance, where he is constantly striving for cost optimization.

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Cost-Conscious Controller needs robust analytics tools that provide insights into inventory holding costs and assist in auditing processes. He requires reliable reporting features within InvenTrack to evaluate supplier pricing and inventory turnover rates.

Pain Points

His pain points revolve around dealing with inaccuracies in inventory records that affect financial reporting. Moreover, he often encounters challenges in convincing operational teams about the importance of inventory cost-control measures, resulting in friction.

Psychographics

He is analytical and values precision in financial reporting. Motivated by achieving financial targets, he seeks out methods to improve efficiency and minimize waste in operations. He enjoys numbers, trends, and engaging with financial data in depth, as well as financial forecasting and risk management.

Channels

He primarily uses professional networks like LinkedIn and finance-focused webinars for continuous learning. Internally, he utilizes email for formal communication and project management software to track departmental budgets.

T

Tech-Savvy Trader

Age: 28, Gender: Non-binary, Education: Bachelor’s degree in Marketing, Occupation: E-commerce Manager, Income Level: $70,000 - $85,000.

Background

The Tech-Savvy Trader grew up in a tech-savvy environment where online commerce thrived. Early involvement in a family retail business led to a fascination with e-commerce strategies. After completing their degree in marketing, they entered the e-commerce sector, excelling by leveraging digital tools and platforms to enhance inventory management and customer engagement.

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

The Tech-Savvy Trader needs advanced digital reporting tools that provide real-time visibility into stock levels and sales trends. They require integration capabilities with e-commerce platforms and fulfillment services to streamline processes and enhance user experience.

Pain Points

Their pain points revolve around inconsistent stock levels due to high order volumes, as well as difficulties in coordinating with suppliers to maintain optimum inventory. They also face pressures of tight lead times and maintaining competitive pricing for online customers.

Psychographics

Adventurous and innovative, the Tech-Savvy Trader embraces change and is motivated by data-driven results. They prioritize customer satisfaction and are keen on experimenting with new technologies. Outside work, they invest time in learning about digital marketing trends and enjoy participating in online communities focused on e-commerce growth strategies.

Channels

They primarily operate through digital channels, engaging with customers on social media platforms like Instagram and Facebook, while using email newsletters for direct marketing strategies and e-commerce forums for best practices.

Product Features

Key capabilities that make this product valuable to its target users.

Intelligent Alert System

This feature sends timely alerts to users about low stock levels, potential stockouts, and overstock situations based on real-time data analysis. Users benefit from proactive notifications that help prevent inventory issues, ensuring they can manage stock effectively and maintain optimal inventory levels.

Requirements

Real-Time Stock Monitoring
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time notifications about stock levels so that I can prevent stockouts and maintain optimal inventory levels."
Description

This requirement enables the Intelligent Alert System to continuously monitor inventory levels in real-time, allowing users to receive immediate alerts when stock falls below a predefined threshold. By integrating with existing inventory databases, this feature improves the responsiveness of stock management, reduces the risk of stockouts, and increases overall operational efficiency. It is critical for maintaining accurate inventory levels and provides a foundation for automated reorder processes, thereby enhancing decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an alert when stock levels fall below the predefined threshold of 10 units for any product in their inventory.
Given that the stock level of a product is at 10 units or below, when the Intelligent Alert System performs its real-time monitoring, then the user should receive an alert notification via email and in-app messaging.
User can view and manage alert settings to define custom thresholds for alert notifications.
Given that the user accesses the alert settings page, when the user sets a new low stock threshold for a specific product, then the new threshold should be saved and applied for future monitoring.
User must receive notifications about overstock situations when stock levels exceed the predefined threshold of 50 units.
Given that the stock level of a product is at 50 units or above, when the Intelligent Alert System analyzes the inventory data, then the user should receive an alert notification indicating potential overstock.
User manages multiple products and needs to receive consolidated alerts for all products with low stock levels.
Given that multiple products have fallen below their respective low stock thresholds, when the alerts are generated, then the user should receive a single consolidated alert summarizing all products needing attention.
User wants to be notified about potential stockouts based on historical sales data and current inventory levels.
Given that the inventory level of a product, combined with historical sales data, indicates a potential stockout within the next week, when the Intelligent Alert System analyzes the stock levels, then the user should receive a proactive alert notification about the potential stockout.
User needs to validate that alert notifications are sent only during business hours to avoid inconvenience.
Given that the user is active during business hours, when the Intelligent Alert System detects low stock levels, then alerts should only be sent between 9 AM and 5 PM on weekdays, and no alerts should be sent during off-hours.
Predictive Overstock Alerts
"As a sales manager, I want to be alerted about potential overstock situations so that I can implement strategies to sell excess inventory and avoid unnecessary costs."
Description

This requirement focuses on the detection of overstock situations by analyzing historical sales data and current inventory levels. The Intelligent Alert System will generate notifications when items exceed optimal stock thresholds, allowing users to take corrective actions such as promotions or discounts. The predictive capabilities help in optimizing inventory costs, reducing waste, and improving cash flow management for the business.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an alert notification when the stock level of a product exceeds the optimal threshold set for overstock situations.
Given that the product stock level exceeds the optimal threshold, when the system detects this condition, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the overstock.
User can view historical sales data related to the product flagged for overstock within the alert notification.
Given that the user opens the overstock alert, when they request to view details, then the system displays the historical sales data for that product over the last 30 days.
User can adjust optimal stock thresholds for each product to fine-tune the alerting mechanism based on changing business needs.
Given that the user accesses the product settings, when they change the optimal stock threshold, then the system should save this new threshold and apply it to future overstock assessments.
User receives cumulative alerts for multiple products that are simultaneously flagged for overstock.
Given that multiple products exceed their optimal thresholds, when the system generates alerts, then the user should receive a single cumulative alert detailing all products and their respective stock levels.
User is able to take corrective actions directly from the alert notification for overstocked items.
Given that the user receives an overstock alert, when they select an action option, then the system should provide options to apply promotions or discounts directly from the alert.
User can access a dashboard view of all products with current overstock alerts and their statuses.
Given that the user is on the inventory management dashboard, when they view the overstock section, then the system displays all items that have been flagged for overstock with their current stock levels and the reason for the alert.
Customizable Alert Settings
"As a business owner, I want to customize my alert settings so that I can receive notifications that are relevant to my specific business needs and workflow."
Description

This requirement allows users to personalize their alert preferences by defining specific thresholds for low stock and overstock situations. Users can choose the frequency and mode of alerts (e.g., email, SMS) to suit their operations. This feature enhances user engagement with the system and ensures that notifications are relevant, timely, and actionable. Offering customization increases user satisfaction and encourages more effective inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User sets up customizable alert preferences for low stock levels in the InvenTrack application.
Given that the user has access to the alert settings, when they define a threshold for low stock, then the system should save these settings.
User configures the frequency and mode of alerts for high stock situations in InvenTrack.
Given the user selects a mode of alert (email or SMS) and a frequency (daily, weekly), when they save the settings, then the system should send alerts accordingly based on the configured options.
User receives a notification for a low stock situation after setting the alert preferences.
Given that the user has set the low stock alert threshold and mode, when the stock level falls below the defined threshold, then the system should send a notification to the user via the selected mode.
User updates existing alert preferences and verifies changes in InvenTrack.
Given the user modifies their previously set alert preferences, when they save the changes, then the system should update the user’s alert settings and confirm the changes were successful.
User engages with the alert system during a stockout event.
Given that a stockout event occurs, when the user has set a low stock alert, then the system should automatically generate an alert and send it to the user in the chosen format.
User tests the alert system by triggering a simulated low stock condition.
Given that the user simulates a low stock condition, when the configured alert threshold is reached, then the system should send an alert to the user as specified in their settings.
User accesses and reviews alert history in InvenTrack.
Given that the user has received alerts in the past, when they navigate to the alert history section, then the system should display all alerts that have been triggered based on their settings.
Multi-Channel Alert Delivery
"As a warehouse supervisor, I want to receive alerts on my mobile device so that I can manage inventory on the go, even when I'm not at my desk."
Description

This requirement specifies that alerts generated by the Intelligent Alert System should be delivered across multiple platforms, including email, in-app notifications, and SMS. This feature ensures that users receive important inventory updates regardless of their location or preferred communication method. This capability enhances the system's usability and increases responsiveness to inventory changes, promoting proactive stock management.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives low stock level alerts via email, SMS, and in-app notifications when inventory falls below a defined threshold.
Given that the inventory level is below the predefined threshold, when the alert is generated, then the user should receive notifications through email, SMS, and in-app messages.
User can customize alert preferences to select preferred communication channels for receiving inventory alerts.
Given that the user has access to the alert settings, when they configure their preferences, then the alerts should be delivered according to the selected channels (email, SMS, in-app).
User receives a notification for potential stockouts 48 hours in advance of reaching critical stock levels.
Given that the stock level is projected to reach a critical level within 48 hours, when the alert is triggered, then the user should receive a notification via all configured channels to enable proactive action.
User views a log of alerts received for inventory changes and can acknowledge or dismiss them.
Given that alerts have been generated, when the user accesses the alert log, then they should see a list of all alerts received with options to acknowledge or dismiss each alert.
System automatically disables alert delivery to channels not configured by the user for a particular alert type.
Given that the user has configured their alert preferences, when an alert is generated, then the system should not send alerts to any channels that have not been selected by the user.
User receives alerts for overstock situations when inventory exceeds a defined maximum level.
Given that the inventory exceeds the maximum level set by the user, when the overstock alert is triggered, then the user should receive notifications through all selected channels.
User can easily access and modify their alert settings at any time to adapt to changing business needs.
Given that the user is on the alert settings page, when they make changes to their alert preferences, then the updates should be saved and reflected immediately in the alert delivery system.
Integration with ERP Systems
"As an IT manager, I want the alert system to integrate smoothly with our ERP software so that we maintain consistency in inventory data and improve cross-departmental collaboration."
Description

This requirement outlines the need for seamless integration of the Intelligent Alert System with existing ERP systems used by the organization. This integration would facilitate data exchange and ensure that inventory alerts are based on up-to-date information from various departments. It enhances the accuracy of stock predictions and alerts, providing a comprehensive view of inventory across all business functions.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration of the Intelligent Alert System with the organization's ERP system to ensure accurate stock level data is reported.
Given that the ERP system is integrated, When the stock level falls below the defined threshold, Then an alert is triggered and sent to the relevant users.
Real-time data exchange between the Intelligent Alert System and the ERP system for accurate stock predictions.
Given that data is being exchanged in real-time, When a stock level change occurs in the ERP system, Then the Intelligent Alert System reflects this change within 5 minutes.
Users receive timely notifications about low stock levels through the integrated system.
Given that the stock level is low, When the Intelligent Alert System sends an alert, Then the user receives a notification on their dashboard and via email within 1 minute of the alert being triggered.
The Intelligent Alert System must prevent duplicate alerts for the same stock issue to ensure user focus.
Given that a low stock alert has been sent to the user, When the stock level remains low, Then no additional alert for the same stock item should be sent until the stock level returns to normal.
Integration verification to check the accuracy of stock alerts against ERP data.
Given that the ERP system updates stock levels, When the Intelligent Alert System generates alerts, Then 95% of the alerts should correspond accurately with the ERP system's stock data.
User access permissions for alerts based on role classification in both the Intelligent Alert System and the ERP.
Given that the user has a specific role in the ERP system, When an alert is generated, Then only users with the relevant role should receive that alert notification.
Logging of all alerts generated by the Intelligent Alert System for audit purposes.
Given that an alert is triggered, When the alert is logged, Then it must include details such as timestamp, stock item, stock level, and user notifications sent.

Predictive Analytics Engine

The Predictive Analytics Engine leverages historical sales data and market trends to forecast future inventory needs accurately. This allows users to make informed purchasing decisions, reducing the risk of stockouts or excess inventory, and enhancing overall inventory management strategies.

Requirements

Historical Data Integration
"As an inventory manager, I want the Predictive Analytics Engine to integrate with our historical sales data so that I can accurately forecast future inventory requirements based on proven trends."
Description

The requirement involves integrating the Predictive Analytics Engine with historical sales data from various sources, including existing ERP systems. This integration is crucial as it allows the engine to analyze past sales trends and patterns. By leveraging this data, users can forecast future inventory needs more accurately. This integration will enhance the precision of predictions, enable seamless data flow across platforms, and ultimately lead to better inventory management decisions, reducing instances of stockouts and overstock situations.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration of Historical Sales Data from ERP Systems into the Predictive Analytics Engine.
Given that historical sales data is available in the ERP system, when the integration process is initiated, then the Predictive Analytics Engine should successfully import and display the historical sales data within 30 minutes.
Validation of Data Accuracy and Consistency Post-Integration.
Given that historical sales data has been integrated, when a validation check is performed, then 95% of the data should match the original data in the ERP system, ensuring integrity and accuracy.
Forecasting Inventory Needs Based on Integrated Historical Data.
Given that historical sales data has been integrated, when the Predictive Analytics Engine generates inventory forecasts, then the forecasts should reflect a minimum accuracy of 85% compared to actual sales for the following quarter.
User Notifications for Successful Data Integration.
Given that the integration of historical sales data has been completed, when the process finishes, then the user should receive a confirmation notification indicating success or any errors encountered during integration.
Error Handling During Historical Data Integration Process.
Given that an error occurs during data integration, when the error is detected, then the system should log the error and notify the user with a clear message detailing the issue and suggested actions.
Automation of Daily Historical Data Updates.
Given that historical sales data integration is set up, when a daily update is scheduled, then the Predictive Analytics Engine should automatically refresh its data source without user intervention at the specified time each day.
Real-time Market Trend Analysis
"As a sales strategist, I want to receive real-time market trend analysis from the Predictive Analytics Engine so that I can adjust our inventory levels proactively to meet changing consumer demands."
Description

This requirement focuses on implementing a feature that tracks and analyzes real-time market trends, such as consumer behavior, seasonal buying patterns, and economic indicators. By synthesizing real-time data with historical trends, the Predictive Analytics Engine will provide actionable insights. This allows users to adapt their inventory strategies promptly, ensuring they are prepared for fluctuations in demand, thus minimizing the risk of stockouts and optimizing stock levels across various locations.

Acceptance Criteria
User views real-time market trends dashboard on InvenTrack to make purchasing decisions before a seasonal sale.
Given that the user accesses the real-time market trends dashboard, when they select a specific product category, then the dashboard displays current consumer behavior metrics, seasonal buying patterns, and relevant economic indicators.
User receives automated alerts based on predicted changes in market trends that could affect inventory levels.
Given that the predictive analytics engine has processed new market data, when a significant trend is identified (such as a 20% increase in consumer demand), then the user should receive an alert via email and platform notification.
User is able to compare historical sales data against real-time market trends to adjust inventory levels.
Given that the user accesses the comparison tool in the predictive analytics engine, when they select a product and a time frame, then the tool displays a side-by-side comparison of historical sales data and current market trends.
User utilizes insights from the analytics engine to make proactive inventory adjustments.
Given that the predictive analytics engine provides actionable insights for future inventory needs, when the user applies those insights to adjust orders, then the system should update the inventory levels in real-time without errors.
User tests the responsiveness of the predictive analytics engine under changing market conditions.
Given that the market conditions change (e.g., a new competitor enters the market), when the user simulates data input reflecting these changes, then the predictive analytics engine should provide adjusted forecasts within 5 minutes.
User views historical data trends for selected products over the last year to assess performance.
Given that the user accesses the historical data section of the analytics engine, when they select a product and filter by the last year, then the system displays a complete historical sales trend graph with associated metrics.
User identifies and resolves discrepancies between predicted demand and actual sales.
Given that the user reviews a weekly sales report, when they notice a significant difference between predicted demand and actual sales, then the user can generate a report directly from the system to investigate the cause of discrepancy.
Automated Reporting Insights
"As an inventory director, I want to receive automated reports from the Predictive Analytics Engine so that I can quickly understand inventory forecasts and make timely decisions without sifting through raw data."
Description

The requirement entails creating an automated reporting system within the Predictive Analytics Engine that generates insights based on predictive analysis. These reports will highlight trends, summarize predictions for inventory needs, and provide actionable recommendations. By making this information easily accessible and understandable, users can make informed decisions quickly. Automated reporting will also save time, allowing managers to focus on executing strategies rather than compiling data.

Acceptance Criteria
Automated Reporting System Generates Daily Insights for Sales Managers
Given the Predictive Analytics Engine is operational, When a sales manager requests a report, Then the system should automatically generate and deliver a daily report highlighting past sales trends, predictions for the next month, and actionable recommendations by 9 AM each day.
User Access to Actionable Insights Report
Given that a user is logged into InvenTrack, When they navigate to the Reports section, Then they should be able to view, download, and print the predictive analytics report with clear visualizations of trends and predictions.
Real-Time Updates to Reporting System After New Data Entry
Given that new sales data has been entered into the InvenTrack system, When the Predictive Analytics Engine processes this data, Then the automated reporting system should update the insights report within 10 minutes to reflect the latest predictions and trends.
User Training for Automated Reporting Features
Given that the automated reporting system is live, When a user accesses the training module, Then they should complete a training session that covers how to access reports, interpret insights, and implement recommendations with a satisfaction score of at least 80% on completion tests.
Receive Alert Notifications for New Reports
Given that the automated reporting system generates a new report, When the report is available, Then users should receive an email notification within 15 minutes to inform them of the new report and its key highlights.
Customize Reporting Frequency for Different User Roles
Given that different user roles exist within InvenTrack, When users set their preferences for report frequency, Then the system should allow admins to choose daily, weekly, or monthly reporting options tailored to their roles.
User-Friendly Dashboard Interface
"As a warehouse supervisor, I want a user-friendly dashboard in the Predictive Analytics Engine so that I can easily visualize inventory forecasts and trends without any prior technical expertise."
Description

This requirement involves developing a user-friendly dashboard interface for the Predictive Analytics Engine that clearly displays forecasted inventory needs, historical data insights, and market trends. The interface should be intuitive, allowing users to navigate seamlessly and access critical insights at a glance. A well-designed dashboard will enhance the user experience, making it easier for users to interpret data, track performance, and make informed inventory management decisions.

Acceptance Criteria
Dashboard displays real-time inventory data based on user-specific parameters.
Given the user is logged into the Predictive Analytics Engine, When they access the dashboard, Then the dashboard must display real-time inventory levels, forecasted inventory needs, historical sales data, and market trends in an easily readable format.
Users can customize dashboard views based on their preferences.
Given the user is on the dashboard, When they select customization options, Then the dashboard must allow the user to arrange, add, or remove widgets and save their personalized view.
Dashboard provides tooltips and help information for users navigating the interface for the first time.
Given the user is a first-time visitor to the dashboard, When they hover over dashboard elements, Then relevant tooltips must appear, offering explanations of each feature and functionality available on the dashboard.
Dashboard is accessible across different devices and screen sizes without loss of functionality or readability.
Given the user accesses the dashboard from a mobile device or tablet, When they view the dashboard, Then the layout must adjust appropriately, ensuring all data is easily viewable and fully functional on the selected device.
Users receive alerts when inventory levels approach predefined thresholds based on predictive analytics.
Given the user has set inventory threshold parameters, When inventory levels fall below these parameters, Then an alert must appear on the dashboard, notifying the user of the low stock situation.
Dashboard allows users to generate reports on historical data and future predictions.
Given the user is on the dashboard, When they select a report generation option, Then the system must compile data into a formatted report that can be downloaded or shared, detailing historical trends and future inventory predictions.
Alerts and Notifications System
"As a logistics coordinator, I want to receive alerts from the Predictive Analytics Engine whenever stock levels are predicted to be low or high so that I can act swiftly to adjust orders and manage inventory efficiently."
Description

The requirement is to implement an alerts and notifications system within the Predictive Analytics Engine that informs users proactively about critical inventory predictions. This includes sending alerts for low stock levels, anticipated demand spikes, or overstock situations based on predictive analysis. By automating these alerts, users can take timely action, ensuring optimal stock levels and significantly reducing the risk of stockouts or excess inventory.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a low stock alert when inventory levels drop below the defined threshold.
Given the inventory levels are monitored, when the stock level of an item falls below the threshold, then an alert notification should be sent to the user via the designated notification channel (email or SMS).
User is notified of anticipated demand spikes based on predictive analytics.
Given the predictive analytics engine, when a demand spike is predicted for a product, then the user should receive a notification detailing the product and expected increase in demand.
User receives alerts for overstock situations based on historical sales data and trends.
Given the current inventory levels and historical sales trends, when a product is identified as overstocked, then an alert notification should be sent to the user indicating the product and the excess stock level.
User can customize alert preferences for different inventory items.
Given the alerts and notifications system, when a user sets their preferences for receiving alerts (including email vs. SMS and alert frequency), then the system should save and apply these preferences to subsequent notifications.
User has the ability to view a history of alerts and notifications received.
Given the alerts and notifications system, when a user accesses the notification history feature, then they should see a comprehensive list of past alerts, including timestamps and details of the notifications.
User receives a summary report of alerts over a specified time period.
Given the alerts and notifications system, when a user requests a summary report for alerts within a defined time period, then the system should generate and present a report detailing the types, frequencies, and resolutions of the alerts.
User can snooze alerts for a specified period.
Given the alerts and notifications, when a user chooses to snooze an alert, then the system should postpone the alert for the specified duration and notify the user once the snooze period is over.
Integration with Supplier Management Systems
"As a procurement officer, I want the Predictive Analytics Engine to integrate with our supplier management systems so that I can automatically receive recommendations for reorder quantities based on accurate forecasts, allowing me to maintain optimal inventory levels."
Description

The requirement focuses on the integration of the Predictive Analytics Engine with supplier management systems, which would allow the platform to recommend reorder quantities based on accurate demand forecasts. This integration will streamline the purchasing process, ensuring that users can place timely orders with suppliers before experiencing stockouts, thus enhancing inventory efficiency and supplier collaboration. It will also improve cash flow management by optimizing order sizes and timing.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration with Supplier Management Systems when a user needs to order inventory based on predictive analytics results.
Given the predictive analytics engine has generated reorder recommendations, When the user accesses the supplier management interface, Then the recommended reorder quantities should be displayed accurately in a user-friendly format.
A supplier receiving automated order requests from InvenTrack based on predictive analytics forecasts.
Given that the reorder quantities have been confirmed by the user, When the order is sent to the supplier, Then the supplier should receive the accurate order details within 1 minute through the integration interface.
User generating a report to analyze reorder trends based on predictive analytics outputs and supplier interactions.
Given the historical reorder data is available, When the user selects the reporting module, Then the system should generate a report comparing actual orders against predictive analytics forecasts over the past six months.
User receiving alerts for low stock levels based on predictive analytics integration with inventory levels.
Given the inventory level falls below the trigger threshold defined by the predictive analytics engine, When the alert condition is met, Then an immediate notification should be sent to the user via email and within the application.
User customizing threshold settings for reorder quantities based on predictive analytics insights.
Given the user has access to the settings panel, When the user adjusts the reorder thresholds, Then the system should save the new settings and apply them to future predictive analysis for accuracy.
Integration of feedback loop into the predictive analytics engine based on actual sales data and orders placed.
Given that actual sales data is recorded, When the analysis is triggered, Then the predictive analytics engine should adjust future forecasts based on the accuracy of previous forecasts to improve performance continuously.

Smart Suggestion Engine

This engine provides tailored recommendations for restocking, optimal order quantities, and product discontinuation based on AI algorithms. Users benefit from actionable insights, enabling them to streamline their inventory management process, reduce costs, and improve sales performance.

Requirements

Dynamic Restock Recommendations
"As a store manager, I want to receive dynamic restock recommendations based on current sales data so that I can ensure optimal stock levels and meet customer demand without overstocking."
Description

The Dynamic Restock Recommendations feature utilizes advanced AI algorithms to analyze historical sales data, current inventory levels, and market trends to provide tailored recommendations on when and how much inventory to reorder. This feature aims to reduce instances of stockouts and overstock situations, thereby optimizing inventory costs and ensuring product availability for customers. By integrating seamlessly with existing inventory systems, this feature enhances operational efficiency and decision-making for SMBs, leading to an overall improvement in sales performance and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria
User enters an inventory item with historical sales data, and the system analyzes this data to generate dynamic restock recommendations based on the predicted sales trends in the upcoming weeks.
Given the historical sales data for an item, when the user requests restock recommendations, then the system should provide a suggested reorder quantity that minimizes stockouts while considering current inventory levels and expected demand.
A user examines the restock recommendations provided by the Smart Suggestion Engine and decides to adjust the suggested quantities before placing an order for new stock.
Given the dynamic restock recommendations displayed on the user interface, when the user modifies the suggested reorder quantity, then the system should update the displayed total order cost and confirm the new order quantity without errors.
The system integrates with an existing ERP system to fetch live inventory levels and regularly updates restock recommendations based on any changes in inventory or sales patterns.
Given that the ERP system has been connected, when there is a change in inventory levels, then the Smart Suggestion Engine should automatically recalculate and display updated restock recommendations within 5 minutes.
A user wants to know the effectiveness of the restock recommendations over the past month to evaluate how well they have performed against actual sales and inventory levels.
Given that the user requests performance analytics, when the report is generated, then it should display a comparison between recommended restock quantities and actual sales data, highlighting the rate of stock turns and any resultant stockouts.
A user of the system is exploring the functionality of discontinuation recommendations provided by the Smart Suggestion Engine based on slow-moving inventory items.
Given that the user has accessed inventory analytics, when the system identifies products with low turnover rates, then it should provide a list of items recommended for discontinuation along with justification based on sales data.
Order Quantity Optimization
"As a purchasing agent, I want the system to suggest the optimal order quantities based on my sales data so that I can minimize costs and avoid excess inventory."
Description

The Order Quantity Optimization function helps users determine the most cost-effective order quantities for restocking their inventory. By analyzing factors such as sales velocity, holding costs, and supplier lead times, this feature suggests optimal order sizes that minimize costs while preventing stockouts. This functionality will empower users to make data-driven purchasing decisions, improve cash flow management, and drive profitability.

Acceptance Criteria
User navigates to the Order Quantity Optimization feature to input historical sales data and current inventory levels to receive suggestions for optimal reorder quantities.
Given that the user has input historical sales data and current inventory levels, when the user clicks on the 'Optimize Order Quantity' button, then the system should display recommended order quantities based on the analyzed data.
User receives alerts for suggested order quantities based on their inventory levels and sales velocity to prevent stockouts.
Given that the user's inventory levels fall below the recommended threshold, when the system calculates optimal order quantities, then the user should receive an alert notification with actionable insights.
User reviews the suggestions for discontinuation of underperforming products generated by the Order Quantity Optimization function.
Given that the user has accessed the product performance analytics, when the system identifies a product with declining sales velocity, then the system should suggest discontinuation alongside recommended alternatives or clearance strategies.
User checks the effectiveness of the Order Quantity Optimization over a specified time period to assess the impact on stock levels and sales performance.
Given that the user has implemented the suggested order quantities for one month, when the user reviews the inventory reports, then the user should see a decrease in stockouts and an improvement in overall sales performance metrics compared to the prior month.
User integrates the Order Quantity Optimization feature with their existing ERP system to improve the data flow and accuracy in inventory management.
Given that the user has linked their ERP system to InvenTrack, when the Order Quantity Optimization is executed, then the system should pull real-time data from the ERP and demonstrate accurate optimization suggestions based on current information.
User accesses the tutorial for using the Order Quantity Optimization feature to ensure they understand how to utilize it effectively.
Given that the user selects the tutorial option, when the tutorial is launched, then the user should see step-by-step instructions for using the Order Quantity Optimization feature, including visual aids and examples.
User modifies parameters such as holding costs and lead times to observe the adjustments in the suggested order quantities.
Given that the user has altered settings for holding costs and lead times, when the user clicks on 'Recalculate Order Quantity', then the system should display updated suggestions reflecting the changes made by the user.
Discontinuation Alerts
"As an inventory analyst, I want to receive alerts for products that should be discontinued based on sales performance so that I can make informed decisions about product offerings."
Description

The Discontinuation Alerts feature identifies products that are underperforming based on sales data and inventory turnover rates. It sends automated alerts to users, recommending the discontinuation of low-performing items. This helps businesses streamline their inventory by removing slow-moving products, allowing for a more focused inventory that aligns with customer preferences, thereby enhancing overall inventory efficiency and reducing costs.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives automated alerts for products indicating a low inventory turnover rate over the past three months, prompting evaluation and potential discontinuation.
Given the product has low sales velocity and inventory turnover when the user logs into the InvenTrack platform, then the system should display a discontinuation alert notification for that product on the dashboard.
User wants to review the historical sales data for suggested low-performing products before making a discontinuation decision.
Given the user accesses the Discontinuation Alerts report, when they select a product, then the system should display a detailed historical sales data report for the past 12 months.
User receives personalized recommendations for product discontinuation based on aggregated performance data across different regions or stores.
Given the user operates multiple locations, when they access the discontinuation suggestions, then the system should provide a list of low-performing products per location for review and action.
User wants to take immediate action on a discontinuation alert received, and updates the product status accordingly.
Given the user has received a discontinuation alert, when they select the 'Discontinue' option for a product, then the system should update the product status to 'Discontinued' and remove it from the active inventory list.
User reviews the impact of discontinued products on overall inventory efficiency and cost reductions.
Given the user has discontinued certain products, when they generate an inventory efficiency report, then the report should reflect an increase in overall inventory turnover and a reduction in holding costs post-discontinuation.
User wants to customize the alert thresholds for discontinuation alerts based on their unique business metrics.
Given the user has administrator privileges, when they navigate to the alert settings, then they should be able to set and save custom thresholds for product performance metrics that trigger discontinuation alerts.
Integration with ERP Systems
"As an operations manager, I want InvenTrack to integrate with our existing ERP system so that I can have real-time visibility into our inventory and streamline cross-departmental communications."
Description

The Integration with ERP Systems requirement focuses on seamless connectivity between InvenTrack and existing ERP platforms used by SMBs. This integration allows for real-time data exchange, ensuring that inventory levels, sales figures, and purchase orders are always up-to-date across systems. It provides a holistic view of inventory management and enhances collaboration among different departments, ultimately driving better decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria
Successful Data Sync Between InvenTrack and ERP Systems
Given that the integration is set up, when an inventory level is updated in InvenTrack, then the same update should reflect in the connected ERP system within 5 minutes.
Real-Time Inventory Monitoring Across Multiple Locations
Given that InvenTrack is integrated with the ERP, when a user accesses inventory data from different locations, then the system should display the most recent and accurate inventory levels for each location without discrepancies.
Automated Alerts for Reorder Levels
Given that the Smart Suggestion Engine is activated, when an item’s stock falls below the predefined threshold in the ERP, then an automated alert should be sent to the designated users within 10 minutes.
Seamless Management of Purchase Orders via Integration
Given that the integration is complete, when a purchase order is created in the ERP, then it should automatically reflect in InvenTrack with the correct item details and order status.
User Roles and Permissions Synchronization
Given the user role settings in ERP, when a user logs into InvenTrack, then their permissions should match those defined in the ERP system, ensuring appropriate access and functionality.
Analytics Dashboard Synchronization
Given that InvenTrack is integrated with the ERP systems, when a user views the analytics dashboard, then the data displayed should accurately reflect real-time metrics from both platforms, enabling informed decision-making.
AI-powered Demand Forecasting
"As a logistics manager, I want to use AI-powered demand forecasting to anticipate future sales patterns so that I can optimize our inventory levels in preparation for demand fluctuations."
Description

The AI-powered Demand Forecasting feature leverages machine learning to predict future sales trends based on historical data and various influencing factors such as seasonality, promotions, and market shifts. This capability allows businesses to proactively manage their inventory levels, reducing the risk of stockouts during peak periods and minimizing excess inventory during slower sales seasons. Implementing accurate demand forecasting improves stock management, enhances customer satisfaction, and supports informed purchasing decisions.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the AI-powered Demand Forecasting feature to analyze projected sales for the upcoming quarter to adjust inventory levels accordingly.
Given a user has historical sales data, when they input the data into the Demand Forecasting feature, then the system should generate and display accurate sales predictions for each product for the next quarter within a maximum variance of 10%.
A user wants to evaluate the impact of seasonal promotions on inventory levels using the Demand Forecasting feature.
Given a user specifies a seasonal promotion period, when they activate the Demand Forecasting feature, then the system should incorporate historical promotion data and show adjusted forecasts that reflect a minimum increase in expected sales of 20% during that period.
An SMB owner reviews inventory recommendations based on the AI-powered Demand Forecasting after a marketing campaign.
Given the user has run a marketing campaign, when they access the Demand Forecasting insights, then the system should provide restocking recommendations that align with at least 90% of the predicted demand based on the campaign's historical performance data.
A manager is concerned about potential stockouts during a high-demand season and uses the forecasting feature to make decisions.
Given the manager selects the high-demand season in the forecasting tool, when they retrieve the forecasted demand, then the system must indicate necessary safety stock levels that prevent stockouts at least 95% of the time during that season.
A user attempts to visualize the forecasted trends and compares them against historical sales data to validate predictions.
Given a user requests a comparison report, when they generate the report from the Demand Forecasting feature, then the system should present a visual chart comparing forecasted trends with actual historical sales data with at least 90% accuracy in overlapping trends.
A finance officer needs to analyze the accuracy of past demand forecasts to adjust future predictions effectively.
Given the finance officer accesses historical forecast data, when they run an accuracy assessment report, then the system must display the accuracy rate of past forecasts with at least 90% of forecasts falling within a 15% margin of error for stock levels.
A user wants to receive alerts when the forecasted demand changes significantly from previous estimates.
Given a user subscribes to demand alerts, when the demand forecast changes by more than 20% from previous predictions, then the system should notify the user via email and dashboard alert promptly.

Market Trend Tracker

The Market Trend Tracker monitors external market conditions and consumer behavior patterns to help users adapt their inventory strategies. By providing updated insights, users can respond to shifting demand proactively, optimizing their inventory planning and improving customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Real-Time Market Analysis
"As an inventory manager, I want real-time insights into market conditions so that I can adjust my inventory strategy proactively and meet customer demand effectively."
Description

The Real-Time Market Analysis feature provides users with up-to-the-minute data on market fluctuations and consumer behavior. By integrating external data sources and analytics, this capability enables users to see trends as they emerge, making it easier to adjust purchases, stock levels, and strategies dynamically. Its implementation will enhance decision-making processes and minimize stockouts or surplus inventory by aligning purchasing with actual market demand. This leads to improved customer satisfaction as users can meet demand effectively and with precision.

Acceptance Criteria
User can access real-time market analysis dashboard to view current market trends and consumer behavior data at any given time.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, When they navigate to the 'Market Analysis' section, Then they should see updated market trend data displayed on the dashboard without any delays.
User receives alerts for significant market fluctuations that could affect their inventory strategy.
Given the user has set preferences for market alerts, When a significant market change occurs, Then the user should receive an immediate notification via the application and email.
User can filter market data based on specific timeframes and categories to analyze trends effectively.
Given the user is on the market analysis dashboard, When they apply filters for timeframes and categories, Then the displayed data should change to reflect only the selected filters accurately.
User can integrate external data sources to enhance the accuracy of market analysis.
Given the user has access to external data sources, When they configure integrations within the settings, Then the system should successfully pull in data from the specified sources for analysis.
User can generate a report summarizing market trends and their potential impact on inventory levels.
Given the user has accessed the market analysis data, When they select the option to generate a report, Then they should receive a comprehensive report that includes data visualizations and insights based on the selected date range and categories.
User can view historical market data to compare with current trends and make informed decisions.
Given the user is in the market analysis section, When they choose to view historical data, Then the system should display accurate historical data for comparison alongside current market trends.
User has the capability to adjust inventory levels based on the insights provided by the real-time market analysis feature.
Given the user has identified potential stock adjustments based on market analysis, When they confirm adjustments in the inventory management system, Then the inventory levels should be updated accordingly in real-time.
Customized Alerts for Trend Changes
"As a business owner, I want to receive alerts when there are significant changes in market trends so that I can take immediate action to protect my inventory and sales."
Description

The Customized Alerts for Trend Changes requirement allows users to set personalized notifications for specific market conditions, such as sudden shifts in consumer preferences or significant supply chain disruptions. This feature will include customizable thresholds for alerts based on user-defined criteria, giving users the flexibility to focus on what's most relevant to their inventory needs. The benefit is that it not only keeps users informed of critical changes but also allows timely actions to secure their inventory, thus preventing potential losses and enhancing operational responsiveness.

Acceptance Criteria
User sets customized alerts for a sudden increase in demand for a specific product category on the Market Trend Tracker.
Given the user has access to the Customized Alerts feature, when they specify a threshold for a sudden increase in product demand, then the system should successfully create an alert that notifies the user promptly when the threshold is met.
User modifies an existing alert for supply chain disruptions to adjust the notification threshold.
Given the user has an existing supply chain disruption alert, when they change the threshold value and save the changes, then the system should successfully update the alert and reflect the new threshold value in the user's alert list.
User receives an alert for a significant drop in a specific product's consumer demand that they previously specified.
Given the user set an alert for a significant drop in consumer demand, when the market data indicates a drop that meets the alert criteria, then the system should notify the user immediately through their preferred notification channel (email, SMS, etc.).
User checks the history of alerts triggered based on their defined criteria to analyze past trends.
Given the user wants to review past alerts, when they access the alert history section, then the system should display a complete list of triggered alerts with timestamps and details according to the user’s specified filtering options.
User sets alerts for multiple products and assesses the system's performance in handling these simultaneously.
Given the user sets alerts for multiple product categories, when the specified market conditions change for any of those categories, then the system should send out notifications for all relevant alerts without delay or error.
User receives an alert indicating that their customizable threshold for high demand has been surpassed.
Given the user established a threshold for high demand, when the demand surpasses this threshold, then the system should trigger the alert and confirm successful notification delivery to the user.
Historical Trend Reports
"As a data analyst, I want access to historical market trend reports so that I can analyze past behaviors and improve future inventory predictions."
Description

The Historical Trend Reports feature enables users to generate reports that showcase historical data regarding market trends, allowing businesses to analyze past consumer behavior and inventory performance. This data can be utilized to forecast future demand more accurately, identify seasonal patterns, and strategize inventory management accordingly. The capability of analyzing past market behaviors is crucial for improving inventory forecasting, optimizing stock levels, and enhancing profitability by aligning inventory more closely with expected demand.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates a historical trend report for the past year to assess inventory performance and consumer behavior around seasonal offers.
Given the user has selected the 'Generate Historical Trend Report' option, when they input the desired date range of the past year and click 'Generate', then the system should provide a downloadable report in PDF format displaying relevant inventory data and consumer trends within the specified timeframe.
User analyzes a historical trend report to identify seasonal patterns affecting inventory levels and to improve future inventory forecasts.
Given the user has generated a historical trend report, when they review the data, then they should be able to identify at least three distinct seasonal patterns that indicate fluctuations in consumer demand and make informed adjustments to their inventory strategy based on these insights.
User exports historical trend reports for presentation at a quarterly business review meeting to discuss inventory strategies with stakeholders.
Given the user has generated a historical trend report, when they select the 'Export' option, then they should be able to successfully export the report in both XLS and CSV formats for use in presentations without data loss or formatting issues.
User wants to use the historical trend reports to adjust their automated reorder thresholds based on past sales data.
Given that the user is on the automated reorder settings page, when they input updated thresholds based on insights gained from the historical trend reports, then the system should update the reorder thresholds and display a confirmation message that acknowledges the changes.
User examines trends regarding specific product categories to pinpoint which items require urgent restocking based on historical data.
Given the user has accessed the historical trend report, when they filter the data by product category, then they should be able to view a summary of inventory movement for each category, highlighting items that have fallen below established stock levels along with suggested reorder quantities.
User reviews historical trend reports to identify the effectiveness of past promotions on inventory turnover rates.
Given the user has generated a historical trend report that includes promotional periods, when they analyze the report, then they should be able to correlate at least two promotions with increased inventory turnover rates and derive insights for future promotional strategies.
Competitive Analysis Integration
"As a market strategist, I want insights into competitors’ inventory strategies so that I can adjust my approach to remain competitive and meet customer expectations."
Description

This requirement focuses on integrating a competitive analysis tool that provides insights into competitor inventory strategies and market positions. By analyzing competitors' actions and performance, users can better understand market dynamics and adjust their own inventory strategies to stay competitive. This integration not only enriches the user’s strategic planning but also aids in positioning their products more effectively in the market, ultimately leading to enhanced customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria
User Access to Competitive Analysis Data
Given a user has logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Market Trend Tracker, then they should see the options to view competitive analysis insights including competitor pricing, stock levels, and market trends.
Automated Alerts for Competitor Changes
Given that the competitive analysis tool is active, when there is a change in a competitor's inventory strategy, then the system should automatically send an alert to the user highlighting the change and suggesting potential inventory adjustments.
Integration with Existing Inventory Management System
Given the requirement for competitive analysis integration, when the feature is implemented, then it should seamlessly connect to the existing inventory management system without any data loss or performance issues.
User Training and Documentation on Competitive Analysis Tool
Given the competitive analysis tool is integrated into InvenTrack, when a user accesses the training module, then they should find comprehensive training materials and documentation on how to utilize the new feature effectively.
User Feedback on Competitive Analysis Insights
Given the competitive analysis tool is live, when users utilize the insights, then they should be able to provide feedback on usability and value directly through the application.
Performance Metrics for Competitive Analysis Integration
Given the implementation of the competitive analysis tool, when it is evaluated, then there should be defined performance metrics demonstrating improvements in inventory decisions such as reduced stockouts or increased sales.
User-Friendly Dashboard for Trends
"As a store manager, I want a visual dashboard that displays market trends and consumer behavior so that I can quickly assess and respond to changing conditions in my inventory strategy."
Description

The User-Friendly Dashboard for Trends provides a central place for users to visualize market trends and consumer behavior in an easily digestible format. This feature will utilize graphs, charts, and dynamic data visualizations tailored to user preferences, enabling quick comprehension of complex data sets. Enhancing user experience and engagement, this dashboard will empower users to make informed, data-driven decisions regarding their inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the dashboard to review current market trends and consumer behavior before making inventory purchasing decisions.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Market Trend Tracker dashboard, then they should see an overview of current market trends visualized through charts and graphs that are up-to-date.
User customizes the dashboard to show market trends that are relevant to their specific inventory needs.
Given the user is on the Market Trend Tracker dashboard, when they select their specific product categories in the customization options, then the dashboard should update to display trends relevant to those categories only.
User attempts to interpret complex data presented in the dashboard and needs clarity on a specific trend.
Given the user is viewing a specific trend chart, when they hover over the data points, then a tooltip should appear providing additional detailed information about that data point, including the date and percentage change.
User wants to analyze historical data trends alongside current market data for better decision-making.
Given the user is on the Market Trend Tracker dashboard, when they select the 'View Historical Data' option, then the dashboard should display a comparison of historical trends alongside current trends in a side-by-side format.
User shares the market trend dashboard insights with colleagues or stakeholders for collaborative decision-making.
Given the user is on the Market Trend Tracker dashboard, when they click on the 'Share' button, then they should be able to send a generated link to their colleagues that provides access to the current view of the dashboard.
User has a slow internet connection and needs to access the dashboard efficiently.
Given the user is accessing the dashboard with a slow internet connection, when the page loads, then it should display a loading state that eventually shows the user a simplified version of the dashboard to reduce load time without losing critical information.

Performance Metrics Dashboard

This dashboard offers users a comprehensive view of key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory levels, turnover rates, and cost efficiencies. It allows users to gauge their inventory's performance at a glance, driving data-informed decision-making and leading to better financial outcomes.

Requirements

Real-time KPI Tracking
"As a warehouse manager, I want to view real-time KPI metrics so that I can quickly identify any issues with inventory performance and take corrective actions before they escalate."
Description

The real-time KPI tracking feature allows users to continuously monitor key performance indicators such as inventory levels, turnover rates, and cost efficiencies effortlessly. This functionality provides immediate visibility into inventory performance, enabling users to detect trends and anomalies in real-time, which aids in making informed operational decisions. By integrating seamlessly with existing dashboards, this requirement enhances data accessibility and supports proactive inventory management, ultimately leading to cost reduction and improved financial health.

Acceptance Criteria
Real-time tracking of inventory levels during peak sales periods.
Given that a user is logged into the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when the current inventory level falls below the predefined threshold, then an alert for low stock must be triggered in real-time and displayed prominently on the dashboard.
Monitoring inventory turnover rates to identify slow-moving products.
Given that the user accesses the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when the inventory turnover rate for a specific product category is below the acceptable range for one week, then a notification must be generated to advise the user on potential actions for improvement.
Analyzing cost efficiency metrics over a specified time frame.
Given that a user selects a date range on the dashboard, when the cost efficiency metrics are generated, then the dashboard should display the total costs, total revenue, and the calculated cost efficiency ratio accurately based on the selected date range.
Identifying trends in stock levels across multiple locations.
Given that the user has multiple locations linked to their account, when the dashboard displays the stock levels, then the user must be able to visualize trends in stock levels for each location on a comparative graph within the dashboard.
Integrating seamless data updates from ERP systems.
Given that InvenTrack is integrated with an ERP system, when any changes in inventory are made in the ERP, then the updated inventory levels must be reflected on the Performance Metrics Dashboard within 5 minutes.
Supporting decision-making based on real-time KPI insights.
Given that the user views the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they hover over any KPI metric, then a tooltip must appear providing additional context and actionable insights related to that KPI.
Customizable Dashboard Widgets
"As a business owner, I want to customize my dashboard widgets so that I can focus on the KPIs that matter most to my business and streamline my inventory management decisions."
Description

This requirement involves implementing customizable dashboard widgets that allow users to tailor their dashboard view according to their specific preferences and needs. Users can select which KPIs to display prominently and can arrange them to enhance usability and access to critical data points. This flexibility enhances user engagement and ensures that each user can interact with the data in the most impactful way, improving their ability to assess inventory performance holistically and efficiently.

Acceptance Criteria
User customizes the dashboard by selecting key performance indicators (KPIs) relevant to their inventory management processes.
Given that the user is on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select desired KPIs and arrange the dashboard layout, then the dashboard should reflect the selected KPIs in the chosen arrangement without any delay in updates.
User saves the customized dashboard view for future access, ensuring personalized settings are preserved.
Given that the user has customized their dashboard, when they click the save button, then the dashboard configuration should be saved and persist upon next login.
User removes a KPI widget from the dashboard to declutter their view.
Given that the user is viewing their customized dashboard, when they click on the remove option for a specific KPI widget, then that widget should be removed and the dashboard should reorganize to fill any gaps created without requiring a page refresh.
User adds a new KPI widget that was not previously displayed on the dashboard.
Given that the user is on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they choose a KPI from the available options and add it as a widget, then the new KPI should appear on the dashboard in the default position, maintaining the integrity of previously set widgets.
User replenishes their dashboard preferences and resets it to the default settings.
Given that the user wants to reset their dashboard, when they select the reset option, then the dashboard should revert to the default KPIs and layout without any issues or data loss of historical records.
Multiple users customize their dashboards simultaneously from different locations without affecting each other's settings.
Given that two different users are customizing their dashboards at the same time, when they apply their changes, then each user's dashboard should reflect only their individual customizations without overwriting one another's settings.
User receives guidance or tooltips while customizing the dashboard to enhance usability.
Given that the user is on the customization settings of the dashboard, when they hover over any customization option, then a tooltip should appear providing a brief description of that option and its benefits for better understanding.
Automated Performance Alerts
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive automated alerts for performance changes so that I can respond quickly to challenges in inventory efficiency and maintain optimal stock levels."
Description

The automated performance alerts feature aims to notify users of significant fluctuations in inventory performance metrics, such as a sudden drop in turnover rates or an unexpected increase in stock levels. This requirement ensures that users are immediately informed of performance changes, allowing for timely interventions and adjustments to avoid stockouts or excess inventory. The alerts will be sent via email or in-app notifications, enhancing real-time responsiveness and facilitating proactive inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a notification when inventory turnover drops below the set threshold.
Given a user has configured a turnover rate threshold, when the turnover rate falls below this threshold, then the user should receive an alert via email and an in-app notification within 5 minutes of the threshold being breached.
User receives an alert when stock levels exceed a specified limit.
Given a user has defined a maximum stock level for a product, when the stock level exceeds this maximum limit, then the user must receive an alert through email and in-app notification immediately after the breach is detected.
User can customize the performance alert settings for specific metrics.
Given a user is in the alert settings menu, when they modify the thresholds for turnover rates and stock levels, then the system should save those settings and apply them to the automated alert system with immediate effect.
User receives a consolidated alert summary at the end of the day for all performance metrics.
Given it is the end of the business day, when the system compiles performance data, then the user receives a summary email containing all alerts generated throughout the day, including metrics that triggered alerts and their respective thresholds.
User can disable specific performance alerts without affecting others.
Given a user is in the alert management section, when they choose to disable a specific alert for turnover rates, then this alert should be turned off while other alerts remain active, and the user receives confirmation of this action.
The performance alerts system is tested under peak load conditions.
Given the system is being tested during peak usage times, when multiple performance alerts are triggered simultaneously, then the system must successfully deliver all alerts to the affected users within the expected timeframes without delays.
Historical Performance Analytics
"As a financial analyst, I want to access historical performance analytics so that I can review past trends and make informed forecasts about future inventory requirements and financial impacts."
Description

This requirement includes the development of a historical performance analytics module, allowing users to analyze past inventory performance over selected time frames. Users can compare historical data with current metrics to identify trends, evaluate the impact of seasonal fluctuations, and adjust strategies accordingly. This feature not only provides insights into inventory behavior over time but also assists in making informed projections for future inventory needs, helping businesses plan more effectively.

Acceptance Criteria
User views historical performance analytics for inventory levels over the last six months to identify trends in stock movement.
Given the user has selected the six-month time frame, when they access the historical performance analytics, then they should see a visual representation of inventory levels compared to past months.
User compares current inventory turnover rates with historical data from the previous year to evaluate performance improvements.
Given the user has chosen the previous year for comparison, when they analyze the turnover rates, then they should see a percentage change displayed clearly along with corresponding graphs.
User analyzes seasonal fluctuations in inventory performance during peak and off-peak seasons.
Given the user selects different seasonal time frames, when they retrieve data from the historical performance analytics, then they should receive clear insights indicating inventory changes and fluctuations across these seasons.
User generates a report on the historical performance of cost efficiencies related to inventory management over a customizable time frame.
Given the user requests a report for a customizable time frame, when they submit their request, then they should receive a downloadable report that accurately reflects all cost efficiency metrics during the selected period.
User validates the impact of historical data on future inventory projections through the performance analytics dashboard.
Given the user accesses the dashboard and inputs relevant variables for future projections, when they run the analysis, then the system should provide accurate projected inventory needs based on historical data trends.
User wants to toggle between different inventory metrics in the historical performance analytics module.
Given that the user is on the historical performance analytics dashboard, when they select different metrics (e.g., turnover rates, stock levels), then the dashboard should refresh and display the chosen metrics dynamically without delay.
User accesses historical performance analytics on a mobile device for real-time insights while on the move.
Given the user is using the mobile app, when they navigate to the historical performance analytics section, then the interface should be optimized for mobile viewing and performance, providing all relevant insights clearly.
Multi-Location Performance Comparison
"As an operations coordinator, I want to compare performance metrics of different locations so that I can identify best practices and improve our inventory management across all sites."
Description

The multi-location performance comparison feature will enable users to analyze and compare inventory metrics across multiple business locations. This requirement is essential for businesses operating at multiple sites, as it highlights performance variances, helping identify best practices and areas needing attention. By providing comparative analytics across locations, this feature encourages operational alignment and performance optimization wherever needed across the organization.

Acceptance Criteria
User navigates to the multi-location performance comparison dashboard to view inventory metrics across multiple locations simultaneously.
Given a user with appropriate access rights, when they select the 'Multi-Location Performance Comparison' option, then the dashboard should display comparative metrics for each location, including inventory levels, turnover rates, and cost efficiencies.
User wants to filter performance metrics by selected locations to analyze specific data points.
Given the dashboard is displayed, when a user applies filters to select specific locations, then the dashboard should update in real-time to reflect only the selected locations' performance metrics without errors.
User needs to export the performance comparison report for further analysis and presentation.
Given that the user has viewed the performance comparison on the dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then a downloadable report containing the selected metrics in CSV format should be generated and available for download within 5 seconds.
User wants to view historical performance metrics to identify trends over time.
Given the user selects a date range for the historical metrics, when they submit the date range, then the dashboard should present historical comparative metrics for the selected period with visual graphs illustrating trends.
User seeks to receive alerts for significant variances in inventory performance across locations.
Given the user has configured alert settings, when inventory performance metrics deviate beyond predefined thresholds, then notifications should be triggered and sent to the user's designated communication channel (email or in-app notification) promptly.
User intends to access detailed information about performance metrics for each location.
Given the multi-location performance comparison dashboard is displayed, when a user clicks on a specific location, then detailed metrics for that location should be shown, including a breakdown of inventory levels, turnover rates, and cost efficiencies, within 3 seconds.

Integration Harmony

This feature ensures seamless integration with existing systems, such as ERP and accounting software, providing a unified view of inventory data. Users benefit from a streamlined workflow and enhanced data accuracy, resulting in quicker responses to inventory needs and improved operational efficiency.

Requirements

Data Sync Protocol
"As a warehouse manager, I want inventory data to be automatically synchronized across all systems so that I can have real-time insights and avoid discrepancies in stock levels."
Description

The Data Sync Protocol requirement ensures that inventory data is consistently synchronized across all integrated systems, such as ERP and accounting software. This requirement is critical for achieving a unified view of inventory management, allowing users to access up-to-date information regardless of which system they are in. By enabling automatic and real-time updates, this feature minimizes data discrepancies, reduces manual errors, and allows for greater efficiency in inventory tracking and management. This requirement will enhance the overall user experience by providing timely and accurate data to facilitate decision-making processes. Implementation of this requirement will lead to improved operational efficiency and data accuracy, ultimately benefitting the users' inventory management practices.

Acceptance Criteria
User successfully integrates InvenTrack with their existing ERP system.
Given the user has authenticated and authorized the integration with the ERP system, when the user initiates the data sync, then all inventory data should be reflected accurately in both InvenTrack and the ERP system within 5 minutes.
User updates inventory quantities in InvenTrack and verifies data consistency in the accounting software.
Given that the user has updated inventory quantities in InvenTrack, when the sync process runs, then the accounting software should display the updated quantities within 2 minutes without any discrepancies.
User adds a new product in the ERP system and checks if it appears in InvenTrack.
Given the user has added a new product in the ERP system, when the data sync occurs, then the new product should appear in InvenTrack with all relevant details populated correctly within 5 minutes.
User examines the sync log for errors after an attempted data sync.
Given the data sync was attempted, when the user reviews the sync log, then there should be no error messages displayed, and the log should confirm successful synchronization of data across all systems.
User triggers a manual sync and confirms the update of stock levels across systems.
Given that the user manually triggers a data sync, when the sync is completed, then the stock levels in InvenTrack and the integrated systems should match and reflect the most current values within 1 minute.
User tests the integration after a system update to ensure continued functionality.
Given that the user has performed a software update on either InvenTrack or the ERP system, when the user executes a data sync, then no integration errors should occur, and data should sync seamlessly as before.
User Access Control
"As an admin, I want to configure user roles and permissions so that I can control access to sensitive inventory data and ensure proper data security."
Description

The User Access Control requirement establishes a robust access management framework for different user roles within the InvenTrack platform. This feature is essential for ensuring data security and integrity by allowing administrators to define permissions for various user roles, such as warehouse staff, managers, and accountants. By implementing role-based access control (RBAC), users will only be able to view or modify information relevant to their responsibilities, thus preventing unauthorized access to sensitive data. This requirement is vital for maintaining security standards and regulatory compliance, while also promoting a streamlined workflow among users. It enhances user confidence in the platform, knowing that their data is protected and managed securely.

Acceptance Criteria
Admin Role Management for User Access Control
Given an administrator, when they attempt to create a new user role, then the new role should be successfully created and assigned specific permissions based on selected options.
User Role Permissions Validation
Given a warehouse staff user, when they log in to the InvenTrack platform, then they should only have access to relevant inventory data and functionalities, as defined by the role's permissions.
Unauthorized Access Prevention
Given any user with limitations, when they attempt to access sensitive data outside their permission scope, then the system should deny access and provide an appropriate error message.
Role-Based Access Control Changes
Given an existing user role, when an administrator modifies the permissions of that role, then the changes should be reflected immediately without the need for user re-login.
Audit Log for Access Management
Given an administrator, when they check the access management audit log, then it should display a complete record of all user access attempts, including successful and failed logins, within the specified timeframe.
Multi-Location User Role Synchronization
Given a user assigned to multiple locations, when the administrator updates the user's role at one location, then the role should automatically sync across all assigned locations.
Role-Based User Notification System
Given a role update, when a user's role changes, then the user should receive a notification detailing their new permissions and any changes to their access rights.
Automated Reporting System
"As a business owner, I want to receive automated inventory reports so that I can stay informed about stock levels and make timely decisions without manual effort."
Description

The Automated Reporting System requirement enables the generation of comprehensive inventory reports with minimal user intervention. This feature is pivotal for providing users with insights into inventory levels, reorder status, and stock performance over time. By automating the reporting process, users will receive timely notifications and visual representations of their inventory status, which facilitates proactive management decisions. The implementation of this requirement will simplify the reporting process, allow for data-driven decision-making, and enhance the overall efficiency of inventory management practices. Moreover, users can customize the report formats to meet specific business needs, adding flexibility to the reporting capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates an automated inventory report for the first time through the InvenTrack dashboard.
Given that the user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the automated reporting section and select 'Generate Report', then a comprehensive inventory report is produced with relevant data on inventory levels, reorder status, and stock performance without error.
User customizes the report format before generating an automated inventory report.
Given that the user is in the automated reporting section, when they select customization options for the report format, then the system should allow the user to choose from various templates or formats and save these preferences for future reports.
User receives a notification for an automated inventory report generation.
Given that the user has set up automated reporting, when the scheduled time for report generation occurs, then the user should receive an email notification confirming the report has been generated and is available for viewing.
User views the generated inventory report and verifies its accuracy.
Given that the user has generated an inventory report, when they open and review the report, then all data presented must match the latest inventory levels, reorder status, and stock performance metrics in the system, ensuring no discrepancies exist.
User shares the automated inventory report with team members through the platform.
Given that the user has accessed the generated report, when they select the 'Share' option and input team member emails, then the system successfully sends the report via email to the designated recipients with appropriate access permissions.
User sets up a recurring automated report for monthly inventory levels.
Given that the user is in the report scheduling section, when they set the parameters for monthly reporting and save the settings, then the system should confirm that a recurring report setup has been established with email notification for each generated report.
Real-time Inventory Alerts
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time alerts about low stock levels so that I can promptly reorder items and avoid stockouts."
Description

The Real-time Inventory Alerts requirement facilitates proactive inventory management by sending notifications regarding low stock levels, potential stockouts, or surplus inventory. This feature is essential for preventing lost sales opportunities due to stockouts or unnecessary costs from excess stock. By configuring alerts based on user-defined thresholds, businesses can respond swiftly to inventory needs and ensure optimal stock levels are maintained. The implementation of this requirement will improve inventory responsiveness and drive operational efficiency by enabling users to take timely actions based on actionable data.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a notification when inventory levels of a specific product fall below their defined threshold.
Given that the user has defined a low stock threshold for product X, when inventory levels for product X reach the defined threshold, then the user should receive an immediate notification via email and the InvenTrack dashboard.
User configures multiple alerts for various products using the InvenTrack interface.
Given that the user is on the alert configuration page, when the user sets up alerts for multiple products with different thresholds, then all alerts should be saved correctly and can be edited or deleted at any time.
User receives a notification regarding potential stockouts three days in advance based on inventory trends.
Given that the user has enabled stockout alerts, when the system predicts a stockout of product Y within three days based on current trends, then the user should receive a notification on the dashboard and via push notification on the mobile app.
User receives a notification for surplus inventory that exceeds the predefined threshold.
Given that the user has defined a surplus threshold for product Z, when inventory levels of product Z exceed this threshold, then the user should receive a notification via email and on the InvenTrack dashboard for necessary actions.
User can view the history of inventory alerts for informed decision-making.
Given that the user is on the inventory alerts history page, when the user requests to view past notifications, then the system should display a comprehensive list of all alerts sent, including product details and timestamps.
Integrated systems synchronize inventory alert settings without manual updates.
Given that the user has linked their ERP system to InvenTrack, when they update alert settings in InvenTrack, then these changes should automatically synchronize with their ERP system without requiring additional input from the user.
User verifies that alerts are triggered based on real-time inventory data updates.
Given that real-time inventory tracking is enabled, when inventory data is updated due to sales or restocking, then alerts should trigger based on the latest inventory levels reflecting the changes accurately and timely.
Integration Customization Options
"As an IT professional, I want to customize integration settings with our ERP system so that I can ensure optimal data flow that reflects our unique business processes."
Description

The Integration Customization Options requirement allows users to personalize the integration settings with their existing ERP and accounting systems. This feature is crucial for meeting diverse user needs and supporting various workflows. By providing customization options, users can select which data points to sync, set up specific triggers for transactions, and tailor the integration to their unique operational requirements. This flexibility enhances system adaptability and ensures that users can make the most of their existing technology stack. By implementing this requirement, users increase operational efficiency and ensure that the integration aligns perfectly with their business processes.

Acceptance Criteria
User configures integration settings with their existing ERP system.
Given the user is on the integration customization page, when they choose specific data points to sync and save the settings, then the selected data points should be correctly synced with the ERP system without errors.
User establishes triggers for inventory transactions.
Given the user is on the triggers setup page, when they select an inventory transaction type (e.g., purchase or sale) and define the trigger conditions, then the system should successfully record the triggers and execute them as specified during actual transactions.
User tests the integration synchronization after customization.
Given the user has customized integration settings, when they perform a manual sync operation, then the system should accurately reflect the updated inventory data in both InvenTrack and the ERP system within 5 minutes, confirming successful integration.
User receives feedback on integration customization.
Given the user completes their integration configuration and clicks on 'Finish', then the system should display a summary of the selected options and a success message indicating the completion of the customization process.
User modifies existing integration settings after initial setup.
Given the user is on the integration settings page, when they change any previously selected data points or triggers and save the changes, then the updated settings should be applied without requiring additional confirmation from the user.
Inventory Forecasting Tool
"As a supply chain manager, I want to use forecasting tools to analyze data and predict future inventory needs so that I can optimize stock levels and reduce costs."
Description

The Inventory Forecasting Tool requirement introduces advanced analytics for predicting future inventory needs based on historical data and market trends. This feature empowers businesses to plan inventory levels more accurately, reducing the risk of overstocking or stockouts. By utilizing sophisticated algorithms and data-driven insights, users can adjust their inventory strategies proactively and improve cash flow management. The tool will assist users in making informed decisions regarding purchasing, production, and inventory movement. Implementing this requirement is vital for safeguarding against inventory-related costs and ensuring a smoother supply chain management experience.

Acceptance Criteria
User uploads historical inventory data for analysis and forecasting.
Given that the user has uploaded inventory data, when the system processes this data, then it should generate accurate forecasts for future inventory needs based on the historical data within 5 minutes, with a margin of error not exceeding 10%.
User receives automated alerts for inventory restocking based on forecast predictions.
Given that the forecasting tool has predicted a need for restocking, when the inventory level falls below the predefined threshold, then the user should receive an automated alert via email and in-app notification within 1 hour of the inventory level falling below the threshold.
User adjusts forecast settings based on seasonal trends and patterns.
Given that the user is on the forecast settings page, when they modify the seasonal trend parameters, then the system should successfully save the changes and update the forecast results accordingly within 2 minutes.
User generates a report based on inventory forecasts for the next quarter.
Given that the user is in the reporting section, when they select the inventory forecasts option for the next quarter, then the system should generate a comprehensive report in PDF format within 3 minutes, including graphical representations and actionable insights.
User confirms forecast accuracy by comparing predictions with actual sales data.
Given that the user has accessed the forecast results page, when they compare the forecasts to the actual sales data from the previous quarter, then the forecast accuracy should be at least 90% based on historical data for the same period.
User integrates the forecasting tool with their existing ERP system.
Given that the user initiates the integration process, when the credentials for the ERP system are entered correctly, then the system should successfully establish a connection and sync relevant inventory data without errors within 5 minutes.
User provides feedback on the forecasting tool's usability.
Given that the user has completed the forecasting process, when they are prompted to provide feedback, then the feedback form should load within 3 seconds and allow the user to submit their feedback without errors.

Virtual Inventory Assistant Chatbot

This AI-driven chatbot is available 24/7 to answer user queries related to inventory management, suggest actions based on data, and offer troubleshooting support. Users enjoy enhanced convenience and immediate access to information, allowing them to resolve issues swiftly and maintain optimal inventory control.

Requirements

24/7 Query Resolution
"As an inventory manager, I want to have access to a chatbot that can answer my inventory management questions any time of the day, so that I can quickly solve issues without waiting for human support."
Description

The Virtual Inventory Assistant Chatbot must be capable of providing instant responses to user queries regarding inventory management at any time of day or night. This requirement ensures users receive immediate assistance, significantly reducing wait times and improving overall user satisfaction. The chatbot should be integrated with the existing inventory management system to access real-time data, enabling it to generate accurate and relevant answers. By automating query handling, businesses can enhance productivity, reduce the burden on support staff, and improve overall operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User is accessing the Virtual Inventory Assistant Chatbot during peak business hours to inquire about stock levels for a specific product.
Given a user asks the chatbot about stock levels, When the chatbot receives the query, Then it should provide accurate stock level information within 5 seconds.
A user seeks assistance with an urgent inventory discrepancy late at night via the chatbot.
Given a user reports an inventory discrepancy, When the chatbot processes the request, Then it should provide a step-by-step solution and escalate the issue if necessary, within 10 seconds.
A user requests a summary of inventory trends over the last quarter through the chatbot.
Given a user requests inventory trends, When the chatbot accesses the historical data, Then it should generate and display a summary of trends accurately within 8 seconds.
A user wants to know the reorder alerts that have been triggered by the chatbot.
Given a user asks about reorder alerts, When the chatbot retrieves the information, Then it should list all triggered alerts clearly and accurately in under 5 seconds.
A user tries to troubleshoot a product that is not reflecting the correct stock in the inventory management system.
Given a user describes a troubleshooting issue, When the chatbot analyzes the request, Then it should provide appropriate troubleshooting steps and possible causes, ensuring clarity and relevance.
A user needs detailed guidance on setting up automated reorder notifications through the chatbot.
Given a user inquires about automating reorder notifications, When the chatbot is prompted, Then it should deliver a comprehensive guide and direct the user to settings to activate the notifications efficiently.
A user asks the chatbot for a comparison of recent inventory performance metrics in the dashboard.
Given a user requests a comparison of recent performance metrics, When the chatbot retrieves the data, Then it should present a clear and concise comparison to the user in less than 7 seconds.
Data-Driven Action Suggestions
"As a small business owner, I want the chatbot to suggest specific actions for my inventory management based on real-time data, so that I can make informed decisions and improve my stock levels."
Description

The chatbot must provide actionable suggestions based on the user's inventory data, such as reorder recommendations and optimization tips. Utilizing intelligent algorithms, the assistant will analyze stock levels, sales trends, and other data points to generate tailored recommendations for users, enhancing decision-making capabilities. By offering precise guidance, the virtual assistant can help prevent stockouts and reduce excess inventory costs, leading to improved cash flow and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User queries the virtual assistant for inventory reorder suggestions during a low stock alert and needs immediate guidance on which items to reorder based on current sales trends.
Given a low stock alert on a product, when the user asks the chatbot for reorder suggestions, then the chatbot should provide at least three actionable recommendations based on the latest sales data and current stock levels.
A user interacts with the chatbot to seek optimization tips for reducing excess inventory after noticing a surplus in their stock levels.
Given the user has excess inventory, when they request tips for reduction, then the chatbot should provide at least five actionable strategies that address their specific inventory situation.
The user wants to verify the accuracy of the suggested reorder recommendations provided by the chatbot before placing an order.
Given the chatbot has provided reorder recommendations, when the user reviews them, then the chatbot should display the associated data points (e.g., current stock level, average sales rate, and lead time) supporting each suggestion.
A user seeks immediate troubleshooting support regarding a discrepancy between the recommended reorder quantity and what they believe is necessary.
Given the user asks for troubleshooting assistance, when they align their perspective against the chatbot's recommendation, then the chatbot should facilitate a dialogue step that clarifies the reason for the discrepancy based on available inventory data.
The chatbot delivers a daily summary report of actionable suggestions, including both reorder recommendations and optimization tips to the user via the chat interface.
Given it is the end of the day, when the user checks in with the chatbot, then the chatbot should provide a concise summary of all actionable suggestions generated throughout the day, highlighting any critical reorder items and optimization opportunities tailored to the user's inventory.
Users query the chatbot regarding historical performance data related to their inventory decisions and how they could optimize future actions.
Given the user wants historical performance insights, when they request this data, then the chatbot should retrieve and present relevant historical data, including previous reorder recommendations and their outcomes, with clear insights on implications for future decisions.
Integrated Troubleshooting Support
"As a user encountering issues with inventory management, I want the chatbot to provide troubleshooting assistance, so that I can resolve problems without needing to contact technical support."
Description

The chatbot should offer troubleshooting support for common issues related to inventory discrepancies and system integration challenges. This feature must include a comprehensive database of FAQs and solutions that users can access. By guiding users through common problems, the chatbot minimizes downtime and encourages faster resolutions. Additionally, this requirement should involve creating a feedback loop whereby users can report unresolved issues, allowing for future enhancement of the platform’s support resources.

Acceptance Criteria
User interacts with the Virtual Inventory Assistant Chatbot to troubleshoot an inventory discrepancy caused by data entry errors.
Given the user accesses the chatbot, when they ask about inventory discrepancies, then the chatbot should provide relevant FAQs and step-by-step troubleshooting instructions.
A user requests assistance from the chatbot regarding integration issues with the existing ERP system.
Given the user describes an integration issue, when they interact with the chatbot, then it should offer specific troubleshooting actions and direct links to related FAQ articles.
User encounters an unresolved inventory management issue that the chatbot could not address effectively.
Given that a user reports an unresolved issue, when they submit feedback through the chatbot, then the system should successfully log the feedback and confirm receipt to the user.
A user utilizes the FAQ section in the chatbot to resolve a common system integration question.
Given the user initiates a chat and requests FAQs about common integration issues, when the chatbot retrieves results, then it should display a relevant list of FAQs with clear solutions.
A business user wants to review the effectiveness of the chatbot’s troubleshooting solutions.
Given a user accesses the chatbot’s performance report, when they review the feedback metrics, then they should see aggregated data reflecting the number of resolved and unresolved issues along with satisfaction ratings from users.
The chatbot needs to adapt based on the most frequently reported unresolved issues by users.
Given the chatbot receives feedback on unresolved issues, when this data is compiled, then it should trigger updates to the FAQ database to include newly observed common issues and solutions.
Personalized User Interaction
"As a frequent user of the inventory system, I want the chatbot to recognize my previous questions and tailor its suggestions based on my past interactions, so that I receive a more relevant and helpful experience."
Description

The Virtual Inventory Assistant Chatbot must incorporate machine learning capabilities to personalize user interactions. The chatbot should learn from prior user interactions to adjust its responses and suggestions, thereby improving user experience over time. By providing personalized insights and recommendations, the assistant can engage users more effectively, resulting in higher satisfaction and repeated usage. This requirement is crucial for fostering a sense of familiarity and trust between users and the AI assistant.

Acceptance Criteria
Personalized Interaction Based on Previous Query History
Given a user who has previously interacted with the chatbot, when they initiate a new conversation, then the chatbot should recall and mention at least two relevant past queries to provide contextually personalized assistance.
Adaptive Learning Over Time
Given that a user interacts with the chatbot multiple times, when evaluating the effectiveness of the responses, then the chatbot should demonstrate an increase in relevance and accuracy of suggestions by at least 30% over the course of 10 interactions.
User Satisfaction Measurement
Given that the user receives personalized assistance from the chatbot, when they complete their interaction, then they should be prompted to rate their experience, and at least 80% of ratings should be 4 stars or above on a 5-star scale.
Contextual Follow-up Questions
Given that the chatbot provides a recommendation to a user, when the user responds with a follow-up, then the chatbot should generate contextually relevant follow-up questions that help clarify the user's needs based on their previous interactions.
Response Time Evaluation for Personalized Queries
Given that a user asks a personalized query, when the chatbot processes the request, then the average response time for personal queries should not exceed 3 seconds, ensuring users experience minimal wait times.
Tracking User Engagement Over Multiple Sessions
Given that a user interacts with the chatbot on different occasions, when assessing their engagement level, then the system should record at least 5 unique interactions within a month for the user to be considered actively engaged.
Proactive Suggestions Based on User Behavior
Given that the chatbot analyzes a user's inventory management behavior, when the user interacts with the chatbot, then it should proactively suggest at least one action or insight based on their past activities within a 24-hour period.
Multilingual Support
"As a user who speaks Spanish, I want the chatbot to assist me in my preferred language, so that I can understand and communicate effectively without language constraints."
Description

The chatbot needs to support multiple languages to cater to businesses operating in diverse markets. This requirement involves integrating language processing capabilities to allow users to interact with the chatbot in their preferred language, enhancing accessibility and broadening the user base. By ensuring that users from various linguistic backgrounds can utilize the features of InvenTrack, the platform can empower more businesses to efficiently manage their inventories, regardless of language barriers.

Acceptance Criteria
User interacts with the Virtual Inventory Assistant Chatbot in Spanish to get real-time inventory updates and support during business hours.
Given the user selects Spanish as the preferred language, When a query related to inventory status is submitted, Then the chatbot responds accurately in Spanish with the relevant inventory information.
A user prefers to communicate in French and seeks troubleshooting advice from the chatbot after receiving an error during inventory listing.
Given the user has chosen French, When the user asks for troubleshooting help, Then the chatbot provides a clear and effective response in French detailing steps to resolve the error.
The user needs to switch the language of the conversation from English to German mid-interaction to search for a specific product.
Given the user has initiated a conversation in English, When they request to switch to German, Then the chatbot seamlessly changes the conversation to German without losing the context of previous queries.
A user interacting with the chatbot in Mandarin requests an explanation of automated reorder alerts.
Given the user is conversing in Mandarin, When they ask for an explanation about automated reorder alerts, Then the chatbot accurately explains the feature in Mandarin with supporting examples.
An international team meets to discuss the chatbot's effectiveness in different languages after it has been implemented.
Given that the chatbot has been deployed, When team members test the chatbot in English, Spanish, French, and Mandarin, Then the chatbot responds accurately and timely in all supported languages, demonstrating its multilingual capability.
A new user, who prefers Portuguese, accesses the chatbot for initial setup guidance.
Given that the user selects Portuguese language during the first interaction, When they request setup instructions, Then the chatbot provides clear, step-by-step guidance in Portuguese.

Customizable View Filters

This feature allows users to create personalized views of inventory data based on specific criteria such as product categories, stock levels, or sales performance. By enabling tailored dashboards, users can focus on the most relevant information for their role, improving visibility and decision-making.

Requirements

Flexible Filter Configuration
"As an inventory manager, I want to create custom filters for viewing inventory data so that I can focus on the specific metrics that are most relevant to my role and drive informed decision-making."
Description

The Flexible Filter Configuration requirement enables users to create and manage custom filters for viewing their inventory data. Users can define specific criteria, such as product categories, stock levels, sales performance, and other relevant metrics to tailor their data view. This functionality empowers users to streamline their inventory analysis by focusing on the most pertinent information, enhancing overall visibility and facilitating better decision-making. By integrating seamlessly with the existing dashboard interface, this feature allows for rapid adjustments and improvements over time, catering to evolving business needs and operational strategies.

Acceptance Criteria
User creates a custom filter for viewing low stock items to proactively manage inventory levels.
Given a user is on the inventory dashboard, when they select 'Create Filter', and specify criteria for 'Stock Level is Low', then the system should display only items with stock levels below a predefined threshold.
User modifies an existing filter to include an additional product category for more targeted analysis.
Given a user has an existing filter for 'Electronics', when they choose to edit the filter and add 'Accessories', then the system should update the view to show both Electronics and Accessories categories.
User saves a custom filter to make it accessible for future use without losing the configuration.
Given a user has configured a filter with multiple criteria, when they click 'Save Filter' and provide a name, then the filter should be saved and accessible in the 'Saved Filters' list for future sessions.
User applies a complex filter with multiple criteria simultaneously to narrow down inventory data.
Given a user is on the inventory dashboard, when they create a filter including 'Category: Clothing' and 'Sales Performance: Above Average', then the dashboard should only show clothing items with above-average sales.
User removes a previously created filter and verifies that the inventory dashboard reflects all available items without filtering.
Given a user has applied a filter, when they click 'Remove Filter', then the inventory dashboard should reset to show all inventory items as per the default view without any filters applied.
User shares a custom filter with colleagues to promote data collaboration within the team.
Given a user has created a custom filter, when they select the 'Share Filter' option and enter colleague emails, then the system should send an invitation to those emails with access to the shared filter.
User accesses the available filter templates to quickly set up a common view without creating filters from scratch.
Given a user is on the filter configuration screen, when they select 'Load Template', then they should see a list of predefined filters to choose from, enabling quick access to common data views.
Real-time Data Refresh
"As a store manager, I want my custom view filters to refresh automatically with real-time data so that I can make quick and informed decisions based on the latest inventory status."
Description

The Real-time Data Refresh requirement ensures that the customizable view filters reflect the most up-to-date inventory information. Whenever there are changes in stock levels or sales data, the filtered views automatically refresh to provide users with live insights. This feature is critical in dynamic inventory environments where timely access to current data can significantly impact operational efficiency and responsiveness. The seamless integration of this feature enhances user experience, as users can rely on real-time analytics without manual refreshes, thereby reducing the risk of decisions based on outdated information.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the customizable view filters dashboard after a large stock shipment has been added to the system.
Given the user is on the customizable view filters dashboard, when stock levels are updated due to a new shipment, then the dashboard should automatically refresh to display current stock levels within 5 seconds.
A user applies a filter based on product categories during a peak sales period.
Given the user has applied a filter to view products by category, when there is a change in sales performance data, then the view should refresh within 3 seconds to reflect the latest sales figures.
An administrator modifies inventory data manually while a user is viewing the filtered inventory dashboard.
Given an administrator is updating inventory data, when the user is viewing their customizable filters dashboard, then the updates should reflect in real-time without the user having to refresh their view manually.
A sales manager accesses historical sales data filtered by stock levels on a busy sales day.
Given the sales manager has applied filters for stock levels on the dashboard, when there is an increase in stock sold, then the dashboard should update the displayed stock levels to reflect the change instantly.
A warehouse staff member checks the dashboard for low stock alerts while receiving new inventory.
Given the warehouse staff member is viewing alerts on the dashboard, when new inventory is added, then any low stock alerts should be updated directly within 5 seconds to ensure they have current information.
User attempts to filter the inventory dashboard by multiple criteria simultaneously.
Given the user is applying multiple filters to the dashboard, when they submit the filter request, then the dashboard should refresh and reflect the combined data within 4 seconds, maintaining all applied criteria.
A user with slow internet connectivity accesses the customizable view filters dashboard.
Given the user has a slow internet connection, when they interact with the customizable view filters, then the dashboard should still refresh with the most recent data within 10 seconds to ensure usability.
User Role-Based Filter Access
"As an administrator, I want to set role-based permissions for custom view filters so that I can ensure only authorized users have access to sensitive inventory data based on their roles."
Description

The User Role-Based Filter Access requirement allows administrators to control who can create, modify, or view specific custom filters based on user roles within the organization. This feature enhances data security and ensures that sensitive information is only accessible to authorized personnel. By establishing clear roles and permissions, organizations can customize user experiences while maintaining compliance with internal policies and best practices. This requirement aims to improve collaboration while safeguarding critical data, enabling employees to access relevant information according to their job responsibilities.

Acceptance Criteria
Administrator defines roles and permissions for users accessing Customizable View Filters based on their job in the organization.
Given an administrator is logged in, when they create a user role and specify filter permissions, then the user should be able to create and view filters as per assigned permissions.
A user with a specific role attempts to view a filter they do not have permissions for.
Given a user is logged in with restricted access, when they attempt to access a restricted filter, then an error message should be displayed stating insufficient permissions.
An administrator modifies an existing role to change filter access permissions.
Given an administrator is logged in, when they modify a user's role to grant additional filter access, then the user should have updated access rights immediately reflected in their dashboard.
A user creates a custom filter based on their role's permissions.
Given a user is logged in with the right permissions, when they create a custom filter, then the filter should be saved successfully and available for their use at the next login.
An administrator reviews the list of users and their respective filter access permissions.
Given an administrator is logged in, when they navigate to the role management section, then they should see a comprehensive list of users along with their filter permissions indicated clearly.
A user attempts to modify a filter that they are not authorized to change due to role restrictions.
Given a user is logged in, when they attempt to edit a filter they do not have permissions for, then they should receive a notification indicating they are not authorized to make changes to that filter.
Exportable Filter Views
"As a data analyst, I want to be able to export my customized inventory view to a CSV file so that I can analyze the information further and share it with my team easily."
Description

The Exportable Filter Views requirement facilitates users in exporting their filtered inventory data into various formats such as CSV, Excel, or PDF. This functionality allows for easier data sharing and presentation for team meetings, reports, or analysis outside of the InvenTrack platform. Users can leverage this feature to present relevant insights to stakeholders or incorporate inventory data into broader company reports, enhancing collaboration and transparency across departments. By making filtered data exportable, the requirement promotes a data-driven culture by enabling seamless access to tailored reports and analytics.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to export their filtered inventory data as a CSV file to analyze trends in sales performance for the last quarter.
Given the user has applied filters to their inventory data, when they select the 'Export' option and choose 'CSV', then the data should be downloaded in a CSV format containing only the filtered information.
A team member needs to prepare a presentation for a meeting and requires the inventory data in PDF format, focusing on specific product categories.
Given the user has filtered the inventory data by product categories, when they select the 'Export' option and choose 'PDF', then the document should be generated and include the selected filters and relevant data in a visually appealing format.
The finance department needs to incorporate inventory data into their monthly reports and requires an Excel file format for ease of analysis.
Given the user has specified the filters for stock levels and sales performance, when they select the 'Export' option and choose 'Excel', then an Excel file should be created with all relevant metrics organized in columns for further analysis.
A user wants to share the filtered inventory report with external stakeholders through email.
Given the user has successfully exported the inventory report, when they attach the exported file to an email and send it, then the recipients should receive the file in the original format selected (CSV, PDF, or Excel) without any data loss.
A user has applied multiple filters and wants to ensure all selected criteria are reflected in the exported file.
Given the user has applied specific filters, when the export is completed, then the exported file should accurately display all the filters applied, including category names and values, confirming completeness of the data set.
A user needs to export data quickly to meet a reporting deadline that requires immediate action.
Given the user has filtered the inventory for urgent needs, when they execute the export, then the system should allow for a streamlined export process, completing the action within 5 seconds for a standard data set.
Users wish to create a scheduled export for weekly reports on inventory metrics.
Given the user sets up a scheduled task for exporting filtered inventory data weekly, when the scheduled time arrives, then the system should automatically generate and send the report to the specified email address with the correct filter criteria.
Searchable Filter Options
"As a warehouse staff member, I want to easily search for filter options when customizing my views so that I can quickly find the criteria I need to assess inventory levels efficiently."
Description

The Searchable Filter Options requirement enhances the user experience by enabling a searchable interface for selecting criteria when creating custom filters. Users can quickly find and apply specific filters, such as product names, categories, or attributes, without having to navigate through extensive lists. This feature improves usability, especially for those managing large inventories, by streamlining the filter creation process and helping users focus on their objectives more efficiently. Ultimately, this requirement aims to make filtering intuitive and accessible, resulting in higher user engagement and productivity.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to create a custom filter in the InvenTrack dashboard by selecting specific product categories and stock levels to view relevant inventory data quickly.
Given a user on the customizable view filters page, when they enter a term in the search bar, then the system should display matching filter options based on product categories and stock levels in real-time.
A warehouse manager needs to filter inventory data by product names to prepare for an upcoming shipment with specific items.
Given a warehouse manager accessing the filter options, when they type a product name into the search field, then the filtered results should only display the relevant product names that match the entered term.
A retail analyst wants to generate a report that only includes fast-selling products while excluding slow-moving inventory items to optimize stock levels.
Given a retail analyst in the custom filter creation page, when they apply a filter for 'fast-selling products', then only products with sales performance above a certain threshold should be displayed in the results.
A staff member is managing large inventory data and needs to easily navigate through the filter creation process without confusion or delays.
Given a staff member on the filter creation interface, when they select multiple filter criteria, then the system should allow them to see a summary of applied filters before finalizing the selection.
An inventory manager intends to save a custom filter setup for future use to streamline their inventory management tasks.
Given an inventory manager has created a custom filter, when they choose to save the filter, then the system should prompt for a filter name and save the filter settings successfully for future access.
A user navigates through the filter creation process and becomes frustrated due to a large list of options without a search capability.
Given a user in the filtering interface, when they cannot find a specific filter option quickly due to an extensive list, then the lack of the searchable filter should cause increased time to create a custom filter effectively.

Real-Time Collaboration Tools

Real-time collaboration tools facilitate seamless communication among team members by allowing instant messaging, video calls, and shared task lists directly within the dashboard. This improves teamwork, enhances responsiveness to inventory issues, and fosters a collaborative environment, making it easier to coordinate efforts.

Requirements

Instant Messaging Integration
"As a team member, I want to communicate instantly with my colleagues through the InvenTrack dashboard so that I can quickly resolve inventory issues without needing to switch to different communication tools."
Description

The Instant Messaging Integration requirement facilitates real-time communication between team members within the InvenTrack platform. This feature allows users to send and receive messages instantaneously, enabling swift resolution of inventory-related issues. By integrating messaging capabilities directly into the dashboard, users can maintain focus on tasks without needing to switch to external communication tools. This requirement aims to enhance collaboration, improve responsiveness, and streamline communication among team members, ultimately leading to a more productive workflow.

Acceptance Criteria
Team members can initiate an instant messaging session directly from the InvenTrack dashboard while monitoring inventory levels.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they click on the 'Instant Message' icon, then a messaging window should open, allowing them to send and receive messages in real time without leaving the dashboard.
A user receives an instant notification for new messages while working on inventory tasks.
Given a user is actively using the InvenTrack dashboard, when a new message is received, then a notification should appear in the corner of the screen with the message content and sender's name.
Users can create group chats to discuss inventory levels and issues with multiple team members in real time.
Given a user is in the messaging window, when they select multiple team members and click 'Start Group Chat', then a new chat window should be created displaying messages from all selected users.
Instant messaging allows the sharing of inventory-related images or files within conversations.
Given a user is in an active chat, when they click the 'Attach' button and select a file, then the file should upload successfully and be visible in the conversation thread.
Users can view the chat history for previously initiated conversations for reference.
Given a user selects a previous conversation from the chat history list, when they click on that chat, then the entire conversation history should be displayed in the chat window.
Video Call Functionality
"As a remote team member, I want to have video calls with my colleagues directly in InvenTrack so that I can discuss inventory issues face-to-face without needing separate software."
Description

The Video Call Functionality requirement allows users to initiate and participate in video calls directly within the InvenTrack platform. This feature is essential for improving face-to-face communication, especially for remote team members, ensuring that discussions regarding inventory management can happen in real-time. By providing a seamless video conferencing experience integrated into the inventory management system, it enhances collaboration and fosters a stronger team dynamic, which is critical for effective decision-making and coordination on inventory matters.

Acceptance Criteria
Video Call Initiation by Users
Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they click on the 'Start Video Call' button in the collaboration dashboard, then a video call interface should open within 5 seconds, allowing them to connect with other team members.
Joining an Ongoing Video Call
Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack platform and another team member is already in an active video call, when the user clicks on the 'Join Call' button, then the user should successfully join the video call without interruption within 3 seconds.
Video Call Quality Maintenance
Given that a video call is in progress, when network bandwidth fluctuates, then the video call should still maintain acceptable quality without dropping the connection, and the system should automatically adjust the video quality based on available bandwidth.
End a Video Call
Given that a user is in an active video call, when they click on the 'End Call' button, then the video call should terminate immediately, and the user should return to the dashboard without any error messages.
Chat Functionality During Video Calls
Given a user is in an active video call, when they click on the chat icon, then a chat window should open that allows for text communication with other participants without interrupting the video call.
Shared Task Lists
"As a team leader, I want to create and manage shared task lists with my team in InvenTrack so that we can better coordinate our efforts on inventory management tasks."
Description

The Shared Task Lists requirement enables team members to create, assign, and manage tasks collaboratively within the InvenTrack platform. This feature allows users to track inventory-related tasks that need attention and ensures accountability among team members. By having a centralized task list that is accessible to all relevant members, this requirement supports enhanced organization and prioritization of tasks, improving workflow efficiency and minimizing the risk of overlooking critical inventory management activities.

Acceptance Criteria
User creates a new task in the shared task list.
Given a logged-in user, when they select 'Create Task' and fill in the task details, then the task should appear in the shared task list for all team members.
User assigns a task to a team member from the shared task list.
Given a logged-in user, when they select a task and assign it to a team member, then that team member should receive a notification of the assignment.
User marks a task as complete in the shared task list.
Given a logged-in user, when they select a completed task and click 'Mark as Complete', then the task should be moved to the completed section of the task list.
User filters tasks in the shared task list by status (active or completed).
Given a logged-in user, when they apply a filter to the task list, then only the tasks that meet the filter criteria should be displayed.
User collaborates on a task by adding comments in the shared task list.
Given a logged-in user, when they add a comment to a task, then the comment should appear in the task's comment section and be visible to all team members.
User views the entire task history for project accountability.
Given a logged-in user, when they select a task, then the task history should display all changes made to the task, including assignments and status updates.
User receives automatic reminders for overdue tasks in the shared task list.
Given a logged-in user, when a task is overdue, then the user should receive a notification reminder about the overdue task.
Notification System for Collaboration Activities
"As a team member, I want to receive notifications about new messages and task assignments in InvenTrack so that I can stay updated on my responsibilities and team discussions."
Description

The Notification System for Collaboration Activities requirement provides real-time alerts and updates regarding collaboration interactions, such as new messages, task assignments, or video call invitations. This feature is pivotal in ensuring that team members remain informed about ongoing discussions and changes in task allocations. By integrating a notification system, InvenTrack enhances responsiveness to collaboration activities, encouraging timely participation in team discussions and reducing the chances of missing critical updates.

Acceptance Criteria
Real-time notification for new messages in collaboration tools.
Given a team member sends a new message, When the message is sent, Then all relevant team members receive a notification within 5 seconds.
Notification for task assignments created in the system.
Given a manager assigns a new task to a team member, When the task is created, Then the assigned team member receives a notification immediately and it appears in their task list.
Real-time alert for upcoming video calls scheduled through the collaboration tool.
Given a video call is scheduled, When the scheduled time is within 10 minutes, Then all participants receive a pop-up reminder notification on their dashboard.
Removal of notifications for messages that have been read.
Given a user reads a message in the collaboration tool, When the message is marked as read, Then the notification for that message is automatically removed from the notification list.
Group notifications for task updates in collaboration tools.
Given multiple tasks are updated by different team members, When the updates occur within a 10-minute window, Then a single grouped notification summarizing those updates is sent to all team members involved.
User customization of notification preferences.
Given a user accesses the notification settings, When they customize their notification preferences, Then those preferences are saved and applied immediately without requiring a system restart.
Daily summary notifications of collaboration activities.
Given it's the end of the day, When the user logs into the system, Then they receive a summary notification of all collaboration activities (messages, tasks, calls) that occurred during the day.
Document Sharing Capability
"As a team member, I want to share and collaborate on inventory documents within InvenTrack so that I can ensure everyone has access to the most current information without using multiple platforms."
Description

The Document Sharing Capability requirement allows users to upload, share, and collaborate on documents directly within the InvenTrack platform. This feature facilitates seamless access to important inventory documents such as reports, spreadsheets, and guides among team members. By enabling document sharing, this requirement fosters collaboration and knowledge sharing, ensuring all team members can access the latest information without the hassle of email exchanges or disparate document storage solutions, thereby streamlining communication processes.

Acceptance Criteria
User uploads a new inventory report document to the InvenTrack platform for team review.
Given a user with the appropriate permissions, when they select the 'Upload Document' button and choose a valid document file, then the document should be successfully uploaded and visible in the shared document section with the correct metadata (name, upload date, uploader's name).
Team members access a shared document for collaboration on inventory strategies.
Given a valid user is logged in, when they navigate to the shared document section and select a document, then the document should open in a collaborative editing environment with real-time changes reflected immediately for all users.
Users share a document link within an in-platform chat for immediate reference.
Given a user has uploaded a document, when they click on 'Share Link' and send it via the internal messaging system, then the document link should be sent successfully, and recipients should be able to click the link to access the document directly.
Users search for specific documents by keywords or categories.
Given there are multiple documents shared on the platform, when a user enters a keyword or selects a category in the search function, then the system should return a list of relevant documents matching the search criteria promptly within 3 seconds.
Users receive notifications when a document they are collaborating on is updated.
Given a user is monitoring a shared document, when another user makes edits and saves those changes, then all users with access to the document should receive a notification alerting them of the update within 1 minute of the changes being saved.
Team members leave comments on a document for feedback and discussion.
Given a document is open in the collaborative editing mode, when a user adds a comment, then the comment should be visible to all collaborators in the commenting section and allow for replies to foster discussion.
Users can delete a document they have uploaded if no one else is actively collaborating on it.
Given a user has uploaded a document, when they choose to delete the document and confirm the action, then the document should be removed from the platform immediately without any trace and users should be notified that the document has been successfully deleted.

Shared Notes and Annotations

Users can leave notes and annotations on specific inventory items, transactions, or dashboard sections that all team members can see. This feature enhances communication, streamlines discussions, and provides context to important inventory decisions, ensuring everyone is on the same page.

Requirements

Shared Notes Functionality
"As a member of the inventory management team, I want to leave notes on specific inventory items so that all team members can see important information and context related to our decisions."
Description

The Shared Notes functionality enables users to create, view, and edit notes and annotations related to specific inventory items, transactions, or dashboard sections. This feature is designed to enhance communication among team members, providing them with a centralized place to document insights, decisions, or issues pertaining to inventory management. By integrating this functionality directly into the existing interface of InvenTrack, users will maintain context while discussing inventory matters, minimizing miscommunication and ensuring that all team members can contribute to, and view, essential information. This leads to improved collaboration, a clearer decision-making process, and helps maintain an organized repository of shared knowledge that can be referred back to in the future.

Acceptance Criteria
User creates a new note on an inventory item.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When they select an inventory item and choose to add a note, Then they should be able to enter text for the note and save it successfully. The note should be visible to all team members when they view the inventory item.
User edits an existing note on a transaction.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When they select a transaction with an existing note and choose to edit it, Then they should be able to modify the text of the note and save their changes. The updated note should be reflected for all team members viewing the transaction.
User views notes related to a dashboard section.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When they navigate to a specific dashboard section, Then they should see all notes associated with that section displayed clearly and can open each note for detailed viewing.
User deletes a note on an inventory item.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When they select a note on an inventory item and choose to delete it, Then the note should be removed successfully and no longer visible to any team member when they view the inventory item.
User accesses notes from multiple locations in the application.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When they navigate to different parts of the application (e.g., inventory items, transactions, dashboard), Then they should be able to access notes relevant to each area without any loss of data integrity or context.
User receives notifications for new notes added by team members.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When a team member adds a note to an inventory item they can view, Then the user should receive a notification regarding the new note within the system prompting them to review it.
Real-time Notifications for Annotations
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time notifications for any new annotations so that I can stay updated and address important issues swiftly."
Description

Implement real-time notifications that alert team members whenever a new note or annotation is added to inventory items or relevant sections of the dashboard. This feature ensures that all team members are immediately aware of updates and can respond or engage in discussions promptly. The notifications will be customizable, allowing users to opt in or out based on their involvement in certain inventory categories or transactions. This will enhance responsiveness and improve overall communication, driving timely decisions and actions.

Acceptance Criteria
Notification for New Annotation Added to Inventory Item
Given a user adds a new annotation to an inventory item, when the annotation is saved, then all team members who opted in for notifications receive an alert within 5 seconds.
Customizable Notification Preferences for Users
Given a user accesses their notification settings, when they select categories or transactions to subscribe to or unsubscribe from, then their preferences are saved and reflect in future notifications as per their selection.
Alert for Comments on Transactions in Dashboard
Given a team member comments on a transaction in the dashboard, when the comment is submitted, then all relevant team members receive an alert about the new comment according to their notification preferences.
Notification Delivery Method Options
Given a user sets their notification preferences, when they choose a delivery method for alerts (email, SMS, in-app), then notifications are delivered according to the selected method, without delays exceeding 10 seconds.
Immediate Feedback on Notification Receipt
Given a team member receives a notification, when they acknowledge or mark it as read, then their response should reflect in the notification log indicating the action was recorded successfully within 2 seconds.
Batch Notifications for Multiple Annotations
Given multiple annotations are added to inventory items in a short period, when notifications are generated, then a single batch notification summarizing all updates is sent to the team members instead of individual alerts, within 5 seconds of the last annotation.
Note Tagging System
"As a user, I want to tag notes so that I can quickly filter and find relevant information in our discussions about inventory."
Description

Develop a tagging system for notes and annotations that categorizes entries based on keywords or themes. This system will allow users to easily filter and search through notes related to specific topics, inventory types, or urgency levels. By creating tags for notes, users can streamline their access to relevant information, making it faster to retrieve insights when they are needed. This feature will significantly enhance the usability and effectiveness of the Shared Notes functionality, ensuring that the team can quickly find critical information and collaborate more effectively.

Acceptance Criteria
As a team member, I want to be able to create a new note with tags that categorize it by urgency, so that all users can see and prioritize the note effectively within the inventory system.
Given the tagging system is implemented, When I create a new note and assign at least one tag, Then the note should be visible to all team members along with its assigned tags.
When searching for notes in the shared notes feature, I want to filter my search results by specific tags, so that I can quickly locate relevant information without sifting through unrelated notes.
Given I am on the search page for notes, When I apply a filter by tag, Then the search results should only display notes that contain the selected tag.
As a user, I want to edit an existing note and update its tags, so that I can change the categorization of the note based on evolving inventory discussions.
Given a note exists with tags, When I edit the note and change its tags, Then the updated note should reflect the new tags and be visible to all team members.
As a user, I want to see a list of all available tags, so that I can understand the categories of information available when creating or filtering notes.
Given the tagging system is in place, When I navigate to the tagging interface, Then I should see a complete list of all available tags created by users.
When multiple users tag a note, I want to see all tags associated with that note, so that I can understand different perspectives on the note's content.
Given a note is tagged by multiple users, When I view the note, Then I should see a comprehensive list of all the tags assigned to that note.
As an administrator, I want to manage tags by creating or deleting them, so that I can ensure tags remain relevant to our ongoing discussions.
Given I have administrator access, When I create or delete a tag, Then the change should reflect in the tagging system for all users immediately.
Analytics on Note Utilization
"As a product owner, I want to analyze the utilization of shared notes so that we can improve team communication and decision-making processes."
Description

Incorporate analytics features that monitor the usage and effectiveness of notes and annotations across the platform. This will include metrics such as the number of notes created, the frequency of interaction with notes, and feedback on how often notes lead to actionable outcomes. This feature will help identify trends in communication, the effectiveness of shared information, and opportunities for improving workflows based on data-driven insights. With these analytics, InvenTrack can optimize its note-taking capabilities and better align inventory discussions with actual business outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria
User requests to view the analytics dashboard for note utilization to assess the effectiveness of team communication.
Given that the user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the analytics dashboard, then they should see metrics including total notes created, interaction frequency, and actionable outcomes.
A team leader wants to evaluate trends in note creation to enhance team collaboration and identify communication gaps.
Given that notes have been created over the past month, when the analytics is generated, then the report should show trends in note creation categorized by inventory items and team members.
A business executive needs to analyze how notes contribute to decision-making for inventory management.
Given that notes contain actionable outcomes, when viewing the analytics report, then there should be a clear correlation between the notes created and specific inventory decisions made in the same period.
The finance manager wants to monitor the impact of shared notes on inventory cost efficiency.
Given that notes have been annotated on inventory transactions, when the analytics report is analyzed, then it should display a percentage of inventory transactions that resulted in cost savings as a result of the notes.
A product owner seeks to determine the effectiveness of notes in improving team workflows.
Given that user feedback has been collected on note usefulness, when the feedback is summarized in the analytics, then it should indicate the percentage of users finding notes useful for improving their workflows.
An operations manager is assessing the frequency of notes used to identify bottlenecks in the inventory process.
Given that a month of data is analyzed, when the report is generated, then it should illustrate the frequency of note interactions alongside inventory process flow metrics.

Activity Feed Overview

The activity feed displays a chronological view of all actions taken by team members within the dashboard, such as updates to stock levels, notes added, or adjustments made. This transparency keeps everyone informed of changes and encourages accountability among users.

Requirements

Real-Time Activity Update
"As a team member, I want the activity feed to update in real-time so that I can stay informed about changes made by others without having to refresh the page."
Description

The Real-Time Activity Update requirement ensures that the activity feed displays changes and updates instantly as they occur, allowing all team members to see new information without the need for manual refresh. This feature enhances transparency and collaboration among users, enabling real-time communication about inventory adjustments, stock level changes, and other critical updates. By keeping everyone informed and up-to-date, it reduces the risk of miscommunication and increases accountability within the team. Implementation involves leveraging WebSocket technology for immediate updates and integrating it seamlessly with the existing dashboard infrastructure.

Acceptance Criteria
Team members log into the InvenTrack dashboard and view the activity feed for the first time during a busy inventory management period.
Given a team member is logged into the dashboard, when an action is taken (such as updating stock levels), then the activity feed should update in real-time without requiring a manual refresh.
Multiple users from different locations make simultaneous updates to the inventory within the InvenTrack platform.
Given multiple team members are using the system, when one team member makes an update, then all other team members should see the update reflected in the activity feed within 2 seconds.
A team member adds a note to the activity feed while another member is viewing the dashboard.
Given a user is viewing the activity feed, when another user adds a note to the feed, then the note should automatically appear without the need for the first user to refresh their view.
A user wants to verify that all actions related to inventory are displayed accurately in the activity feed.
Given a series of actions have been taken, when a user inspects the activity feed, then all actions should be displayed in reverse chronological order with the correct timestamps and user details.
A team member wants to use the activity feed to track accountability for inventory actions taken during a recent audit.
Given a user accesses the activity feed, when they review the feed for a specific time frame, then they should be able to see a complete and accurate log of all inventory-related activities during that period.
Filter and Categorize Activity Logs
"As a team member, I want to filter activity logs by date and action type so that I can easily find specific changes and updates in the feed."
Description

The Filter and Categorize Activity Logs requirement allows users to sort and filter the activity feed by different parameters such as date, type of action (e.g., updates, notes, adjustments), or specific team members. This enhanced filtering capability allows users to quickly find relevant information amidst a potentially large volume of activity, improving usability and efficiency. It simplifies the tracking of specific actions over time and addresses the need for team members to focus on relevant updates. This will require backend support for data categorization and frontend enhancements for user interface design.

Acceptance Criteria
User filters the activity feed to view only stock level updates made during the last week.
Given the user is on the activity feed, when they select the filter option and choose 'Stock Level Updates' for the last week, then the activity feed displays only those relevant updates made during that time period.
A manager wants to view all notes added by a specific team member over the last month.
Given the user is on the activity feed, when they apply the filter for 'Notes' and select a specific team member's name, then the logs should display only notes added by that team member within the last month.
A logistics coordinator needs to see all adjustments made in the activity feed within a specific date range.
Given the user is on the activity feed, when the date range filter is set to 'February 1 to February 15, 2025' and the action type is set to 'Adjustments', then the feed should display only the adjustments made during that period.
An operations director reviews the activity feed for all actions taken in the past 24 hours.
Given the user is on the activity feed, when the filter for the last 24 hours is applied, then the feed should show all activities recorded in that timeframe, regardless of type or team member.
A sales team member wants to quickly find any adjustment logs related to product X.
Given the user is on the activity feed, when they perform a search using the product name 'Product X' combined with the adjustment filter, then the feed should display all adjustment logs related to that product.
An admin checks the system for any critical updates that require immediate action.
Given the user is on the activity feed, when they filter by 'Critical Updates' only, then the feed should only show logs that are marked as critical and require immediate attention.
Notifications for Critical Changes
"As a team member, I want to receive notifications for critical changes in the activity feed so that I can respond quickly to urgent updates and avoid potential issues."
Description

The Notifications for Critical Changes requirement enables the system to notify users when significant actions occur in the activity feed, such as low stock alerts or critical adjustments. Notifications can be pushed via in-app alerts, emails, or mobile notifications, ensuring that all team members are promptly informed about essential changes that could impact operations. This feature significantly enhances responsiveness to inventory management and aids in proactive decision-making. Implementation includes establishing notification triggers and designing user preferences for notification settings.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a notification when stock levels fall below a predefined threshold set in the system. This allows the team to take immediate action to prevent stockouts.
Given that the stock level is below the threshold, when the change is detected, then an in-app notification is sent to the user and an email alert is triggered to specified team members.
A user makes a critical adjustment to stock levels through the dashboard. Other team members should receive a notification alerting them to this change to maintain situational awareness.
Given that a critical adjustment is made in the dashboard, when the change is recorded, then notifications are sent to all users who have access to the inventory system.
Users have the ability to customize their notification preferences within the application, ensuring they receive alerts for the changes that matter most to them.
Given that a user accesses their notification settings, when they update their preferences and save them, then the changes should be reflected in their notification response for critical events accordingly.
A scheduled report generates insights about inventory levels and sends it to team members with alerts for low stock items to prepare for upcoming ordering decisions.
Given that the report is scheduled to run, when it executes, then the system checks for low stock items and includes them in the email sent to team members along with a notification alert.
In-app alerts should be displayed prominently to users in real-time as changes occur to the activity feed, ensuring that everyone is aware of critical updates as they happen.
Given that a critical update triggers a notification, when the user is logged into the application, then the app should display the alert on the dashboard immediately without any delay.
Users should be able to review their notification history to see past alerts and actions taken without missing critical changes that occurred during their absence.
Given that a user accesses the notification history feature, when they request to view past notifications, then the system should display a chronological list of notifications received within their chosen timeframe.
Alerts sent to mobile devices for critical updates should function correctly, ensuring that users are informed even when they are not at their desks.
Given that a critical change occurs, when the user has opted for mobile notifications, then the mobile device should receive a push notification regardless of whether the user is logged into the app.
User Mentions in Activity Feed
""
Description

The User Mentions in Activity Feed requirement allows users to mention colleagues directly in activity feed updates using '@

Acceptance Criteria
User mentions a colleague in the Activity Feed while updating stock levels during a team meeting.
Given the user is on the Activity Feed, when they type '@' followed by the colleague's name, then the system should suggest the correct user and allow the mention to be completed.
A user wants to notify a colleague about a note added in the Activity Feed regarding an inventory adjustment.
Given the user is writing a note in the Activity Feed, when they mention a colleague using '@', then the colleague should receive a notification of the mention in their notification center.
A team member checks the Activity Feed to see updates where they have been mentioned.
Given the user is viewing the Activity Feed, when they filter for mentions, then all updates that mention them should be displayed in chronological order.
A user accidentally mistypes a colleague's name when mentioning them in the Activity Feed.
Given the user types '@' and starts typing a name, when they input an incorrect name, then the system should not create a mention and show an error message if the colleague is not found.
A user wants to search for all activity updates that involve mentions over a defined period.
Given the user sets a date range filter on the Activity Feed, when they view the feed, then it should display only the activities where users are mentioned within that time frame.
An admin reviews the Activity Feed to ensure compliance with mention policy among the team members.
Given the admin accesses the Activity Feed, when they search for relevant mentions, then they should be able to view all mentions made by team members and the context in which they were used.
A user wants to edit their comment that includes a mention in the Activity Feed.
Given the user is on the Activity Feed, when they click the edit button on their previous comment with a mention, then they should be able to modify the content without removing the mention functionality.
Audit Trail for Changes
"As a team manager, I want to review the audit trail of changes so that I can ensure accountability and understand the history of updates within the activity feed."
Description

The Audit Trail for Changes requirement tracks and logs all modifications made within the activity feed, providing a complete history of actions taken by each user. This feature is crucial for maintaining accountability and transparency, as team members can refer to the audit trail to verify changes and understand decision-making processes. The audit trail should include timestamps, user identities, and descriptions of changes made. Implementing this will involve backend data storage solutions and user interface adjustments for presenting the logs effectively.

Acceptance Criteria
User views the activity feed to track changes made to the inventory by different team members in real-time.
Given a user is logged in to InvenTrack, when they access the Activity Feed, then they should see a chronological list of all actions taken by users, including stock updates, notes added, and adjustments made with accurate timestamps.
A team member edits the stock level of a product and wants to verify the changes made for accountability.
Given the audit trail is implemented, when a team member updates a stock level, then the audit trail should log the action with the user’s identity, timestamp, and a description of the change made.
A manager reviews the audit trail to assess the changes made by team members over the past week.
Given the audit trail contains logs, when the manager filters the audit log by date and user, then they should see a complete history of modifications made during that period with full details.
A team member needs to check previous notes added to the inventory changes for resolution of discrepancies.
Given the audit trail feature, when a user accesses the activity feed, then they should be able to view all notes added, alongside any changes made, with proper associations between notes and actions as shown in the audit trail.
System administrator wants to ensure that all logs are stored securely and are retrievable in case of disputes.
Given the backend data storage is implemented, when changes are made within the activity feed, then the audit trail must securely log all actions and be enrollable by admins for audit purposes without data loss.
A user needs to be notified if any unauthorized changes are logged in the audit trail to maintain security.
Given the audit trail captures every change action, when an unauthorized user attempts to modify any inventory record, then a notification should be triggered to relevant team members and logged accordingly in the audit trail.
Customizable Activity Feed Display
"As a user, I want to customize my activity feed display to prioritize the updates that matter most to me so that I can efficiently manage my attention and workflow."
Description

The Customizable Activity Feed Display requirement allows users to personalize their activity feed view by choosing which types of activities to display and how to format the feed (e.g., list view, card view). Personalization enhances user experience by enabling individuals to focus on the most pertinent information relevant to their roles. Implementation will require user interface design enhancements as well as backend support for saving user preferences.

Acceptance Criteria
User selects preferred activity types to display in the activity feed prior to their first use of the feature.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they access the settings for the activity feed display, then they should be able to select which activity types to display from a list of available options and save their preferences.
User chooses the format of the activity feed display (list view or card view) based on their personal preference.
Given the user is in the activity feed settings, when they select their preferred display format and save the changes, then the activity feed should reflect this selection instantly upon refresh.
User modifies their previously selected activity types and display format.
Given the user has previously saved preferences for the activity feed, when they return to the settings page, then they should see their current selections and be able to modify them successfully.
User interacts with the activity feed to validate personalized content is displayed as per their settings.
Given the user has selected specific activity types to display, when they view the activity feed, then only the selected activity types should be visible, confirming the personalization is applied correctly.
User's preferences for the activity feed are preserved across different devices and sessions.
Given the user has saved their preferences for the activity feed, when they log into InvenTrack on a different device, then their settings should remain consistent and reflect their saved selections.
The system logs an event whenever a user updates their activity feed settings.
Given the user updates their activity feed settings, when the change is saved, then the system should generate a log entry documenting the change with the timestamp and details of the previous settings.
System responds appropriately to an invalid selection of activity types by the user.
Given the user attempts to select invalid activity types (e.g., non-existent or already disabled types), when they try to save their settings, then the system should display an error message indicating the invalid selection and prevent the save.

Integrated Approval Workflow

This feature introduces an approval process for inventory-related actions, allowing designated team members to review and approve changes such as orders or stock adjustments. By ensuring necessary checks and balances, this enhances accuracy and reduces errors in inventory management.

Requirements

Approval Role Management
"As an inventory manager, I want to assign specific approval roles to team members so that I can ensure that only authorized personnel can approve inventory changes, reducing errors and maintaining control."
Description

The Approval Role Management requirement involves defining and managing roles within the approval workflow for inventory actions. This includes setting specific permissions for different team members regarding who can approve, reject, or view pending actions. The purpose is to ensure an organized structure where only designated personnel can influence inventory decisions, enhancing accountability and control. This feature integrates smoothly with the existing user management system and contributes to greater security and integrity in inventory management by preventing unauthorized actions.

Acceptance Criteria
Role Assignment for Inventory Approval
Given an admin user, when they select a user to assign an approval role, then the role should be successfully assigned and reflected in the user management system.
Role-Based Approval Permissions
Given a user with approval rights, when they attempt to approve an inventory action, then they should be able to approve or reject the action based on their permissions.
Audit Trail for Approval Actions
Given an inventory action approved or rejected, when an admin views the audit trail, then the action should display the user who approved or rejected it along with a timestamp.
Unauthorized Access Prevention
Given a user without approval permissions, when they attempt to approve an inventory action, then they should receive a notification indicating they do not have the necessary rights.
Role Modification Functionality
Given an admin user, when they modify an existing approval role, then the changes should be saved and reflected immediately in the approval workflow.
Approval Workflow Integration with Notifications
Given an inventory action pending approval, when it has not been approved within a specified timeframe, then a notification should be sent to designated stakeholders to take action.
Automated Notification System
"As a team member, I want to receive automated notifications when there is an inventory change that requires my approval so that I can act promptly without missing important updates."
Description

The Automated Notification System requirement focuses on creating automated alerts for team members involved in the approval process. Notifications will be sent out via email or in-app messaging when an inventory change requires approval or when a change has been approved/rejected. This is vital for streamlining communication and ensuring that no actions are delayed, ultimately keeping the inventory management process efficient. The notifications should be customizable, allowing users to select their preferences on how and when they receive alerts.

Acceptance Criteria
Notification upon pending inventory changes requiring approval.
Given an inventory change that requires approval, when the change is initiated, then the relevant team members receive a notification via email and in-app messaging.
Notification when an inventory change is approved.
Given a pending inventory change that has been approved, when the approval is granted, then all relevant team members receive a confirmation notification via email and in-app messaging.
Notification when an inventory change is rejected.
Given a pending inventory change that has been rejected, when the rejection is processed, then all relevant team members receive a notification detailing the reason for rejection via email and in-app messaging.
Customization of notification preferences.
Given a user has access to notification settings, when they modify their notification preferences, then the system should save these preferences and apply them to future notifications accordingly.
Bulk notifications for multiple inventory changes.
Given multiple inventory changes are pending approval, when these changes are submitted, then all relevant team members receive a single consolidated notification detailing all pending changes.
Automatic acknowledgment of received notifications.
Given a user receives a notification, when the user opens the notification, then the system automatically logs the acknowledgment of the notification for tracking purposes.
Notifications for changes made outside of regular hours.
Given an inventory change is made outside of regular business hours, when the change is initiated, then the system sends notifications to relevant team members marked as urgent.
Approval History Tracking
"As a compliance officer, I want to track the approval history of inventory changes so that I can ensure adherence to our internal processes and regulations."
Description

The Approval History Tracking feature captures all actions taken during the approval workflow, maintaining a comprehensive record of who approved or rejected inventory changes and the reasons behind these decisions. This information is crucial for auditing purposes and enhances transparency in inventory management processes. The feature should allow users to easily access historical approval data for analysis and reporting, thereby improving decision-making and accountability within teams.

Acceptance Criteria
Approval History Display for Recent Transactions
Given a user with access to the approval history, when they navigate to the approval logs section, then they should see a list of all recent approvals and rejections, along with timestamps and user identifiers for each action taken.
Search Functionality for Approval Records
Given a user is in the approval history section, when they enter specific parameters like date range or action type into the search bar, then the system should return only the corresponding approval records that match the specified criteria.
Accessibility of Approval History for Auditing
Given an auditor needs to review the approval history, when they request access to the approval logs, then they should be able to export the entire approval history in a readable format that includes all relevant data for auditing purposes.
Details of Approval Actions
Given a user is viewing a specific approval record, when they click on that record, then the system should display detailed information including the approver's name, the reason for the decision, and any relevant comments.
User Access Control for Approval History
Given a team manager is setting permissions, when they define user roles, then specific team members should only have access to view or modify approval history based on their assigned role within the system.
Comprehensive Reporting on Approval Trends
Given the requirement for data analysis, when a manager generates a report on approval trends, then it should include visual representations of the approval rates over time, categorized by type of inventory change.
Customizable Approval Criteria
"As an admin, I want to customize approval criteria based on our inventory categories so that I can ensure additional scrutiny for high-value items, reducing risks of errors or fraud."
Description

The Customizable Approval Criteria requirement allows administrators to set specific conditions that must be met before inventory changes can be approved. This may include thresholds on quantity, value, or specific inventory categories. Such customizability is essential for organizations with varying needs and products. By implementing this, the system ensures that necessary checks are in place for different types of inventory adjustments, enhancing risk management in inventory decisions.

Acceptance Criteria
Admins need to create approval criteria for stock adjustments exceeding a specific quantity threshold.
Given that an admin is logged in, when they set a quantity threshold of 100 units for stock adjustments, then any stock adjustment request for more than 100 units must require approval from designated team members.
Newly set approval criteria must be applied when processing inventory changes.
Given that the admin has set specific approval criteria for inventory changes, when a stock order is created that meets those criteria, then the system should flag the order for approval before processing it.
Admins want to modify existing approval criteria for different inventory categories.
Given an admin is logged in, when they access the existing approval criteria settings, then they should be able to edit the quantity and value thresholds for each inventory category without system errors.
Understanding the impact of approval criteria on order completion times.
Given that approval criteria are in effect, when a stock change request is submitted and flagged for approval, then the time taken to complete that order should be tracked and reported within the dashboard.
Admins need to disable specific approval criteria temporarily.
Given that an admin is logged in, when they choose to disable a specific approval criterion, then the system must allow this change without affecting other active criteria and provide confirmation of the change.
Testing the system's response to rejected approval requests.
Given that a stock adjustment request exceeds the set approval criteria, when an approver rejects the request, then the system should notify the admin and prevent the adjustment from being processed.
Role-Based Access Control (RBAC)
"As an IT security officer, I want to implement RBAC for the approval workflow so that I can restrict access to sensitive inventory actions and maintain the confidentiality and integrity of our inventory system."
Description

The Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) feature will regulate access to various parts of the approval workflow based on the roles assigned to team members. This requirement aims to restrict or allow access to specific functionalities such as viewing, approving, or rejecting inventory changes based on the user’s role within the organization. Implementing RBAC will enhance security and ensure that sensitive inventory data is only accessible to authorized personnel, thus upholding the integrity of the inventory management process.

Acceptance Criteria
User Role - Inventory Manager Reviewing Changes
Given the Inventory Manager has logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Approval Workflow section, then they should be able to view all pending inventory change requests with their details (user who requested, date submitted, and type of change).
User Role - Approver Granting Approval
Given the Approver has logged into InvenTrack and viewed a pending inventory change, when they click on the 'Approve' button, then the inventory change should be processed and the requester should receive a notification of the approval.
User Role - Stock Controller Rejecting Changes
Given the Stock Controller is logged into InvenTrack, when they review a pending inventory change request, if they click on the 'Reject' button, then the inventory change should be marked as rejected and the requester should be notified with the reason for rejection.
User Role - Role Permissions Verification
Given the user has specific roles assigned in InvenTrack, when they attempt to access the Approval Workflow section, then they should only be able to view and perform actions permitted by their role (e.g., view without approval capabilities).
Unauthorized User Attempting Access
Given a user without appropriate permissions tries to access the Approval Workflow, when they attempt to log in, then they should receive an access denied message indicating insufficient privileges.
Audit Trail of Approval Actions
Given an approval action has been made, when an admin reviews the audit log, then all actions should be recorded with details such as user ID, action type (approve/reject), timestamp, and relevant inventory changes.

Performance Metrics Sharing

Users can select specific performance metrics to share with team members, fostering collective insights and discussions around inventory performance. This helps in aligning strategies, identifying areas of improvement, and driving collective decision-making.

Requirements

Custom Metric Selection
"As a team leader, I want to select specific inventory performance metrics to share with my team so that we can collaboratively analyze our performance and make informed decisions to improve our inventory management."
Description

The Custom Metric Selection requirement allows users to choose specific performance metrics they wish to share with team members. It is designed to facilitate tailored insights that directly address the unique performance indicators relevant to each user’s needs. By enabling users to select from a range of customizable metrics, this feature promotes deeper discussions around inventory management strategies and aligns team objectives more effectively. Integration with the existing dashboard will be seamless, ensuring metrics are readily accessible for review and analysis. This functionality not only empowers users to spotlight key performance areas but also enhances collaborative decision-making based on shared data, ultimately driving team performance and business outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria
User selects multiple performance metrics from the dashboard to share with their team during a strategy meeting to discuss inventory performance.
Given the user is on the custom metric selection page, when they select multiple performance metrics, then the selected metrics should be displayed in a summary list for review before sharing.
Team members receive shared performance metrics from a user and access them for assessment on their devices.
Given a user shares performance metrics, when the team members access the shared metrics, then they should be able to view the data accurately and in real-time on their devices.
User modifies their selected performance metrics after initially sharing them with the team to reflect the most current data.
Given the user has already shared performance metrics, when they modify their selections and share again, then team members should receive an update notification with the new metrics reflected immediately.
Team members discuss the shared performance metrics during a virtual meeting, analyzing trends and insights together.
Given the performance metrics are shared, when team members discuss these metrics, then they should have access to collaborative tools such as comments and highlights within the metrics view.
User saves selected performance metrics as a report for future reference, ensuring easy access to the same insights later.
Given the user has selected performance metrics, when they choose to save the metrics as a report, then the report should be stored in the user's profile with an option to retrieve it later.
The system provides guidance for users to understand which performance metrics are relevant for selection in their inventory management practices.
Given the user is on the custom metric selection page, when they hover over or click on a metric category, then a tooltip should provide a brief explanation of the metric's relevance and usage scenarios.
Real-time Sharing Capabilities
"As a warehouse manager, I want to receive real-time alerts when performance metrics I share are updated so that I can quickly react to changes and lead my team effectively."
Description

The Real-time Sharing Capabilities requirement enables users to instantly share selected performance metrics with team members via notifications or dashboard updates. This feature is crucial for ensuring that all stakeholders have access to the most current data, fostering a proactive approach to inventory management discussions. By providing real-time updates, users can respond swiftly to emerging trends and insights, facilitating timely decision-making. The integration within the existing platform will leverage push notifications and dashboard widgets to keep team members informed and engaged. This capability enhances the collaborative environment, ensuring that all parties are aligned with up-to-date information and can act accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria
Users can select performance metrics from a comprehensive list and share those metrics with their team in real-time during a team meeting.
Given a user has selected performance metrics to share, when they trigger the sharing function, then all selected team members should receive real-time notifications with the chosen metrics within 5 seconds.
Users access the dashboard and want to view the most recent performance metrics shared by their team members.
Given a user is on their dashboard, when they refresh the performance metrics section, then the dashboard should display all metrics shared in the last 24 hours without delays.
A user shares performance metrics with a specific team member who is not online at the time of sharing.
Given a metric is shared with a team member, when that team member logs into the platform later, then they should see a notification for the shared metrics on their dashboard.
Users want to receive alerts for any significant changes in the shared performance metrics during working hours.
Given a performance metric exceeds a defined threshold, when the change occurs, then all team members should receive an instant push notification alerting them of the update.
A user needs to visually confirm that shared performance metrics are displayed correctly on the dashboard.
Given a user has shared finished metrics, when they navigate to the dashboard, then the metrics displayed should accurately reflect the ones shared with no data discrepancies.
Users wish to initiate a discussion regarding the shared performance metrics during a collaborative session.
Given performance metrics have been shared, when users click on the discussion option, then they should be able to initiate and participate in a chat related to those metrics in real-time.
Team members want to know who shared the performance metrics and at what time they were shared.
Given a metric has been shared, when a user views the metrics list, then they should see the name of the user who shared the metrics and the timestamp of when they were shared alongside the metrics.
Discussion Facilitation Tools
"As a team member, I want to comment on shared performance metrics so that I can provide my input and contribute to discussions on how to improve our inventory management practices."
Description

The Discussion Facilitation Tools requirement introduces features that allow users to comment and discuss shared metrics within the platform. This interactive element enhances communication among team members, enabling them to provide insights, feedback, and suggestions directly within the context of the statistics being analyzed. By fostering an environment of open discussion around shared metrics, teams are better equipped to identify areas of improvement and formulate collaborative strategies. This feature will be integrated seamlessly into the existing platform, creating a unified space where discussions can occur alongside metric reviews, thus enhancing overall team engagement and problem-solving capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria
Users can comment on specific performance metrics shared with their team members.
Given a shared performance metric, when a user types a comment and submits it, then the comment should appear under that metric for all authorized users to see.
Users can reply to comments made by team members on shared metrics.
Given a performance metric with existing comments, when a user selects a comment and types a reply, then the reply should be displayed below the original comment in a threaded format.
Users can delete their own comments on shared metrics.
Given a user's comment on a metric, when the user selects the delete option for their comment, then the comment should be removed from the metric's discussion thread.
Users can edit their existing comments on shared metrics.
Given a user's comment on a metric, when the user selects the edit option and modifies the text, then the updated comment should replace the old comment immediately after submission.
Users receive notifications for new comments added on shared metrics they are following.
Given a user is following a specific metric, when a new comment is made on that metric, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the new comment.
Users can filter discussion comments based on relevance or time.
Given the discussion on a metric, when a user applies a filter for relevance or timing, then the displayed comments should update to show only those that match the selected criteria.
Users can mark comments as ‘resolved’ once an action has been taken.
Given a comment that has resulted in a decision or action, when the user selects the mark as ‘resolved’ option, then the comment should be visually tagged as ‘resolved’ and no longer appear in active discussions.
Performance Metrics History Tracking
"As a business analyst, I want to access historical data of performance metrics to identify trends over time so that I can make data-driven recommendations for future inventory strategies."
Description

The Performance Metrics History Tracking requirement captures historical data of shared performance metrics, allowing users to view trends and changes over time. This feature is essential for providing context to current performance and for setting benchmarks based on historical performance data. Users can analyze how metrics evolve, evaluate the impact of past decisions, and identify patterns that may inform future strategies. By integrating this historical tracking into the dashboard and shareable reports, users can easily reference and leverage past data in collaboration with their teams for enhanced decision-making. This historical context is crucial for continuous improvement and strategic planning in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Performance Metrics History Tracking feature to view historical trends of selected metrics over the past quarter.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Performance Metrics History Tracking section, then they should see a graphical representation of historical data for the selected metrics for the last three months, including any relevant benchmarks.
A user wants to share the historical performance metrics report with their team during a strategy meeting.
Given a user selects historical performance metrics, when they choose the option to share the report, then an email should be sent to all team members containing the report in a PDF format.
Admin reviews the Performance Metrics History Tracking feature to ensure that it records data accurately over time.
Given the Performance Metrics History Tracking feature is in use, when an admin checks the database, then they should find a complete record of performance metrics logged daily with timestamps and accurate values.
User analyzes historical performance metrics to make informed decisions about inventory management for the upcoming quarter.
Given a user is viewing the historical performance metrics, when they apply filters for specific time frames and metrics, then the system should display the corresponding historical trends and patterns immediately without errors.
Users expect to see changes in the historical metrics after adjusting the current performance metrics settings.
Given a user updates the settings for current performance metrics, when they refresh the historical metrics page, then the changes should reflect in the historical data tracked for those specific metrics without delay.
Manager uses the historical data to teach new employees about performance trends.
Given a manager is conducting a training session for new employees, when they pull up the Performance Metrics History Tracking reports, then the historical data should include contextual notes explaining the trends and implications of each performance metric over time.
Users need to compare current performance metrics with historical data to evaluate progress.
Given a user has selected current performance metrics and opened the historical metrics side-by-side, when they analyze both data sets, then they should be able to easily identify increases or decreases in performance metrics over the selected period.
User Permission Controls
"As a system administrator, I want to control user permissions for shared metrics so that I can ensure sensitive data is only accessible to authorized team members."
Description

The User Permission Controls requirement ensures that only authorized users can share and access specific performance metrics. This is vital for maintaining data security and ensuring that sensitive information is handled appropriately. Users with appropriate permissions will be able to choose who can view or contribute to discussions on selected metrics. This functionality strengthens the platform's security posture while promoting accountability within team interactions. By customizing user permissions, organizations can safeguard their data while enabling effective collaboration on performance metrics relevant to their inventory management efforts.

Acceptance Criteria
User grants permission to a team member to view selected performance metrics on inventory levels.
Given a user with admin permissions, when they select a team member and grant view permissions for specific metrics, then the selected team member should be able to access those metrics without any errors.
User attempts to share metrics without the required permissions.
Given a user without appropriate permissions, when they attempt to share performance metrics with team members, then the system should display an error message indicating insufficient permissions.
User revokes access permissions from a team member for specific performance metrics.
Given a user with admin permissions, when they revoke access to selected performance metrics for a team member, then the revoked team member should no longer see those metrics in their dashboard.
Multiple team members view shared performance metrics simultaneously.
Given a group of authorized users, when they open the metrics sharing dashboard, then all authorized users should be able to view and discuss the selected performance metrics in real-time without delays or access issues.
User modifies permissions for multiple metrics at once.
Given a user with admin permissions, when they select multiple metrics to modify permissions at once, then the system should allow changes to be applied successfully across all selected metrics without individual reauthorization for each metric.
Audit log captures changes made to user permissions for performance metrics.
Given an admin user modifies the permissions for performance metrics, when they check the audit log, then the log should accurately reflect the changes made including the user who made the changes and the date of modification.
User attempts to view metrics not shared with them.
Given a user who has not been granted access to certain performance metrics, when they try to access those metrics, then the system should prevent access and display a message stating that the metrics are not available to them.

Visual Data Mapping

Visual data mapping offers graphical representations of inventory metrics such as stock levels, turnover rates, and supplier performances within the dashboard. This feature enhances data comprehension, enabling users to analyze trends visually and make more informed decisions quickly.

Requirements

Interactive Dashboard Elements
"As an inventory manager, I want to interact with dashboard elements so that I can delve into detailed data insights tailored to my inventory management needs."
Description

The Interactive Dashboard Elements requirement focuses on enhancing the user interface of the InvenTrack platform by incorporating interactive features within the inventory metrics dashboard. Users should be able to click on various elements, such as stock level graphs or supplier performance indicators, to drill down into detailed data views. This functionality facilitates deeper analysis, allowing users to understand the specific factors affecting their inventory and supplier performance. Additionally, the user can customize the dashboard layout according to their preferences, fostering a more personalized experience that meets individual user needs and improving overall engagement with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria
User clicks on the stock level graph to view detailed inventory data.
Given the user is on the inventory metrics dashboard, when they click on a specific stock level graph, then a detailed view of the inventory data corresponding to that stock level is displayed, including current stock levels, turnover rates and related metrics.
User customizes the dashboard layout according to their preferences.
Given the user accesses the dashboard customization settings, when they rearrange the elements on their dashboard, then the layout is saved and displayed as per their preferences upon next login.
User interacts with the supplier performance indicator to assess supplier efficacy.
Given the user is viewing the inventory metrics dashboard, when they click on the supplier performance indicator, then a detailed report showing individual supplier performance metrics, such as on-time delivery rates and order accuracy, is presented.
User analyzes trends in stock levels over a specified period.
Given the user selects a time range for analysis, when they view the stock level graph, then it visually updates to represent the selected period's data accurately with appropriate trend lines and markers for key data points.
User engages with visual data mapping for inventory turnover analysis.
Given the user is using the visual data mapping feature, when they hover over a specific data point related to inventory turnover, then a tooltip appears displaying additional context and metrics associated with that point.
User receives notifications for low stock levels through interactive dashboard elements.
Given the user has set reorder alerts, when the stock level for any item falls below the defined threshold, then a notification is visually displayed on their dashboard.
Custom Reporting Tools
"As a business owner, I want the ability to create custom reports from inventory data so that I can analyze performance trends and make better operational decisions."
Description

The Custom Reporting Tools requirement involves the development of a suite of reporting features that allow users to generate customized inventory reports. Users should be able to select metrics, date ranges, and formats (e.g., PDF, Excel) to suit their specific reporting needs. This capability ensures that users can extract relevant data quickly and efficiently, enhancing productivity and facilitating more informed decision-making. The custom reports will also be integrated with the visual data mapping feature, enabling users to visualize their reports dynamically, making trends and anomalies readily apparent and actionable.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates a custom report for inventory turnover over the last quarter.
Given the user has access to the Custom Reporting Tools, When they select the 'Turnover Rate' metric and set the date range to the last quarter, Then a report should be generated in PDF format displaying the inventory turnover data for that range.
User requests a custom report in Excel format showing supplier performance.
Given the user is in the reporting module, When they choose 'Supplier Performance' as the metric and select Excel as the output format, Then the system should generate and download the report correctly formatted for Excel.
User wants to visualize the data from a custom report on the dashboard.
Given a custom report has been generated, When the user selects the 'Visualize' option, Then the visual data mapping feature should display a graphical representation of the report's metrics on the dashboard.
User attempts to generate a custom report without selecting a metric.
Given the user is in the Custom Reporting Tools, When they click 'Generate Report' without selecting any metrics, Then an error message should be shown indicating that at least one metric must be selected.
User customizes a report and saves it for future use.
Given the user has generated a custom report, When they choose to save the report with a specific name, Then the report should be saved and accessible in the user's reports library for future retrieval.
User applies a date filter to generate a custom report for the past month.
Given the user is utilizing the Custom Reporting Tools, When they select the metric as 'Stock Levels' and apply a date filter for the past month, Then the generated report should reflect accurate stock level data for that time period.
Real-time Data Sync
"As a warehouse staff member, I want real-time updates on inventory levels so that I can manage stock accurately and prevent stockouts or overstock situations."
Description

The Real-time Data Sync requirement is critical for ensuring that all inventory data is continuously updated across all connected devices and platforms. This feature will enable seamless synchronization with existing ERP systems, guaranteeing that users always access the latest data on stock levels, incoming shipments, and order fulfillment statuses. The real-time synchronization will reduce the chances of discrepancies in inventory records and minimize errors, leading to improved operational efficiency. Furthermore, it will enhance user confidence in the platform, knowing that they are working with the most up-to-date information at all times.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user accessing InvenTrack on multiple devices, I want to ensure that any changes I make to inventory data on one device are reflected in real-time on all other devices used by my team, to maintain consistency and accuracy across the platform.
Given that a user updates the inventory stock level on their tablet, When they access the system from a laptop, Then the stock level should reflect the change made on the tablet within 5 seconds.
As a warehouse manager, I want to receive immediate updates on incoming shipments when they are processed by our ERP system, so I can adjust our inventory and prepare for new stock ahead of time.
Given that an incoming shipment is processed in the ERP system, When the shipment details are synced with InvenTrack, Then the inventory dashboard should update the stock levels for that item within 10 seconds.
As a business analyst, I need to ensure that inventory counts provided by the automated sync feature match the count in our ERP system to eliminate discrepancies before conducting a financial audit.
Given that real-time data sync is enabled, When I compare the inventory data in InvenTrack with the data in the ERP system, Then both datasets should have at least a 99% match for stock levels and recorded transactions.
As an operations manager, I want the syncing process to be seamless and without manual intervention, ensuring that updates do not require additional steps from my team to avoid workflow interruptions.
Given that the sync feature is operational, When a new order is received, Then the relevant data should automatically sync with InvenTrack without requiring any manual input from users.
As a retail manager, I want to be confident that stock levels are accurate in real-time so that I can make timely decisions regarding restocking and promotions during peak sales periods.
Given that real-time syncing is in place, When there is a high traffic volume and multiple transactions are processed simultaneously, Then the stock levels should update immediately without delay or errors in the inventory tracking system.
As a user monitoring supplier performance, I want to see the most recent supplier data reflected in my metrics to accurately gauge order fulfillment rates.
Given that supplier performance metrics rely on real-time data, When supplier order fulfillment statuses are updated in the ERP, Then the supplier performance metrics should refresh to show this updated data within 10 seconds on InvenTrack.
Automated Alerts for Stock Levels
"As an operations manager, I want automated alerts when stock levels are low so that I can reorder items before running out and avoid impacts on sales."
Description

The Automated Alerts for Stock Levels requirement involves implementing a notification system that alerts users when inventory levels reach specified thresholds. Users will be able to set minimum and maximum stock level parameters for different products, and the system will automatically notify them via email or in-app alerts when these thresholds are crossed. This feature aims to prevent stockouts and overstock situations, allowing users to proactively manage their inventory needs. By providing timely alerts, users can make informed purchasing decisions, ultimately leading to increased efficiency and reduced operational costs.

Acceptance Criteria
User sets minimum and maximum stock levels for a product, and the system is expected to send alerts when inventory crosses these thresholds.
Given a product with set minimum and maximum stock levels, when the inventory level falls below the minimum threshold or exceeds the maximum threshold, then an alert must be sent to the user via email and in-app notification.
A user receives multiple stock level alerts for various products in a single day.
Given multiple products configured with different stock thresholds, when any of these products breach their respective thresholds within a single day, then the system must ensure that all relevant alerts are sent to the user in a consolidated manner.
A user is notified when stock levels return to normal levels after previously triggering an alert.
Given a product that has triggered a low or high stock alert, when the inventory level subsequently returns within normal limits, then the user must receive a notification that confirms the stock status is back to normal.
A user wants to customize the format of alerts they receive for stock levels via email settings.
Given a user with specific email preferences set, when an inventory threshold alert is triggered, then the alert should be formatted according to the user's selected preferences, including relevant product details and action suggestions.
Users are able to view a history of their stock level alerts within the InvenTrack dashboard.
Given a user accessing the alerts section in the dashboard, when they select the option to view alert history, then the system should display a comprehensive list of all alerts sent, including timestamps and severity levels.
A user tests the alert system by setting incorrect stock threshold values intentionally.
Given a user inputting illogical stock levels (e.g. maximum less than minimum), when they submit the thresholds, then the system must provide immediate feedback indicating the error and preventing submission until corrected.
A user wants to pause notifications for a certain product temporarily.
Given a user managing their notification settings, when they select an option to silence alerts for a specific product, then notifications for that product should be suppressed for the specified duration without affecting other alerts.
Supplier Performance Analytics
"As a procurement specialist, I want to analyze supplier performance metrics so that I can choose the best suppliers and negotiate better terms."
Description

The Supplier Performance Analytics requirement involves developing analytical tools that provide insights into supplier performance metrics, such as delivery times, order accuracy, and quality ratings. This feature will allow users to assess the reliability and effectiveness of their suppliers based on historical data and performance trends. By integrating these analytics into the visual data mapping feature, users will be able to evaluate supplier performance visually, enabling them to make informed decisions regarding supplier partnerships and inventory sourcing strategies. This capability is vital for improving supply chain management and ensuring the highest level of operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
Viewing Supplier Performance Metrics on the Dashboard
Given the user is on the Visual Data Mapping dashboard, when they select the 'Supplier Performance' option, then the dashboard must display performance metrics including delivery times, order accuracy, and quality ratings for each supplier.
Analyzing Trends in Supplier Performance
Given the user has accessed the Supplier Performance metrics on the dashboard, when they view the graphical representation, then they must see a trend line that illustrates changes in performance over the past six months for each selected metric.
Comparative Analysis of Multiple Suppliers
Given the user is viewing Supplier Performance metrics, when they select two or more suppliers to compare, then the dashboard must display a side-by-side comparative analysis of delivery times, order accuracy, and quality ratings visually.
Filtering Supplier Performance Data
Given the user is on the Supplier Performance dashboard, when they apply filters for specific time periods or metrics, then the dashboard must refresh to display only the relevant supplier performance data according to the applied filters.
Exporting Supplier Performance Metrics
Given the user has analyzed the Supplier Performance metrics on the dashboard, when they select the 'Export' option, then the system must provide a downloadable report in CSV format containing the displayed metrics.
Receiving Alerts for Underperforming Suppliers
Given the user has specified performance thresholds, when a supplier falls below these thresholds in order accuracy or delivery times, then the system must automatically send an alert notification to the user.
Integration of Supplier Performance Data into Inventory Decisions
Given the user is utilizing the Supplier Performance analytics, when they make a decision to reorder stock from a supplier, then the system must prompt them to consider the supplier's performance metrics before finalizing the order.
Mobile Accessibility
"As a small business owner, I want to access my inventory management system on my mobile device so that I can check stock levels and manage orders while I'm away from my desk."
Description

The Mobile Accessibility requirement aims to create a mobile-friendly version of the InvenTrack platform, allowing users to manage their inventory on-the-go. The mobile version should provide essential inventory management functionalities, such as viewing stock levels, receiving alerts, and generating basic reports. This accessibility ensures that users can access critical inventory information from anywhere, enhancing flexibility and responsiveness. The mobile accessibility feature will contribute significantly to improving overall user satisfaction and enable better management of inventory, regardless of location.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user, I want to access the InvenTrack mobile platform from my smartphone while on a business trip, so I can view my current inventory levels and make informed decisions about stock management.
Given that the user is logged into the InvenTrack mobile application, when they navigate to the inventory section, then they should see real-time stock levels displayed accurately for each item in their inventory.
As a warehouse manager, I need to receive real-time alerts on my mobile device for low stock items, so I can act quickly to reorder without being on-site.
Given the user has set up notification preferences in the mobile app, when stock for any item drops below the predefined threshold, then the user should receive an instant push notification about the low stock status.
As a business owner, I want to generate basic inventory reports on my mobile device while attending a trade show, so I can provide insights to potential partners.
Given that the user is using the mobile application, when they select the report generation feature, then they should be able to create and download a basic inventory report in PDF format without errors.
As a user working remotely, I want to seamlessly switch between my laptop and mobile version of InvenTrack without losing my session, so I can maintain workflow efficiency.
Given the user is logged into their account on both devices, when they switch from the mobile device to the laptop, then they should find their session state preserved without requiring re-login.
As a user, I want to ensure that the mobile version of InvenTrack meets security standards, so I can use it confidently without risks of data breaches.
Given the user is accessing the mobile application, when they attempt to log in, then two-factor authentication must be required for enhanced security, ensuring only authorized access to sensitive inventory data.
As a store manager, I need to analyze historical inventory trends on my mobile device, so I can forecast future inventory needs accurately.
Given the user accesses the analytics section of the mobile app, when they view the historical data for the past six months, then detailed visual graphs of stock trends should be displayed, allowing for easy interpretation and decision-making.

Waste Reduction Dashboard

This feature provides users with a visual overview of inventory waste, highlighting items that are nearing expiration or have low turnover rates. By identifying waste patterns, users can take proactive measures to minimize losses, optimize inventory turnover, and enhance overall sustainability practices.

Requirements

Waste Identification Alerts
"As a warehouse manager, I want to receive alerts for items nearing expiration so that I can take action to reduce waste and optimize our inventory turnover."
Description

This requirement involves the implementation of an automated alert system that notifies users when inventory items are nearing their expiration dates or have been flagged for low turnover rates. The alerts should be configurable according to user preferences, with the ability to set thresholds for each product category. This feature will enable users to take proactive measures to manage their stock effectively, minimizing waste and enhancing efficiency in inventory practices. It integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory monitoring functionalities of InvenTrack, offering users timely information that can lead to informed decision-making and improved sustainability practices.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an alert for an inventory item that is nearing expiration date based on configured thresholds.
Given the user has configured expiration thresholds, when an item is within the specified threshold, then an alert notification should be sent to the user via their preferred channel.
User can configure alert thresholds for different product categories in the Waste Identification Alerts settings.
Given the user is in the alert configuration settings, when they set a threshold for a product category, then that threshold should be saved and reflected in the alerting system.
User views the alert log to see previously triggered alerts for waste identification.
Given the user accesses the alert log, when they select the 'Waste Identification Alerts' section, then they should see a list of all triggered alerts with timestamps and item details.
User receives an alert for an inventory item with low turnover rate based on criteria set in the system.
Given the user has established criteria for low turnover rates, when an item falls below these criteria, then an alert notification should be sent to the user.
User modifies the alert settings for a specific item after an initial configuration has been set.
Given the user is in the Waste Identification Alert settings, when they modify the alert settings for a previously configured item, then those changes should be successfully saved and updated.
User tests the alert system to ensure notifications are received as expected.
Given the user has set a test inventory item with a near expiration date, when the system triggers an alert for that item, then the user should receive the alert notification as per their configured preferences.
Visual Waste Analytics
"As a business owner, I want a visual overview of inventory waste patterns so that I can identify trends and make strategic decisions to minimize losses."
Description

This requirement focuses on creating a comprehensive visual analytics dashboard that presents data related to inventory waste in an easily digestible format. It should provide graphical representations of expired items, anticipated waste based on consumption trends, and turnover rates for various products. The dashboard will permit filtering by categories and timeframes to allow users to analyze waste patterns and make data-driven decisions. This visualization will enhance user understanding of waste dynamics, supporting strategic planning and inventory optimization initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria
Visualizing Waste Patterns for Expired Items
Given the user is on the Waste Reduction Dashboard, when they select the 'Expired Items' filter, then the dashboard displays a graphical representation of all expired inventory items, highlighting their quantities and expiration dates.
Analyzing Anticipated Waste Based on Consumption Trends
Given the user has selected a specific product category, when they view the Waste Reduction Dashboard, then the anticipated waste trends for the selected category are presented in a time-series graph showing projected waste over the next three months.
Evaluating Turnover Rates Across Multiple Timeframes
Given the user is analyzing the turnover rates for inventory items, when they adjust the timeframe filter on the dashboard, then the graphical representation of turnover rates updates to reflect the selected timeframe, showing comparisons between the past and current periods.
Filtering Data by Categories for In-Depth Analysis
Given the user wants to focus on a specific product category, when they apply the category filter on the Waste Reduction Dashboard, then only the items within the selected category are displayed in all corresponding visual analytics, including waste and turnover graphs.
Exporting Waste Analytics for Reporting
Given the user has completed their analysis on the Waste Reduction Dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then the data is downloaded in an Excel format, containing all visual representations and raw data of waste analytics as displayed.
Identifying High-Waste Items for Strategic Action
Given the user is reviewing the Waste Reduction Dashboard, when they click on an item shown to have high waste levels, then a detailed overlay presents the item's historical waste data, turnover rates, and suggested actions to reduce waste.
Sustainability Reporting
"As a sustainability officer, I want to generate reports on inventory waste so that I can present the impact of our waste management efforts to stakeholders and guide policy improvements."
Description

This requirement entails the development of a reporting feature that generates sustainability reports regarding inventory waste. These reports should include metrics on waste reduction achievements, cost implications of wasted items, and suggestions for improving inventory practices based on historical data. The reports will ultimately support users in understanding the environmental and financial impact of waste, fostering a culture of sustainability within business operations and providing frameworks for future improvements. The reporting feature should allow for customization based on user needs and specific business metrics.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user, I want to generate a sustainability report on inventory waste that includes metrics on total waste reduction for the last quarter, so I can analyze our performance in minimizing waste compared to previous periods.
Given that the user selects the reporting period as the last quarter, when the report is generated, then the report should display total waste reduction metrics, including percentages and comparisons to the previous quarters.
As a business owner, I need the sustainability report to include cost implications of wasted items, so I can assess the financial impact of inventory waste on our budget.
Given that the user requests a sustainability report, when the report is generated, then it should include a section detailing the total cost associated with wasted inventory items for the specified period.
As an operations manager, I want to customize the sustainability report to focus on specific product categories, so I can better target our waste reduction efforts where they are most needed.
Given that the user is generating a report, when they select specific product categories, then the report should reflect only the waste metrics and cost implications related to those selected categories.
As a sustainability officer, I want to receive suggestions for improving inventory practices based on historical data within the sustainability report, so I can take actionable steps towards reducing waste.
Given that the report has been generated, when the user reviews the report, then it should include a section with at least three actionable suggestions derived from historical data analysis on waste patterns.
As a user, I need the sustainability report to be exportable as a PDF, so I can share it with my team and stakeholders for further discussion.
Given that the sustainability report is displayed on the screen, when the user clicks the export button, then a PDF version of the report should be generated successfully and made available for download.
As a finance director, I want to receive notifications when the sustainability report is generated, so I can review our waste metrics in a timely manner.
Given that a sustainability report has been successfully generated, when the report is completed, then a notification should be sent to the relevant stakeholders via their registered email addresses.
As a user, I want to visualize inventory waste trends over time in the sustainability report, so I can understand how our practices have evolved.
Given that the user generates the sustainability report, when they view the report, then it should include graphs or charts displaying inventory waste trends over the last year with monthly breakdowns.
Benchmarking Against Industry Standards
"As a logistics manager, I want to benchmark our inventory waste metrics against industry standards so that I can identify areas for improvement and enhance our waste reduction strategies."
Description

This requirement proposes the integration of a benchmarking tool that allows users to compare their waste metrics against industry standards and best practices. The tool will provide insights into how a user's waste performance stands relative to others in their market segment, proposing actionable steps for improvement. By facilitating this comparison, users can identify areas of weakness and target specific inventory practices that require enhancement, ultimately driving down waste and increasing operational efficiencies across their inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user of InvenTrack, I want to access the benchmarking tool on the Waste Reduction Dashboard to view how my waste metrics compare to industry standards.
Given that the user is logged in and accesses the Waste Reduction Dashboard, when they click on the benchmarking tool, then they should be presented with a comparison of their waste metrics against relevant industry benchmarks and best practices.
As a business owner, I want to receive recommendations from the benchmarking tool after comparing my waste metrics to identify specific areas for improvement.
Given that the user has completed the benchmarking comparison, when the benchmarks are displayed, then actionable recommendations for reducing waste and optimizing inventory levels should be provided based on the comparison results.
As a user, I want to see historical performance data in the benchmarking tool so that I can track my waste reduction progress over time.
Given that the user is in the benchmarking tool and has selected a historical period, when they view the performance data, then they should see a visual representation of their waste metrics over time compared to industry standards.
As a warehouse manager, I need to export my benchmarking comparison results to share with my team for strategic planning.
Given that the user has reviewed their benchmarking data, when they choose to export the data, then an export option should be available that generates a report in a commonly used format (e.g., PDF, Excel) containing the comparison and recommendations.
As a user, I want to customize the metrics I compare in the benchmarking tool to make the data more relevant to my specific business context.
Given that the user is on the benchmarking tool settings page, when they select specific waste metrics and save their preferences, then the benchmarking comparison should reflect only the selected metrics in the results.
As a user, I want to receive alerts when my waste metrics deviate significantly from industry standards so I can take immediate action.
Given that the user has set their preferences for alerts, when the benchmarking tool detects a significant deviation in waste metrics, then the user should receive a notification via email or in-app alert indicating the concern and suggested actions.
User Configuration Settings
"As an operations supervisor, I want to configure my alert and reporting settings so that I receive the most relevant information tailored to my specific inventory needs."
Description

This requirement involves the creation of a robust user configuration system that allows users to customize their notification settings, dashboard preferences, and reporting formats related to waste reduction. Users should have the ability to define specific parameters for alerts, choose the types of analytics they wish to visualize, and set their preferred reporting formats. This level of customization will enhance the usability of the Waste Reduction Dashboard, ensuring that users can tailor the platform to their specific operational needs and preferences, thereby maximizing its effectiveness in helping them reduce waste.

Acceptance Criteria
User configures notification settings for inventory waste alerts.
Given a logged-in user, when they navigate to the user configuration settings, then they should be able to set specific thresholds for receiving alerts on items nearing expiration or having low turnover rates.
User customizes their Waste Reduction Dashboard display preferences.
Given a logged-in user, when they access the dashboard preferences, then they should be able to choose the grid layout, select which analytics widgets to display, and reorder them as desired.
User sets reporting format for waste reduction analytics.
Given a logged-in user, when they save their reporting format preferences, then the system should allow them to select from available formats such as PDF, CSV, or Excel, and apply this format for future reports.
User receives alerts based on their configured settings.
Given a user who has configured specific notification settings, when an item meets the expiration or low turnover threshold, then the user should receive an email alert as per their specified contact preference.
User verifies the applied configurations reflect on the Waste Reduction Dashboard.
Given a user who has made changes to their dashboard preferences, when they refresh the Waste Reduction Dashboard, then all applied settings should be reflected accurately without any discrepancies.
User accesses help documentation for configuration settings.
Given a logged-in user, when they click on the help icon in the user configuration settings, then they should be directed to comprehensive help documentation related to configuring their settings and options.
Integration with ERP Systems
"As an IT manager, I want our inventory system to integrate with our ERP software so that we can ensure consistent and accurate data for waste management."
Description

This requirement focuses on ensuring the Waste Reduction Dashboard can seamlessly integrate with existing ERP systems used by clients. This integration will allow for automatic data synchronization, ensuring that inventory levels, expiration dates, and turnover rates are consistently updated and accurate across platforms. By facilitating real-time data flow between InvenTrack and ERP systems, users will gain a holistic view of their inventory and waste characteristics, empowering them to make timely decisions based on the most current information available.

Acceptance Criteria
Seamless Data Synchronization from ERP to InvenTrack
Given the user has an existing ERP system integrated with InvenTrack, when the user updates inventory levels or expiration dates in the ERP, then these changes should automatically reflect in the Waste Reduction Dashboard within 10 minutes.
Real-time Waste Reporting
Given the integration with the ERP system is functional, when the user accesses the Waste Reduction Dashboard, then the dashboard should display accurate waste metrics, including items nearing expiration and turnover rates, updated in real-time.
Error Handling for Data Sync Failures
Given the user is integrated with an ERP system, when a synchronization error occurs due to data inconsistency, then the user should receive a clear error message detailing the cause and possible resolutions.
User Access Control Management
Given a user has admin rights, when they configure integration settings for the ERP, then they should be able to assign user access levels for viewing and managing the Waste Reduction Dashboard.
Integration Configuration Setup
Given the user is setting up the integration with the ERP, when the user completes the integration configuration and saves it, then the system should validate the connection and provide confirmation of successful integration.
Performance Metrics Tracking
Given the Waste Reduction Dashboard is integrated with the ERP, when the user generates a report on inventory waste, then the report should include performance metrics such as waste reduction percentage over a defined period of time.

Eco-Friendly Sourcing Suggestions

Leveraging AI algorithms, this feature offers users recommendations for sourcing products from sustainable suppliers and environmentally-friendly manufacturers. It promotes responsible purchasing decisions that align with the company’s sustainability goals, enabling users to reduce their environmental impact.

Requirements

Eco-Friendly Supplier Database
"As a procurement manager, I want access to an eco-friendly supplier database so that I can source products responsibly and align with our company’s sustainability goals."
Description

Develop a comprehensive database of verified environmentally-friendly suppliers and manufacturers that meet specific sustainability criteria. This database will be integrated into the InvenTrack platform, allowing users to easily search and filter suppliers based on their sustainability practices. The inclusion of supplier ratings, product offerings, and compliance with environmental standards will empower businesses to make informed, responsible sourcing decisions that align with their sustainability goals, reducing their overall environmental impact while enhancing their corporate social responsibility efforts.

Acceptance Criteria
Searching for Eco-Friendly Suppliers in the InvenTrack Database
Given that a user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they access the Eco-Friendly Supplier Database and enter specific search criteria (e.g., product type, location, sustainability rating), then the system should return a list of verified suppliers that match the criteria within 3 seconds.
Filtering Suppliers by Sustainability Practices
Given that a user is viewing the Eco-Friendly Supplier Database, when they apply filters based on sustainability practices (e.g., carbon footprint, certifications, renewable resources), then the displayed list should update to show only those suppliers that meet the selected criteria, ensuring it complies with the desired filters.
Viewing Detailed Supplier Information
Given that a user selects a supplier from the Eco-Friendly Supplier Database, when they click on the supplier’s profile, then the system should display detailed information including supplier ratings, product offerings, and compliance certifications that are accessible in a clear format without errors.
Sorting Suppliers by Rating and Compliance
Given that a user is in the Eco-Friendly Supplier Database, when they choose to sort the supplier list by rating (e.g., highest to lowest) or compliance status, then the list should update to reflect the selection accurately and in real-time without page reload.
Adding New Suppliers to the Database
Given that an admin user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they input the details of a new supplier, along with sustainability verification documents, then the system should successfully add this supplier to the Eco-Friendly Supplier Database, confirming the addition with a success message.
Generating Reports on Supplier Sustainability Impact
Given that a user is utilizing the reporting features in InvenTrack, when they request a report on the overall sustainability impact of selected suppliers, then the system should generate a report summarizing metrics such as total carbon savings and sourced products from sustainable suppliers, with accuracy in data representation.
Receiving Notifications for New Verified Suppliers
Given that a user subscribes to updates in the Eco-Friendly Supplier Database, when a new supplier is verified and added, then the user should receive an automated notification within 24 hours, detailing the new supplier's sustainability qualifications.
AI-Powered Sourcing Recommendations
"As an inventory manager, I want AI-powered sourcing recommendations so that I can efficiently select eco-friendly suppliers that meet our operational needs without compromising our sustainability goals."
Description

Implement AI algorithms that analyze purchasing patterns, supplier performance, and sustainability criteria to provide users with tailored sourcing suggestions for eco-friendly products. These recommendations will consider factors such as price, availability, and vendor reliability. The feature will automatically update based on changing inventory levels and supplier offers, ensuring users receive the most current and relevant suggestions. This will enhance user decision-making by promoting sustainable practices while maintaining cost efficiency in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User requests eco-friendly sourcing suggestions by accessing the AI-powered feature through the InvenTrack dashboard after updating their inventory levels.
Given the user has updated their inventory levels, when they access the AI-powered sourcing recommendations, then they should receive a list of at least three eco-friendly suppliers that meet their sustainability criteria.
User receives automated alerts for sourcing recommendations based on shifts in inventory and supplier offers while maintaining an awareness of sustainability.
Given that the user's inventory level falls below the predefined threshold, when the AI analyses supplier offers, then the user should receive an alert containing eco-friendly product suggestions within 24 hours.
User evaluates the sourcing suggestions for eco-friendly products based on price and availability.
Given the user has received sourcing suggestions, when they open the suggestion details, then they should see relevant data including price comparison, availability status, and a sustainability rating for each supplier.
User requests updates to their sourcing recommendations based on a change in their sustainability criteria.
Given the user modifies their sustainability preferences in the settings, when they request new sourcing recommendations, then they should receive updated suggestions that comply with the new criteria.
User shares sourcing suggestions with their procurement department for further evaluation and decision-making.
Given the user selects a sourcing suggestion, when they choose to share it, then the selected recommendations should be sent via email to designated procurement team members with all relevant details included.
Admin monitors the effectiveness of the AI-powered sourcing suggestions by analyzing user engagement and decision metrics.
Given the admin accesses the analytics dashboard, when they review the metrics, then they should see user engagement statistics and decision outcomes that demonstrate the effectiveness of the AI suggestions over time.
Sustainability Impact Reports
"As a business owner, I want sustainability impact reports so that I can showcase the environmental benefits of our sourcing decisions to our stakeholders and enhance our brand’s commitment to sustainability."
Description

Create a reporting tool within InvenTrack that provides users with insights into the sustainability impact of their sourcing decisions. These reports will analyze data such as carbon footprint reduction, waste minimization, and overall environmental benefits achieved through the use of eco-friendly suppliers. Users will be able to visualize the positive environmental outcomes of their procurement strategies, helping to strengthen their commitment to sustainability and provide stakeholders with transparent data on corporate social responsibility achievements.

Acceptance Criteria
Sustainability Impact Reports generation for a user's selected date range.
Given a user has selected a specific date range for their sourcing decisions, when they generate the Sustainability Impact Report, then the report displays accurate data on carbon footprint reduction and waste minimization corresponding to the selected period.
Visualization of environmental benefits within the Sustainability Impact Reports.
Given a user views their generated Sustainability Impact Report, when they look at the environmental impact visualizations, then all charts and graphs effectively illustrate the positive outcomes of their sourcing strategies and are easy to interpret.
Exporting the Sustainability Impact Reports for stakeholder presentations.
Given a user has generated a Sustainability Impact Report, when they choose to export the report, then the export functionality successfully generates a PDF that retains all data, visualizations, and formatting consistent with what is displayed in the app.
Comparison of sustainability impact between eco-friendly and traditional suppliers.
Given a user requests a comparative analysis within the Sustainability Impact Report, when the report is generated, then it clearly outlines the differences in sustainability metrics, such as carbon footprints, between eco-friendly suppliers and traditional suppliers, enabling informed decision-making.
User feedback on the accuracy of Sustainability Impact Reports.
Given a user has viewed their Sustainability Impact Report, when they provide feedback on the accuracy of the data presented, then there should be a mechanism in place for users to submit their feedback, and they should receive confirmation that their feedback has been recorded.
Accessibility of Sustainability Impact Reports for users with disabilities.
Given a user with disabilities accesses the Sustainability Impact Reports, when they navigate through the report, then all features and visualizations should be compliant with accessibility standards, ensuring usability for all users regardless of their abilities.
User-Friendly Supplier Search Interface
"As a procurement officer, I want a user-friendly supplier search interface so that I can quickly and easily identify suitable eco-friendly suppliers for our purchasing needs without wasting time."
Description

Design an intuitive search interface within the InvenTrack platform that allows users to efficiently find and compare eco-friendly suppliers based on specific parameters such as product type, sustainability certifications, and location. The interface will include filters and sorting options, enabling users to quickly identify suppliers that meet their needs. This feature will simplify the sourcing process, reduce the time spent on supplier research, and enhance user experience by providing a seamless navigation flow.

Acceptance Criteria
User searches for eco-friendly suppliers by entering product type, such as 'biodegradable packaging', and receives relevant results.
Given the user is on the supplier search interface, when they input 'biodegradable packaging' in the search bar, then the system displays a list of suppliers who offer biodegradable packaging with relevant details.
User applies filters for sustainability certifications to narrow down supplier options.
Given the user has accessed the supplier search interface, when they select the filter for 'Fair Trade' certification and click 'Apply', then only suppliers with the Fair Trade certification should be displayed in the results.
User wants to sort suppliers by location to find those closest to their business.
Given the user is viewing the list of eco-friendly suppliers, when they choose 'Sort by Location' from the sorting options, then suppliers should be reordered based on proximity to the user's entered location.
User checks for an option to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side to make an informed decision.
Given the user has selected multiple eco-friendly suppliers, when they click on the 'Compare' button, then a comparative interface showing key attributes of the selected suppliers (e.g., certifications, pricing, ratings) should be displayed clearly.
User saves search preferences and is able to retrieve them for future use.
Given the user has adjusted their search parameters and saved them, when they navigate away from the search interface and return, then the previous search settings should automatically populate the search fields.
User accesses the supplier search interface from different devices and maintains a consistent experience.
Given the user logs into the InvenTrack platform from a mobile device, when they access the supplier search interface, then it should be responsive and provide the same functionality as the desktop version.
User navigates the supplier search interface utilizing keyboard shortcuts for efficiency.
Given the user prefers to use keyboard shortcuts, when they utilize the shortcut for 'search' or 'apply filter', then the correct action should be executed without needing a mouse.
Integration with Existing ERP Systems
"As an IT manager, I want integration with our ERP system so that we can synchronize supplier data and improve our inventory management processes while adopting eco-friendly sourcing practices."
Description

Establish a seamless integration capability between InvenTrack and popular ERP systems used by SMBs. This integration will allow for real-time data exchange, ensuring that users have access to up-to-date supplier information and inventory status. Enhancing system interoperability will streamline the procurement process for companies adopting eco-friendly sourcing strategies, allowing for better synchronization of inventory and supplier management efforts.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the integration setup page within InvenTrack to connect their existing ERP system.
Given a registered user, when they navigate to the integration setup page, then they should see a list of supported ERP systems with easy-to-follow setup instructions and an option to connect their selected ERP system.
User connects their ERP system to InvenTrack for real-time data exchange.
Given that the user has selected their ERP system, when they input their connection credentials and click 'Connect', then the system should successfully establish a connection and provide a confirmation message with the current status of data synchronization.
Users receive real-time updates of inventory status from their ERP system in InvenTrack.
Given that the integration is successfully established, when inventory data is updated in the ERP system, then InvenTrack should reflect those changes within 5 minutes, ensuring users have access to the most current inventory status.
User utilizes eco-friendly sourcing suggestions based on inventory data from their integrated ERP system.
Given that eco-friendly sourcing suggestions are enabled, when the inventory level of a product falls below the reorder threshold, then InvenTrack should automatically provide suggestions for sustainable suppliers available in the database tailored to that product.
User monitors the synchronization status of their connected ERP system.
Given that the user is on the integration management page, when they view the synchronization status, then they should see a dashboard displaying the last successful sync time and the total number of records synchronized, along with any errors if present.
User edits or removes their ERP system connection from InvenTrack.
Given that the user wishes to modify their ERP connection, when they navigate to the integration management page and select the 'Edit' or 'Remove' option for their connected ERP system, then the changes should be applied successfully and confirmed by a notification message.
User accesses historical data of interactions between InvenTrack and their ERP system.
Given that the integration has been in use for a period, when the user requests historical data interactions, then they should be able to view a timeline of all synchronization events indicating success or failure, including timestamps and details for each event.

Carbon Footprint Calculator

This tool assesses the carbon emissions associated with the inventory supply chain, providing users with actionable insights to lower their environmental impact. By visualizing the carbon footprint of their products, users can adjust sourcing and logistics strategies to achieve greener operations.

Requirements

Carbon Footprint Data Integration
"As a supply chain manager, I want to integrate various data sources into the Carbon Footprint Calculator so that I can obtain accurate and up-to-date measurements of our inventory's carbon emissions and optimize our sourcing strategies accordingly."
Description

This requirement entails the incorporation of various data sources within the Carbon Footprint Calculator, enabling automatic fetching and aggregation of carbon emissions data related to inventory supply chain operations. By providing standardized data formats and supporting APIs, this integration will allow the platform to generate precise calculations of the carbon footprint based on real-time inventory data. Additionally, it will enhance the richness of insights users receive, enabling them to make informed decisions about their sourcing and logistics strategies while promoting eco-friendly practices. Establishing robust data pipelines and synchronization processes is imperative to ensure accuracy and reliability in calculations, ultimately allowing businesses to take actionable steps in achieving sustainability goals.

Acceptance Criteria
Carbon Footprint Data Integration for Automated Fetching of Emissions Data
Given the Carbon Footprint Calculator is connected to the various data sources, When an inventory item is processed, Then the system should automatically fetch and aggregate the associated carbon emissions data in real-time with an accuracy rate of at least 95%.
Data Standardization and API Support for Carbon Emissions
Given that the data sources provide carbon emissions data, When the system integrates with these sources, Then the data format should be standardized across all sources, and at least 90% of API calls should return accurate emissions data without errors.
Real-Time Updates of Carbon Footprint Calculations
Given that the inventory levels change throughout the day, When a change in inventory occurs, Then the Carbon Footprint Calculator should update the carbon emissions calculations within 5 minutes to reflect the new inventory levels.
User Interface for Visualizing Carbon Footprint Insights
Given that emissions data is aggregated, When a user accesses the Carbon Footprint Calculator, Then the UI should display a visual representation of the carbon footprint for each product in a clear and understandable format with no more than 2 clicks needed to access this information.
Actionable Insights for Reducing Carbon Footprint
Given that the Carbon Footprint Calculator provides insights, When a user analyzes the reports, Then they should be able to receive at least three actionable recommendations to reduce their carbon footprint based on the emissions data visualized.
Robust Data Pipeline and Synchronization for Accuracy
Given the requirement for robust data pipelines, When importing data from various sources, Then the data synchronization process should have a failure rate of less than 1% and complete all data imports within a maximum of 15 minutes.
Interactive Carbon Footprint Visualization
"As a product manager, I want to visualize carbon emissions data interactively so that I can easily analyze trends, identify improvement areas, and promote sustainability initiatives within our business operations."
Description

The requirement focuses on developing an interactive user interface feature within the Carbon Footprint Calculator that allows users to visualize their carbon emissions data through dynamic graphs and charts. Data will be presented in a clear and engaging manner, enabling users to analyze emissions trends and identify areas for improvement effortlessly. Features will include filtering options by time periods, product categories, and supply chain stages, along with comparative visualizations to benchmark against industry standards or internal targets. This capability will drive user engagement and facilitate better understanding of their ecological impact, fostering a culture of sustainability within the organization.

Acceptance Criteria
Interactive Visualization of Carbon Emissions Over Time
Given that a user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they access the Carbon Footprint Calculator and select the time frame (e.g., last month, last quarter), then the interactive graph should accurately display the carbon emissions data for the selected period, allowing the user to visualize trends clearly.
Filtering by Product Category
Given that a user is viewing their carbon emissions data, when they apply a filter for specific product categories, then the visualizations should update dynamically to display only the emissions data relevant to the selected categories, ensuring the user can analyze targeted information effectively.
Comparative Visualization Against Industry Standards
Given that a user has accessed the interactive carbon footprint visualization, when they choose to benchmark their emissions data against industry standards, then the tool should provide comparative graphs that highlight discrepancies, enabling the user to identify potential areas for improvement in their sourcing and logistics strategies.
User Engagement with Dynamic Charts
Given the user is interacting with the dynamic charts, when they hover over specific data points in the graph, then a tooltip should appear displaying detailed emissions data for that point, facilitating deeper insights and user engagement with the graphs.
Multi-Stage Supply Chain Visualization
Given that a user is analyzing their carbon footprint, when they select the option to visualize emissions by supply chain stages, then the charts should delineate emissions data per stage (e.g., production, transportation, warehousing) clearly, providing a comprehensive view of their carbon footprint throughout the supply chain.
Exporting Visualization Data
Given that a user has analyzed their carbon emissions through the interactive visualizations, when they choose to export the data in a report format (e.g., PDF or CSV), then the exported report should include all relevant visualizations, charts, and key insights, allowing for offline analysis and sharing.
Automated Reporting on Carbon Footprint
"As a sustainability officer, I want to receive automated reports on our carbon emissions so that I can monitor our environmental impact and ensure we are meeting our sustainability targets efficiently."
Description

This requirement outlines the development of an automated reporting functionality within the Carbon Footprint Calculator that generates comprehensive reports on carbon emissions based on predefined criteria. These reports will be customizable, allowing users to select specific metrics, timeframes, and product categories for in-depth analysis. Furthermore, the functionality will include scheduled email notifications that deliver reports directly to key stakeholders on a regular basis. This will streamline communication regarding environmental impacts and adherence to sustainability goals, ensuring that leaders are consistently informed and enabling data-driven decision making.

Acceptance Criteria
Automated Report Generation Based on User Selections
Given that a user has selected specific metrics, timeframes, and product categories for their carbon footprint report, when they initiate the report generation process, then an automated report should be generated accurately reflecting the user's selections and should be accessible for download within 5 minutes.
Scheduled Email Notifications for Reports
Given that a user has set up a schedule for automated email notifications for the carbon footprint reports, when the scheduled time arrives, then the relevant stakeholders should receive the reports via email without any errors and within 5 minutes of the scheduled time.
Customization Options for Reports
Given that a user is generating a carbon footprint report, when they choose customization options for layout and data presentation, then the generated report should accurately reflect those customizations, including format variations (e.g., PDF, CSV) and data visualizations that display the selected metrics appropriately.
User Interface for Report Generation
Given that a user accesses the Carbon Footprint Calculator, when they navigate to the report generation section, then the user interface should be intuitive and allow for easy selection of metrics, timeframes, and product categories without requiring external help.
Performance of the Report Generation Functionality
Given that a user initiates the report generation for the carbon footprint, when the request is made for a report covering a large dataset, then the system should process and generate the report within 10 minutes, providing an efficient experience even under heavy loads.
User-Friendly Carbon Footprint Assessment Tool
"As an operations team member, I want a user-friendly interface for the Carbon Footprint Calculator so that I can easily assess our carbon emissions without needing extensive training or technical skills."
Description

This requirement emphasizes developing a user-friendly interface for the Carbon Footprint Calculator, facilitating easy navigation and enhancing user experience. Intuitive design principles will be applied to ensure that even non-technical users can comprehend and operate the tool without difficulty. The interface will include step-by-step workflows for assessing carbon footprints, inputting data, and generating reports. By prioritizing usability, the tool will encourage broader adoption among users, ultimately integrating sustainability practices into daily operational decisions within the organization.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Carbon Footprint Calculator from their dashboard to perform a new assessment of their inventory.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Carbon Footprint Calculator, then they should see an easy-to-navigate interface with clearly labeled sections for data input, report generation, and historical assessments.
User inputs data into the Carbon Footprint Calculator for their inventory items.
Given the user is on the data input section, when they enter information about their inventory items, then the interface should validate the data in real-time, ensuring all required fields are completed before submission.
User generates a carbon footprint report after inputting their inventory data.
Given the user has completed data input, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a detailed carbon footprint report should be produced and displayed, summarizing the carbon emissions associated with the inventory.
User navigates through the step-by-step workflow designed for assessing carbon footprints.
Given the user is using the Carbon Footprint Calculator, when they follow the step-by-step workflow, then they should be guided through each stage with informative tooltips and contextual help available at each step.
User saves their carbon footprint assessment for future reference.
Given the user has generated a report, when they select the 'Save Assessment' option, then the assessment should be saved to their account, allowing them to access it later under 'Saved Assessments' without data loss.
User seeks assistance while using the Carbon Footprint Calculator.
Given the user is on any page within the Carbon Footprint Calculator, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then they should be presented with a dropdown of FAQs and support options relevant to the specific section they are currently in.
Customizable Sustainability Benchmarks
"As a strategic planner, I want to set customizable sustainability benchmarks within the Carbon Footprint Calculator so that I can measure our performance against set goals and drive continuous improvement in our environmental initiatives."
Description

The requirement is for a feature allowing users to establish customizable sustainability benchmarks within the Carbon Footprint Calculator. Users will be able to define criteria such as carbon emission targets against which their performance can be measured. This capability will foster accountability and motivate ongoing improvements as teams will be able to track their progress relative to their own defined goals as well as industry standards. Additionally, by incorporating benchmarking reports, users can benchmark against competitors, identifying areas for competitive advantage in sustainability efforts.

Acceptance Criteria
Establishing Custom Carbon Emission Targets by Users
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the Carbon Footprint Calculator and access the sustainability benchmarks section, then they should be able to define and save their own carbon emission targets successfully.
Generating Benchmarking Reports for User-defined Targets
Given the user has set customized carbon emission targets, when they request a benchmarking report, then the system should generate a report comparing their performance against their defined targets and industry standards.
Visualizing User-defined Benches on Carbon Footprint Metrics
Given the user has established their sustainability benchmarks, when viewing the carbon footprint metrics in the dashboard, then the metrics should visually reflect their defined benchmarks for easy comparison.
Receiving Alerts when Targets are Approached or Exceeded
Given that the user has set their carbon emission targets, when their calculated carbon emissions approach or exceed these targets, then the system should send an automated alert to the user.
Editing Existing Benchmark Criteria
Given the user has created sustainability benchmarks, when they choose to edit an existing target, then they should be able to modify the target and save the changes successfully without errors.
Comparative Analysis with Competitors' Sustainability Efforts
Given the user has access to competitive benchmarking features, when they request a comparative analysis, then they should receive a report that includes comparative data on competitors' sustainability efforts versus their own.
Displaying Trends Over Time Related to Benchmarks
Given the user has historical data in their carbon footprint records, when they view the trends section of the Carbon Footprint Calculator, then they should see a clear visualization of their carbon emissions trend relative to their benchmarks over time.
Educational Resource Hub for Sustainability Practices
"As a sustainability advocate, I want access to educational resources on sustainability practices so that I can better understand how to interpret carbon emissions data and implement effective strategies in our operations."
Description

This requirement involves creating an educational resource hub within the Carbon Footprint Calculator, providing users with access to articles, best practices, and case studies on sustainability in inventory management and logistics. This hub will serve as a guide, helping users understand how to interpret their carbon footprint results and implement effective sustainability practices in their operations. By offering this comprehensive support, businesses will be empowered to adopt greener strategies effectively, fostering a culture of sustainability that aligns with their corporate values and objectives.

Acceptance Criteria
Accessing the Educational Resource Hub to view articles on carbon footprint reduction strategies.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack's Carbon Footprint Calculator, when they navigate to the Educational Resource Hub, then they should see a list of at least 10 articles related to sustainability practices, each with a title and short description.
Searching for specific sustainability practices within the Educational Resource Hub.
Given a user is on the Educational Resource Hub, when they enter a keyword in the search bar, then only articles containing that keyword should be displayed in the search results.
Viewing case studies in the Educational Resource Hub.
Given the user is on the Educational Resource Hub, when they click on the 'Case Studies' tab, then they should see at least 5 case studies with details on sustainability practices and their outcomes.
Accessing best practices for carbon emissions reduction in logistics.
Given a user is on the Educational Resource Hub, when they select the 'Best Practices' category, then they should be able to view at least 8 best practices for reducing carbon emissions in inventory logistics.
Utilizing educational resources to implement sustainability practices in their company.
Given a user has accessed a specific article from the Educational Resource Hub, when they click on the 'Download PDF' button, then they should successfully download the PDF version of that article for offline reference.
Providing feedback on the educational resources accessed.
Given a user has read an article from the Educational Resource Hub, when they click on the 'Provide Feedback' button, then they should be able to submit a feedback form that records their opinions on the article's usefulness.

Sustainable Packaging Selector

This feature guides users in selecting eco-friendly packaging options based on their inventory needs. By providing insights into sustainable materials and designs, it empowers businesses to make greener choices that minimize waste and enhance brand reputation.

Requirements

Eco-Friendly Packaging Options
"As a business owner, I want to select eco-friendly packaging options for my inventory so that I can reduce my environmental impact and enhance my brand's reputation for sustainability."
Description

The Sustainable Packaging Selector must provide a comprehensive database of eco-friendly packaging materials that are suitable for various inventory types. This includes detailed descriptions of each material's environmental benefits, sourcing information, and potential uses. The feature should allow users to filter options based on factors such as size, type, cost, and sustainability ratings. The database should be regularly updated to include new materials and trends in sustainable packaging, ensuring that businesses have access to the latest options available in the market.

Acceptance Criteria
User searches for eco-friendly packaging materials by filtering options based on specific attributes like size, type, cost, and sustainability ratings.
Given the user is on the Sustainable Packaging Selector page, when they input specific filters (size, type, cost, sustainability ratings), then the system should display packaging options that match all selected criteria.
User requests detailed descriptions of packaging materials from the eco-friendly database.
Given the user selects a specific eco-friendly material, when they click 'View Details', then the system should display a comprehensive description, including environmental benefits, sourcing information, and potential uses of the selected material.
The Sustainable Packaging Selector updates the database with new eco-friendly materials regularly to reflect the latest trends in sustainable packaging.
Given it’s a scheduled update time, when the database update process is executed, then new eco-friendly materials should be added, and outdated information should be removed or flagged for review within 24 hours.
User evaluates the sustainability ratings of packaging options before making a decision.
Given the user is viewing a list of eco-friendly packaging options, when they check the sustainability ratings, then each option should display its corresponding rating and a brief explanation of how the rating was determined.
The user saves a selection of eco-friendly packaging options for later reference.
Given the user has selected multiple packaging options, when they click on 'Save Selection', then the system should store these options in the user's account, allowing them to access it later under 'Saved Packaging Options'.
The system responds to user feedback regarding the accuracy of packaging material descriptions and ratings.
Given a user submits feedback on a specific packaging material's description, when the feedback is submitted, then the system should log the feedback for review and send an acknowledgment to the user confirming receipt of their feedback.
Sustainability Assessment Score
"As an inventory manager, I want to see a sustainability score for each packaging option so that I can make more informed choices about the materials I use and improve my company’s sustainability practices."
Description

The Sustainable Packaging Selector must include a sustainability assessment score for each packaging option, providing users with an easy-to-understand metric that summarizes the eco-friendliness of the materials. This score should be calculated based on various factors, including renewable resources used, recyclability, and carbon footprint. By enabling users to compare different packaging options quickly, this feature will facilitate informed decision-making aligned with sustainable practices.

Acceptance Criteria
When a user is selecting packaging options for their product, they should be able to view the sustainability assessment score for each packaging option available in the Sustainable Packaging Selector feature.
Given that the user is on the Sustainable Packaging Selector page, When they select a packaging option, Then the sustainability assessment score for that option should be displayed prominently on the interface.
As a user comparing several packaging options, I want to see a side-by-side comparison of sustainability assessment scores to make an informed decision quickly.
Given that a user has selected multiple packaging options for comparison, When they view the comparison panel, Then all selected options should display their sustainability assessment scores simultaneously and clearly.
A business needs to assess the eco-friendliness of packaging materials to comply with regulatory requirements and enhance their brand reputation.
Given that the user has access to the sustainability assessment score, When they look at the details of the score, Then they should be able to see the breakdown of the score based on renewable resources, recyclability, and carbon footprint contributions.
When a user selects a packaging option, they want to ensure that the sustainability assessment score updates in real-time based on criteria changes.
Given that the user modifies the criteria for sustainability assessment, When they make changes, Then the sustainability assessment score for the selected packaging option should update automatically and reflect the new calculations.
A user wants to retrieve a detailed report on all packaging options and their sustainability scores for an internal audit.
Given that the user requests a report, When they initiate the report generation, Then the system must provide a downloadable report containing all packaging options with their respective sustainability assessment scores and breakdowns within 10 seconds.
A user utilizes the Sustainable Packaging Selector for the first time and needs guidance on understanding the sustainability assessment score.
Given that the user is a first-time visitor to the Sustainable Packaging Selector, When they hover over the sustainability assessment score, Then a tooltip must appear explaining how the score is calculated and the factors involved.
Integration with ERP Systems
"As a systems administrator, I want the Sustainable Packaging Selector to integrate with our ERP system so that we can automate our packaging choices based on live inventory data and streamline our operations."
Description

The Sustainable Packaging Selector must integrate seamlessly with existing ERP systems utilized by SMBs. This integration will allow for real-time data exchange regarding inventory levels, sales trends, and packaging requirements, ensuring that users can select sustainable packaging options based on current inventory analytics. The integration should support API connections with major ERP platforms and provide documentation for implementation.

Acceptance Criteria
The Sustainable Packaging Selector integrates with a user’s ERP system upon implementation, allowing users to access real-time inventory data.
Given the Sustainable Packaging Selector is configured with valid API credentials, when the user accesses the integration settings, then the application successfully connects to the ERP system and retrieves real-time inventory data without errors.
Users are able to view sustainable packaging options based on current inventory levels directly from the ERP system data.
Given real-time inventory data is successfully fetched from the ERP, when the user navigates to the Sustainable Packaging Selector, then there are relevant packaging options displayed that align with the current inventory requirements.
The integration provides proper documentation to assist users during the implementation of the Sustainable Packaging Selector.
Given the integration documentation is available, when a user accesses the implementation guide, then it contains clear instructions, example queries, and troubleshooting tips related to API connections with ERP systems.
Users should receive notifications if there are any errors during data retrieval from the ERP system.
Given the integration is active, when an error occurs during data retrieval from the ERP, then the user is notified via an alert message indicating the type of error and suggested steps to troubleshoot.
The integration must support major ERP platforms like SAP, Oracle, and Microsoft Dynamics.
Given the requirement for compatibility with major ERP platforms, when the user selects the desired ERP system from a list, then the application enables the configuration process tailored for that specific ERP system's API.
Users can manage and update their ERP integration settings from within the InvenTrack interface.
Given a user has admin access, when they navigate to the integration settings, then they can successfully update API keys and integration parameters without system errors.
User-Friendly Interface
"As a new user, I want to navigate the Sustainable Packaging Selector easily so that I can quickly find suitable eco-friendly packaging options without confusion."
Description

The Sustainable Packaging Selector must feature a user-friendly interface that allows users to easily navigate through the options and make selections based on their specific needs. The design should prioritize usability, with intuitive search and filter functionalities, and provide educational resources about sustainable packaging options, including guides and best practices. Enhancements such as tooltips or help icons should be included to assist users in making informed decisions.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Sustainable Packaging Selector from the main dashboard to explore packaging options for a new product line.
Given that the user is on the main dashboard, when they click on the Sustainable Packaging Selector, then they should be directed to a clear interface displaying available eco-friendly packaging options with intuitive navigation.
User utilizes the search functionality to find specific packaging materials suitable for fragile items.
Given that the user is on the Sustainable Packaging Selector page, when they enter 'fragile' in the search bar, then the system should display only the packaging options that are specifically categorized as suitable for fragile items.
User applies multiple filters to narrow down packaging choices based on size and material type.
Given that the user is on the Sustainable Packaging Selector page, when they select filters for 'small size' and 'biodegradable material', then the system should only show packaging options that meet both criteria.
User accesses educational resources to learn about the benefits of using sustainable packaging.
Given that the user is on the Sustainable Packaging Selector page, when they click on the 'Educational Resources' section, then they should see a list of guides, best practices, and related materials available for download or viewing.
User hovers over an option to read more about a specific sustainable packaging material.
Given that the user is on the Sustainable Packaging Selector page, when they hover their mouse over a specific packaging option, then a tooltip should appear, providing concise information about that material’s sustainability benefits.
User submits their selected packaging choice for approval before procurement.
Given that the user has selected a packaging option, when they click the 'Submit for Approval' button, then the system should confirm submission and provide a notification that the request is sent for approval.
Feedback and Rating System
"As a user, I want to leave a review for the packaging options I’ve used so that I can share my experiences with other businesses and help them make better choices."
Description

The Sustainable Packaging Selector must include a feedback and rating system that allows users to review and rate the eco-friendly packaging options based on their experiences. This system will help other users make informed decisions by providing insights into the performance and reliability of different packaging materials. Ratings and reviews should be visible on the selection page and filtered by relevance and recency.

Acceptance Criteria
User submits a rating and review for an eco-friendly packaging option they have used.
Given the user has used an eco-friendly packaging option, when they navigate to the feedback section and submit a rating between 1 to 5 stars along with a written review, then their feedback should be saved and displayed on the selection page.
Other users view the ratings and reviews for eco-friendly packaging options.
Given multiple users have submitted ratings and reviews for an eco-friendly packaging option, when another user visits the selection page, then they should see an aggregated score, the individual ratings, and the written reviews sorted by relevance and recency.
User filters ratings and reviews based on relevance and recency.
Given a user is on the selection page of eco-friendly packaging options, when they choose to filter the reviews by 'most helpful' or 'most recent', then the displayed reviews should dynamically adjust to reflect that filter selection.
User edits their existing rating and review for a packaging option.
Given a user has previously submitted a rating and review, when they access their previous feedback and choose to edit it, then the system should allow them to modify both the rating and the review text, and the updated feedback should be reflected on the selection page.
User tries to submit an empty review or invalid rating.
Given a user is on the feedback submission page, when they attempt to submit a rating of 0 stars or leave the review text blank, then the system should display an error message indicating that both rating and review text are required before submission.
System displays a user's feedback history for eco-friendly packaging options they have rated.
Given a user has submitted feedback for various eco-friendly packaging options, when they navigate to their user profile or feedback history section, then they should see a comprehensive list of their submitted reviews and ratings associated with each packaging option.
Admin reviews and moderates user feedback and ratings.
Given the admin is logged into the system, when they access the feedback and rating moderation panel, then they should be able to view all user feedback, mark inappropriate reviews, and manage displayed content by either approving or removing specific entries.
Packaging Cost Analysis Tool
"As a financial officer, I want to analyze the costs associated with sustainable packaging options so that I can make budget-conscious decisions while promoting environmental responsibility."
Description

The Sustainable Packaging Selector should feature a cost analysis tool that allows users to evaluate the cost implications of different eco-friendly packaging options against their traditional counterparts. The tool must provide a breakdown of costs, including initial expenditure and long-term savings associated with more sustainable choices. Users should be able to input their specific requirements to get tailored cost comparisons.

Acceptance Criteria
User selects a specific eco-friendly packaging option from the Sustainable Packaging Selector interface to analyze cost implications.
Given a user accesses the Packaging Cost Analysis Tool, when they input details of a specific packing requirement and select an eco-friendly option, then the tool should provide a detailed cost breakdown, including initial costs and long-term savings, clearly displayed.
User wants to compare multiple packaging options to determine the most cost-effective solution.
Given the user has selected multiple eco-friendly packaging options, when they initiate a cost comparison, then the tool must display a side-by-side comparison of all selected options, highlighting the differences in costs and savings over a specified time period.
User needs to understand the overall impact of switching to sustainable packaging on their inventory costs.
Given a user selects traditional and eco-friendly packaging options for the same inventory item, when they complete the comparison, then the summary report should illustrate total cost savings and environmental benefits (e.g., reduced waste or carbon footprint) over a customizable timeframe.
User inputs various quantities of packaging materials to see how bulk purchasing affects cost.
Given a user enters different quantities for eco-friendly packaging materials, when they submit their input, then the tool should calculate and display bulk pricing options, showing cost reductions as quantity increases compared to traditional options.
User needs to evaluate the long-term financial impact of their sustainable packaging choices based on their inventory turnover rates.
Given a user inputs their inventory turnover rate into the tool, when they analyze different sustainable packaging options, then the tool should provide forecasts of long-term costs and savings over a selected number of inventory turnover cycles.
User wants to save and share the cost comparison data with team members.
Given the user has completed a cost analysis, when they choose to save or share the result, then the tool must allow the user to export the analysis as a PDF or share via email, ensuring that the format retains all data clearly, including graphs and charts.

Sustainability Reporting Suite

This suite of reporting tools allows users to generate detailed sustainability reports that measure their eco-friendly initiatives' effectiveness and progress over time. By tracking key metrics and goals, businesses can demonstrate their commitment to sustainability to stakeholders and customers.

Requirements

Automated Data Collection
"As a sustainability manager, I want automated data collection for sustainability metrics so that I can spend less time on manual data entry and more time on analysis and reporting efforts."
Description

This requirement entails the implementation of a system that automatically gathers and consolidates data from various sources related to sustainability metrics, such as energy usage, waste management, and resource consumption. This functionality aims to reduce the manual effort required for data entry and ensures accuracy and completeness. The automated data collection will enhance usability by providing real-time updates on sustainability initiatives, allowing businesses to focus on analysis rather than data gathering. By integrating with existing data sources and ERP systems, this feature supports streamlined reporting processes and enhances decision-making based on up-to-date information.

Acceptance Criteria
Automated data collection from energy usage systems during monthly reporting periods.
Given that the system is integrated with energy usage data sources, when the reporting period ends, then the system should automatically collect and consolidate the latest energy usage data with no manual entry required.
Real-time updates on waste management metrics as data is continuously monitored.
Given that the waste management system is linked to InvenTrack, when new data on waste management is generated, then the system should reflect these updates within 5 minutes.
Integration with existing ERP systems to ensure accurate data collection for sustainability reports.
Given that the ERP system is configured to share data, when the automated data collection module runs, then it should successfully pull all relevant sustainability metrics from the ERP without errors.
User access to automated reports summarizing key sustainability metrics over specified periods.
Given that a user requests a sustainability report for a quarter, when the report is generated, then it should include at least five key metrics related to sustainability such as energy usage, waste reduction, and resource consumption.
Validation of data accuracy after automated data collection process.
Given that data has been automatically collected, when a quality check is performed, then at least 95% of the data entries should be accurate when compared to source data.
User permissions management ensuring only authorized personnel can access sustainability reports.
Given that a user is not authorized, when they attempt to access sustainability reports, then the system should block access and display an authorization error message.
Generation of alerts for any discrepancies found during the data collection process.
Given that the automated data collection has completed, when discrepancies are detected in the collected data, then the system should send an alert notification to designated users within 10 minutes of detection.
Customizable Reporting Templates
"As a compliance officer, I want customizable reporting templates for sustainability reports so that I can present our initiatives in a way that resonates with stakeholders and meets compliance standards."
Description

The requirement focuses on developing a suite of customizable reporting templates for various sustainability metrics that users can tailor to fit their specific business needs and branding. Users will have the ability to modify the layout, fields, and data visualization options of reports, making it easier to align reports with company standards and stakeholder expectations. This enhances flexibility in reporting, drives user satisfaction, and supports effective communication of sustainability progress. Additionally, integrating these templates within the broader platform ensures seamless accessibility and use, promoting consistent reporting practices across the organization.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user, I want to create a customizable reporting template for my company's sustainability metrics to ensure it meets our specific branding and layout needs.
Given that the user is in the report creation page, when they select a customizable template option and modify the layout and fields, then the updated template should reflect the changes made by the user and should be savable for future use.
As a user, I want to generate a sustainability report using the customized template to assess the progress of our eco-friendly initiatives over the past quarter.
Given that the user has created and saved a customizable template, when they input the relevant data for the past quarter, then the generated report should accurately display the data visualizations and metrics according to the template's specifications.
As a sustainability manager, I want to share my customized reports with stakeholders to demonstrate our commitment to sustainability and gather feedback.
Given that the sustainability manager has generated a report using a customizable template, when they select the option to share the report, then the report should be sent to the specified stakeholders via email with the correct permissions to view and comment.
As a user, I want to modify existing predefined reporting templates to better suit our company's specific sustainability goals and metrics.
Given that the user is viewing predefined templates, when they select a template to modify and make changes to its structure and metrics, then the system should allow these modifications while preserving the original template for future use.
As a user, I want to filter the data metrics in my customized report to highlight specific sustainability initiatives that improved during the reporting period.
Given that the user is viewing their customized report, when they apply filters to display only the selected sustainability metrics, then the report should update accordingly to only show the filtered results.
Performance Benchmarking
"As a business owner, I want performance benchmarking for our sustainability metrics so that I can identify how well we are doing compared to industry leaders and set achievable goals."
Description

This requirement involves establishing a benchmarking feature that compares recorded sustainability performance metrics against industry standards and best practices. By identifying gaps and areas for improvement, businesses can align their initiatives with broader sustainability goals. This feature includes functionalities for setting targets, conducting trend analysis, and providing insights into performance relative to competitors. The benchmarking functionality is critical for driving accountability and encouraging ongoing improvements in sustainability practices and will be integrated with data analytics tools to provide actionable insights for strategic planning.

Acceptance Criteria
User initiates the benchmarking process by selecting sustainability metrics from a dropdown menu and inputs their current performance data into the InvenTrack platform.
Given the user has logged into the InvenTrack platform, When they select sustainability metrics and input their current performance data, Then the system should successfully record the data and allow the user to proceed to the benchmarking analysis page.
The user generates a benchmarking report that compares their sustainability metrics to industry standards and best practices over a selected time frame.
Given the user has input their performance data and selected a time frame, When they request the benchmarking report, Then the system should generate a report that displays the comparison against industry standards, including visual representations of the data.
The user sets specific sustainability targets within the platform for future performance evaluations based on benchmarking results.
Given the user is on the target-setting page, When they enter target values and confirm the targets, Then the system should save the targets and display them on the user's dashboard for tracking progress.
User conducts trend analysis based on historical performance data against established benchmarks to identify improvement areas over time.
Given the user has historical data available, When they access the trend analysis feature, Then the system should display a graphical representation of trends over time, highlighting areas for improvement.
The user reviews competitor performance metrics provided by the platform to assess their relative standing in sustainability practices.
Given the user is on the competitor analysis page, When they request competitor performance comparisons, Then the system should display a comparison chart indicating the user’s metrics vs. selected competitors’ metrics.
The user receives automated notifications for any significant gaps identified in their sustainability metrics compared to industry benchmarks.
Given the benchmarking process is complete, When the system detects significant gaps, Then it should automatically notify the user through email and within the platform dashboard.
User accesses data analytics tools integrated within InvenTrack to gain insights from their sustainability performance.
Given the user has selected the data analytics section, When they choose specific metrics to analyze, Then the system should provide actionable insights and recommendations based on the selected data.
Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard
"As a stakeholder, I want an interactive dashboard for sustainability reporting so that I can track the company’s progress and engage with their sustainability efforts more effectively."
Description

The requirement includes creating an interactive dashboard for stakeholders to view real-time data and reports on the company's sustainability performance. This dashboard will be user-friendly and accessible, allowing stakeholders such as customers, investors, and employees to engage with sustainability data visually and interactively. Providing stakeholders with timely updates fosters transparency and builds trust while enabling better-informed decision-making. This feature will align with the overall goals of the platform by integrating communication and feedback mechanisms that enhance stakeholder involvement in sustainability initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria
Stakeholder Interaction with Dashboard
Given that a stakeholder logs into the InvenTrack platform, when they access the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard, then they should see real-time sustainability performance data, including key metrics and current progress towards sustainability goals.
Dashboard Data Refresh Rate
Given that the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard is accessed, when data is displayed, then it should refresh every 5 minutes to show the most current information available without requiring manual refresh from the user.
Filter and Sort Functionality
Given that a stakeholder is using the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard, when they apply filters to the data (e.g., by date range, sustainability initiative, or performance metric), then the dashboard should update to reflect only the relevant data according to the selected filters.
User-Friendly Navigation
Given that a new stakeholder is using the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard for the first time, when they navigate through the dashboard, then they should be able to locate essential features and reports with no more than 3 clicks.
Exportable Reports
Given that a stakeholder views a report in the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard, when they choose to export the report, then the system should allow them to download the report in both PDF and CSV formats.
Feedback Mechanism Integration
Given that a stakeholder has interacted with the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard, when they submit feedback about their experience, then the feedback should be recorded in the system and acknowledged with a confirmation message.
Responsive Design on Mobile Devices
Given that a stakeholder accesses the Stakeholder Engagement Dashboard from a mobile device, when they view the dashboard, then it should adapt responsively, ensuring all elements are accessible and legible without requiring horizontal scrolling.
Regulatory Compliance Alerts
"As a regulatory affairs manager, I want to receive alerts on regulatory compliance changes so that I can ensure our sustainability practices remain compliant with the latest regulations."
Description

This requirement centers around implementing a notification system that alerts users of any upcoming changes in sustainability regulations and compliance requirements relevant to their industry. By staying informed of regulatory changes, organizations can adjust their sustainability practices and reporting accordingly, minimizing the risk of non-compliance. This feature will include customizable notifications based on user-defined parameters, such as specific industries or compliance frameworks. Configuring these alerts enhances the platform's value proposition by ensuring users remain aligned with evolving legal obligations associated with sustainability.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user of InvenTrack, I want to receive timely alerts about upcoming changes in sustainability regulations so that I can take appropriate actions to ensure compliance before the deadlines.
Given that there are upcoming sustainability regulation changes, when the user configures their notification settings, then they should receive alerts via email and in-app notifications at least two weeks prior to the regulation change.
As a compliance officer at a small manufacturing firm, I need the ability to customize my notifications based on specific industry standards so that I can focus on relevant changes that affect my business operations.
Given that the user is accessing the notification configuration page, when they set their industry and compliance framework preferences, then they should see alerts only tailored to those specifications.
As a sustainability manager using InvenTrack, I require assurance that alerts regarding compliance changes are reliable and actionable to help mitigate risks associated with non-compliance.
Given that the user sets up notifications for compliance alerts, when a regulatory change occurs, then the user should receive an alert created within 24 hours of the new regulation being published.
As an administrator of InvenTrack, I want to analyze the effectiveness of the notification system to ensure it meets the users' needs for compliance information.
Given that the user has been receiving compliance alerts for a quarter, when the administrator reviews the user feedback and alerts log, then at least 80% of users should report satisfaction with the timeliness and relevance of the notifications they received.
As a user at InvenTrack, I want to be informed of compliance updates across multiple locations, so I can manage sustainability practices efficiently across all branches.
Given that multiple location settings exist in InvenTrack, when compliance alerts are configured through the organization’s admin panel, then all designated users at each location should receive the relevant alerts simultaneously.
As a user who has defined parameters for alerts, I want to ensure that I can modify these settings easily if my business focus changes, guaranteeing that my compliance information stays relevant.
Given that the user is on the notification settings page, when they update their compliance parameters, then they should receive confirmation of changes and immediate updates for compliant regulations from that point onward.
Integrative API Access
"As a technical lead, I want API access for the Sustainability Reporting Suite so that I can integrate our sustainability metrics with other systems and streamline our reporting processes."
Description

This requirement focuses on providing API access that allows organizations to integrate the Sustainability Reporting Suite with other software and systems they use for operational efficiency. The API will facilitate data exchange between the sustainability platform and external applications, enabling users to automate processes and synchronize data across platforms. This feature is vital for organizations looking to enhance their sustainability strategies by leveraging data from other business functions and streamlining their environmental reporting efforts. Proper documentation and support for integration will be provided to ensure a smooth user experience.

Acceptance Criteria
API Integration for Data Synchronization with External Systems
Given a configuration with valid API keys, When the user initiates a data exchange request, Then the system should successfully synchronize sustainability data with the specified external application and confirm the transaction with a success message.
Automated Report Generation through API Calls
Given that the user has set parameters for a sustainability report, When the API call for report generation is made, Then the system should generate the report within the specified timeframe and return it in the requested format (e.g., PDF, CSV).
Error Handling during API Requests
Given a scenario where incorrect API keys are provided, When the user attempts to access the API, Then the system should return an appropriate error message indicating the failure and suggest corrective actions.
Documentation Availability for API Users
Given that the user accesses the API documentation, When they navigate through the provided resources, Then they should find comprehensive guides, examples, and troubleshooting information that facilitate integration efforts.
Multi-User Access and Permissions for API Integration
Given multiple users within an organization, When users attempt to utilize the API, Then the system should enforce role-based access control, allowing only authorized users to perform specific actions based on their permissions.
Performance Testing of API Endpoints
Given a stress test scenario simulating multiple concurrent API requests, When the test is conducted, Then the API should handle the load without significant performance degradation, ensuring response times are within acceptable limits.
Real-time Monitoring of API Usage and Metrics
Given that the user has access to the monitoring dashboard, When they navigate to the API usage section, Then they should see real-time statistics on API call volumes, error rates, and response times to analyze performance effectively.

Lifecycle Assessment Insights

Offering a comprehensive analysis of the environmental impact of products throughout their lifecycle, this feature helps users make informed decisions about inventory management by considering factors such as production, transportation, and disposal. It aligns inventory practices with sustainable principles.

Requirements

Environmental Impact Dashboard
"As an inventory manager, I want to access a comprehensive environmental impact dashboard so that I can evaluate the sustainability of our products and make more eco-friendly inventory decisions."
Description

This requirement encompasses the development of an intuitive dashboard that presents a consolidated view of the environmental impacts of products across their lifecycle. The dashboard will integrate real-time data from the inventory management system, allowing users to visualize metrics such as carbon footprint, energy consumption, and waste generation associated with each product. By streamlining this information, users can make informed decisions about product sourcing and inventory management while aligning their practices with sustainability goals. This dashboard is not only crucial for enhancing user experience but also for supporting businesses in enhancing their social responsibility initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Environmental Impact Dashboard to view the carbon footprint of their products before making an inventory restock decision.
Given the user is logged in and has navigated to the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they select a product, then the dashboard displays the carbon footprint in metric tons alongside a visual representation of historical data for that product.
The user wishes to monitor energy consumption trends over the past month for certain products within the Environmental Impact Dashboard.
Given the user is on the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they filter products by the last month and select 'Energy Consumption,' then the dashboard should show a line graph indicating energy usage for each selected product over the specified timeframe.
A user requires insights on waste generation trends for their products to inform future sourcing decisions.
Given the user views the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they click on 'Waste Generation' for a specific product category, then the dashboard displays the total waste generated, alongside metrics comparing each product's waste against category averages.
The user needs to print a report of the environmental impacts for a specific product line for a meeting with stakeholders.
Given the user has accessed the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they choose a product line and click on 'Print Report,' then the system generates a PDF report summarizing all environmental impact metrics for that product line, which is downloadable and print-ready.
A user wants to receive an alert when any product’s environmental impact exceeds defined thresholds for sustainability.
Given the user has set specific threshold values for environmental impacts, when any product exceeds these thresholds, then the dashboard should send an automatic notification to the user via email.
The user needs to compare the lifecycle impacts of two similar products directly on the Environmental Impact Dashboard.
Given the user is on the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they select two products to compare, then the dashboard displays a side-by-side comparison of their environmental impact metrics, including carbon footprint, energy consumption, and waste generation.
Users want to provide feedback on the accuracy of the environmental impact data presented in the dashboard.
Given the user is viewing the Environmental Impact Dashboard, when they click on 'Provide Feedback,' then a feedback form should appear allowing them to submit comments regarding data accuracy, and upon submission, a thank-you message should be shown confirming the receipt of their feedback.
Product Lifecycle Analysis Tool
"As a sustainability officer, I want to use a product lifecycle analysis tool so that I can assess the environmental impact of our inventory and improve our sustainability practices."
Description

This requirement focuses on creating a tool that allows users to conduct detailed lifecycle assessments of their products, examining every stage from production to disposal. The tool will provide insights into each phase's environmental implications, guiding users towards sustainable practices. Users will benefit from enhanced decision-making capabilities, utilizing data-driven insights to optimize their inventory strategies. Additionally, this tool will support compliance with sustainability regulations and align with corporate social responsibility practices, ultimately reducing environmental impact and enhancing brand reputation.

Acceptance Criteria
User conducts a lifecycle assessment for a new product before its launch.
Given a user has selected a new product, When they initiate the lifecycle assessment, Then the tool should display a comprehensive report detailing environmental impacts at each phase (production, transportation, use, and disposal).
User updates the lifecycle assessment for an existing product after changes have been made.
Given a user has made changes to an existing product, When they update the lifecycle assessment, Then the tool should reflect the updated information and generate a revised environmental impact report.
User generates a report for regulatory compliance based on the lifecycle assessment.
Given a user has completed a lifecycle assessment, When they select the option to generate a compliance report, Then the tool should produce a report that meets local sustainability regulation standards.
User compares the environmental impacts of multiple products within the tool.
Given a user has selected multiple products, When they initiate a comparison, Then the tool should provide a visual representation of the environmental impacts side by side for easy analysis.
User accesses help documentation or tutorials on using the product lifecycle analysis tool.
Given a user needs assistance, When they click on the help icon, Then the tool should direct them to comprehensive documentation and tutorial resources.
User sets up automated alerts for needed updates to lifecycle assessments.
Given a user has identified key products for regular review, When they configure alerts, Then the tool should send notifications for scheduled updates based on predetermined intervals.
Automated Reorder Sustainability Alerts
"As a supply chain manager, I want to receive automated reorder sustainability alerts so that I can optimize inventory levels and minimize waste while maintaining product availability."
Description

This requirement introduces an automated alert system that notifies users when product inventory reaches levels that may result in excess inventory or stockouts, specifically considering the sustainability metrics of each product. For instance, if a product's environmental impact is particularly high during transportation, users will be alerted to adjust reorder quantities accordingly. This feature enhances efficiency and helps users maintain a sustainable inventory level while preventing unnecessary waste. It also aligns inventory management with environmentally friendly practices, reinforcing the product's commitment to sustainability.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a timely alert when the inventory level of a product with high environmental impact reaches the predefined threshold.
Given the product's inventory level is set at a specific threshold, When the inventory drops to the threshold, Then the user should receive an automated alert detailing the product and its sustainability impact.
Users can specify different environmental impact metrics for each product in the inventory system.
Given the lifecycle assessment insights are integrated into the product management system, When a user inputs sustainability metrics for a product, Then the system should save and display these metrics accurately in the product details.
Users can view detailed reports on how reorder alerts influence sustainability metrics over time.
Given the reorder alerts have been active for a specific duration, When the user generates a sustainability report, Then the report should include data on product inventory levels, reorder quantities, and environmental impact before and after alert implementation.
When a reorder alert is triggered, users should have the option to adjust the reorder quantity based on sustainability parameters.
Given a reorder alert has been received for a product, When the user accesses the reorder interface, Then the user should be able to modify the reorder quantity with respect to sustainability recommendations provided by the system.
The system provides users with recommendations on sustainable reorder quantities based on historical usage and environmental impact.
Given the historical usage data and sustainability metrics of a product, When a reorder alert is triggered, Then the system should recommend an appropriate reorder quantity that aligns with sustainability practices.
Users are notified of potential stockouts for products identified as high sustainability impact.
Given the inventory of a high sustainability impact product falls below the defined safety level, When the inventory level is checked, Then an alert should be sent to users indicating potential stockout risk.
Users can customize sustainability thresholds for different product categories.
Given the user is managing multiple product categories, When the user sets sustainability thresholds for each category, Then the thresholds should be saved and applied to future reorder alerts for those specific products.
Integrative Data Sources for Sustainability Metrics
"As an operations analyst, I want to integrate data sources for sustainability metrics so that I can have a complete view of our products' environmental impact and improve our inventory strategies accordingly."
Description

This requirement entails integrating external data sources that provide valuable sustainability metrics, such as carbon emissions data, material sourcing transparency, and end-of-life disposal options. By connecting InvenTrack with these external data sources, users will have access to comprehensive insights that span beyond internal inventory data. This integration will enhance the situational awareness of users, allowing them to make well-informed choices that align with sustainability goals while managing their inventory effectively. It's pivotal in creating a more holistic approach to inventory management within the sustainability framework.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to view sustainability insights related to inventory items within the InvenTrack dashboard, comparing various metrics across different suppliers.
Given the user is logged in to the InvenTrack dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Sustainability Insights' section, then they should see a list of inventory items along with their respective sustainability metrics including carbon emissions, material sourcing information, and disposal options.
An administrator integrates an external sustainability data source into the InvenTrack system for real-time updates on carbon emissions associated with inventory items.
Given an administrator has the credentials for both InvenTrack and the external sustainability data source, when they input the necessary API keys and successfully save the integration settings, then the system should fetch and display the most recent carbon emissions data for all relevant inventory items.
A user wants to receive automatically generated reports that summarize the sustainability metrics and actions related to their inventory over the past month.
Given the user has selected the option to receive monthly sustainability reports, when the report is generated, then it should include metrics such as total carbon footprint, percentage of eco-friendly materials used, and recommendations for improvement based on last month's data.
A manager examines the lifecycle assessment of a specific product to make decisions about its sourcing based on environmental impact.
Given the manager has accessed the high-level product overview within InvenTrack, when they select a specific product, then the detailed lifecycle assessment should show metrics for production, transportation emissions, and end-of-life disposal options, with clear visual graphs for easier understanding.
Users adjust their inventory reorder levels based on updated sustainability data provided by integrated sources.
Given users are reviewing current inventory levels, when they apply new sustainability data indicating higher environmental costs for certain suppliers, then the system should recommend updated reorder levels for those items reflecting the new sustainability priorities.
User Training for Sustainability Features
"As a team leader, I want to provide my staff with training on sustainability features so that they can effectively utilize these tools for improved inventory management and foster a culture of sustainability within the team."
Description

This requirement focuses on developing a training module specifically aimed at educating users about the new sustainability features within InvenTrack. The training will cover how to use the environmental impact dashboard, lifecycle analysis tool, and automated alert systems effectively. Through practical sessions and resources, users will be empowered to make better inventory decisions with a sustainability focus. Enhancing user knowledge and comfort with these systems fosters a culture of sustainable practices within the organization and maximizes the benefits derived from the product.

Acceptance Criteria
User Registration for Training Module
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the training section and click on the 'Sustainability Features' training module, then they should be able to register for the training session successfully and receive a confirmation email.
Accessing the Environmental Impact Dashboard
Given a user has completed the training session, when they log into InvenTrack and navigate to the sustainability dashboard, then they should be able to view the environmental impact dashboard without errors.
Utilizing the Lifecycle Analysis Tool
Given a user is on the sustainability dashboard, when they select the 'Lifecycle Analysis Tool' and input product data, then the tool should generate a lifecycle impact report based on the provided data.
Receiving Automated Alert Notifications
Given a user has set up product parameters in the sustainability feature, when the inventory reaches the threshold for sustainability alerts, then the user should receive an automated notification via email and in-app messaging.
Feedback Collection Post-Training
Given that the training module on sustainability features has been completed, when users submit their feedback through the provided form, then at least 80% of the feedback should indicate that users feel empowered to utilize sustainability features effectively.
Integration with Existing ERP Systems
Given that the user has completed the training, when they attempt to integrate the sustainability features with their existing ERP system, then the integration should occur without any errors and data should sync correctly within 5 minutes.
Sustainability Reporting and Analytics
"As a compliance manager, I want to generate sustainability reports so that I can track our performance and ensure we meet environmental regulations and commitments."
Description

This requirement entails the development of a reporting and analytics feature that generates comprehensive reports on sustainability-related metrics of the inventory. Users can customize reports to track progress towards their sustainability goals, analyze trends, and identify areas for improvement. This feature will aid in maintaining regulatory compliance and can be used in marketing efforts to highlight corporate social responsibility initiatives. By providing actionable insights, it empowers businesses to enhance their sustainability efforts and improve customer transparency regarding product impact.

Acceptance Criteria
Reporting on Sustainability Metrics for Inventory Management
Given the user has access to the Sustainability Reporting feature, when they select specific sustainability metrics (e.g., carbon footprint, water usage) and generate a report, then the system must produce a comprehensive report that includes the selected metrics, visual graphs, and trends over the designated time period.
Customizing Sustainability Reports
Given the user is on the report generation page, when they choose to customize the report parameters (date range, product categories, etc.), then the system should allow the selection of various parameters and display a preview of the report reflecting those selections before final generation.
Tracking Progress Towards Sustainability Goals
Given the user has set sustainability goals within the InvenTrack platform, when they generate a sustainability report, then the report must include a section that clearly illustrates progress towards these goals, including percentage achieved and recommendations for improvement.
Compliance with Regulatory Standards
Given the user needs to ensure compliance with sustainability regulations, when running a sustainability report, then the report must include references to relevant regulatory standards and ensure that all reported metrics meet these standards for transparency.
Integration of Sustainability Insights in Marketing Efforts
Given the user is preparing marketing materials, when they access the sustainability report, then the system should highlight key insights that can be utilized for marketing purposes, and allow easy export of this information into various formats (PDF, Excel).
Comparative Analysis of Sustainability Trends
Given the user wants to analyze sustainability trends over multiple reporting periods, when they generate a comparative report, then the system must provide insights comparing past reports to current metrics, highlighting improvements or declines in sustainability performance.

Supplier Sustainability Ratings

This feature evaluates and rates suppliers based on their sustainability practices, including ethical sourcing, waste management, and carbon reduction efforts. Users can make informed decisions about who to partner with, fostering a supply chain that prioritizes environmental responsibility.

Requirements

Supplier Evaluation Dashboard
"As a procurement manager, I want to view sustainability ratings of all my suppliers on a single dashboard so that I can easily compare them and make informed sourcing decisions that align with our company's eco-friendly goals."
Description

Develop a comprehensive Supplier Evaluation Dashboard that allows users to visualize the sustainability ratings of their suppliers. This dashboard will aggregate data from various sustainability metrics such as ethical sourcing, waste management, and carbon reduction, providing a holistic view of a supplier's practices. It will enable users to compare multiple suppliers at a glance, making it easier to make informed decisions. The dashboard should be user-friendly and allow filtering and sorting based on specific parameters to enhance usability. This feature is crucial for users aiming to partner with environmentally responsible suppliers, thereby fostering sustainable supply chains.

Acceptance Criteria
View Sustainability Ratings of Suppliers in the Dashboard
Given the user is on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user selects a supplier from the list, Then the dashboard displays the selected supplier's sustainability ratings including ethical sourcing, waste management, and carbon reduction efforts.
Filter Suppliers by Sustainability Metrics
Given the user is on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user applies a filter based on sustainability metrics, Then only suppliers meeting the filter criteria are displayed on the dashboard.
Sort Suppliers by Overall Sustainability Rating
Given the user is on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user selects the sort option for overall sustainability rating, Then the suppliers are displayed in descending order based on their ratings.
Compare Multiple Suppliers Side-by-Side
Given the user has selected multiple suppliers on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user clicks the 'Compare' button, Then a comparison chart displaying key sustainability metrics for each selected supplier is shown.
Visualize Sustainability Data with Graphs
Given the user is on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user selects the option to view sustainability data as graphs, Then the dashboard presents visual representations of the sustainability metrics for easy analysis.
Save Users' Filter and Sort Preferences
Given the user has applied filters and sorting preferences on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user navigates away and returns, Then the saved preferences are still applied to the dashboard.
Export Supplier Sustainability Ratings
Given the user is on the Supplier Evaluation Dashboard, When the user selects the 'Export' option, Then a file containing the sustainability ratings of the visible suppliers is generated and can be downloaded.
Automated Sustainability Alerts
"As a supply chain manager, I want to receive automated alerts whenever a supplier's sustainability rating changes so that I can quickly respond and adjust our sourcing strategy accordingly."
Description

Implement an Automated Sustainability Alerts system that notifies users about significant changes to their suppliers’ sustainability ratings. These notifications will help users stay informed about improvements or declines in suppliers’ sustainability practices and allow for timely evaluations of supplier partnerships. The alerts should be customizable; users can opt to receive daily, weekly, or real-time updates. This feature is vital to ensure that companies are continuously engaging with suppliers who meet their sustainability standards, thereby minimizing risks associated with non-compliant suppliers.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a daily sustainability alert for a supplier whose rating has changed.
Given a user has subscribed to daily alerts, when a supplier's sustainability rating changes, then the user receives an email notification detailing the change within 24 hours.
User customizes alert preferences for real-time notifications.
Given a user has access to their notification settings, when they select real-time alerts for sustainability rating changes, then changes to suppliers’ ratings trigger immediate notifications to the user via their chosen communication method.
User receives a weekly summary of sustainability ratings for all suppliers.
Given a user opts for weekly alerts, when a week passes, then the user receives a summary email listing all suppliers whose sustainability ratings have changed, including the previous and current ratings.
User tests the alert system with a simulated supplier rating change.
Given a user is testing the alert function, when a supplier's sustainability rating is changed in the test environment, then the user receives an alert notification that mimics a real-world change in a timely manner.
User opts out of sustainability alert notifications.
Given a user wants to stop receiving alerts, when they update their notification preferences to 'opt-out', then no further alerts are sent to the user for any supplier sustainability rating changes.
Admin accesses a log of sent sustainability alerts to users.
Given an admin wants to review notification history, when they access the alert log, then they can see a complete record of all alerts sent, including timestamps and user details, for the past month.
User receives an error notification when there is a failure in the alert system.
Given the alert system encounters an error while processing a supplier rating change, when the error occurs, then the system generates an alert to designated support staff, and the affected user receives a notification explaining the issue.
Sustainability Performance Reporting
"As a compliance officer, I want to generate detailed reports on supplier sustainability over time so that I can assess our suppliers’ performance and ensure adherence to our sustainability standards."
Description

Create a Sustainability Performance Reporting feature that provides detailed reports on suppliers' sustainability practices over time. Users can generate reports that highlight performance trends, benchmarking against industry standards, and identify areas for improvement. This functionality will support businesses in their sustainability initiatives and compliance with regulations. Furthermore, it will enhance decision-making by providing data-driven insights into supplier performance, thereby enabling users to select the most compliant and responsible suppliers effectively.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates a sustainability performance report for a selected supplier over a defined time period.
Given the user selects a supplier and specifies a date range, when the user clicks on 'Generate Report', then a detailed sustainability performance report should be displayed showing the supplier's practices over the given time period.
User compares the sustainability ratings of multiple suppliers to make an informed decision.
Given the user selects multiple suppliers, when the user clicks on 'Compare Ratings', then a side-by-side comparison of sustainability ratings should be displayed, including specific metrics for each supplier and their benchmarking against industry standards.
User views historical performance trends of a supplier's sustainability practices.
Given the user selects a supplier and views the 'Historical Trends' section, when the user views the data, then the system should display visual graphs that indicate sustainability performance changes over time, identifying any significant improvements or declines.
User identifies areas of improvement based on the sustainability report.
Given the user reviews the sustainability performance report, when the user navigates to the 'Areas for Improvement' section, then the system should highlight specific metrics that indicate the supplier's weaknesses along with suggestions for improvement.
User exports the sustainability performance report for regulatory compliance documentation.
Given the user has generated a sustainability performance report, when the user clicks on 'Export to PDF', then a downloadable PDF file of the report should be created, containing all relevant details and metrics in a standardized format.
User schedules regular sustainability performance report generation.
Given the user is in the report generation section, when the user sets a schedule for report generation (e.g., weekly, monthly), then the system should save the schedule and automatically generate and email the report to the user at the specified intervals.
User receives notifications for significant changes in supplier sustainability ratings.
Given the user has subscribed to alerts for supplier sustainability ratings, when the supplier's rating changes significantly, then the user should receive a notification via email and within the application detailing the changes.
Supplier Sustainability Library
"As a procurement officer, I want access to a library of resources on supplier sustainability so that I can educate myself and my team on best practices and strategies for responsible sourcing."
Description

Develop a Supplier Sustainability Library that contains educational resources, case studies, and best practices related to sustainable supply chain management. This library will serve as a knowledge base for users, offering insights into effective sustainability practices and how to implement them within their own supply chains. Providing such resources will empower users with the knowledge needed to engage with suppliers effectively and drive sustainability initiatives within their organizations.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user of InvenTrack, I want to access the Supplier Sustainability Library so that I can learn about sustainable supply chain practices.
Given that I am logged into InvenTrack, when I navigate to the Supplier Sustainability Library, then I should see a collection of educational resources, case studies, and best practices related to sustainability.
As a user, I want to search for specific topics within the Supplier Sustainability Library so that I can quickly find relevant information.
Given that I am on the Supplier Sustainability Library page, when I enter a keyword in the search bar and hit enter, then I should see a list of resources that match the keyword entered.
As a user, I want to view detailed information about each resource in the Supplier Sustainability Library so that I can understand the content better before using it.
Given that I am browsing the resources in the Supplier Sustainability Library, when I click on a resource title, then I should be redirected to a detailed page that provides an overview, author information, and links to download or view the content.
As a user interested in sustainability, I want to share resources from the Supplier Sustainability Library with my team so that we can discuss best practices.
Given that I am on a resource detail page, when I click the share button and input my team members' email addresses, then they should receive an email with a link to the resource.
As a user, I want to provide feedback on the resources in the Supplier Sustainability Library so that they can be improved over time.
Given that I am on a resource detail page, when I submit feedback through the provided feedback form, then my feedback should be recorded and visible to the admin team for review.
As a user of InvenTrack, I want to monitor the updates to the Supplier Sustainability Library so that I stay informed about new resources.
Given that I am a subscribed user, when new resources are added to the Supplier Sustainability Library, then I should receive an email notification informing me of the updates.
Supplier Engagement Tools
"As a sustainability officer, I want to engage directly with suppliers on their sustainability initiatives so that we can collaborate and align on our shared environmental goals."
Description

Integrate Supplier Engagement Tools that facilitate communication and collaboration between buyers and suppliers regarding sustainability initiatives. This feature will allow suppliers to share their sustainability practices and goals directly with users, fostering transparency and engagement. Such tools could include questionnaires, feedback mechanisms, and project collaboration spaces. Enhancing communication will enable both parties to work together toward improved sustainability outcomes, reinforcing supplier relationships and commitment to sustainability.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier shares sustainability practices through a dedicated portal during a quarterly review meeting with buyers, leading to transparent discussions on their ethical sourcing and waste management efforts.
Given that a supplier has access to the Supplier Engagement Tools, when they complete the sustainability questionnaire and submit feedback through the portal, then the buyer should receive a notification and have access to the updated data within 24 hours.
Buyers and suppliers use the project collaboration space to work on a sustainability initiative, effectively communicating issues and sharing updates.
Given that both the buyer and supplier are logged into the collaboration space, when they post an update or comment on the sustainability initiative, then all participants should receive real-time notifications of the activity.
A supplier completes a sustainability assessment questionnaire to provide detailed information about their carbon reduction efforts and waste management practices.
Given that the assessment questionnaire is deployed to suppliers, when the supplier submits their sustainability assessment, then the performance rating should automatically reflect their submission within the ratings dashboard, updating within 12 hours.
Buyers evaluate suppliers based on sustainability ratings to select partners for a new project focused on reducing environmental impact.
Given that the Supplier Sustainability Ratings have been established, when buyers access the ratings dashboard, then they should be able to filter and sort suppliers based on specific sustainability criteria such as carbon footprint and waste reduction efforts.
During contract negotiations, suppliers are able to present documented proof of their sustainability practices to buyers via the Supplier Engagement Tools.
Given that the supplier provides supporting documents through the engagement tools, when the buyer reviews the submitted documentation, then they should have the option to approve or request further information on each sustainability claim within the tool.
Buyers provide feedback on supplier performance regarding sustainability initiatives after project completion.
Given that the project is marked complete in the collaboration space, when buyers submit their feedback on the supplier's sustainability performance, then the feedback should be recorded, visible to both parties, and the supplier's rating updated within 48 hours.
Sustainability Certification Integration
"As a sourcing manager, I want to see third-party sustainability certifications for my suppliers so that I can prioritize working with certified partners who meet high sustainability standards."
Description

Implement a feature that allows for the integration of third-party sustainability certifications for suppliers directly into the Supplier Sustainability Ratings. This functionality will enable users to easily identify suppliers who have been recognized for their exemplary sustainability practices per established criteria. By displaying these certifications, users can make more informed decisions and prioritize partnerships with certified suppliers, ultimately supporting a sustainable supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration of third-party sustainability certifications into the Supplier Sustainability Ratings feature.
Given that a user views a supplier's profile, when the supplier has third-party sustainability certifications, then the certifications should be clearly displayed in the supplier's profile section with the relevant certification logos and details.
User interaction with sustainability certifications when making supplier selections.
Given that a user is selecting suppliers for a project, when they filter suppliers by sustainability ratings, then the software must show only those suppliers with valid sustainability certifications integrated into the system.
Updating supplier sustainability certifications within the platform.
Given that a supplier receives a new sustainability certification, when an administrator updates the supplier's profile with the new certification, then the system should automatically reflect this update in all relevant supplier listings and ensure the details are accurate and visible to users.
User notification regarding certification updates.
Given that a supplier's sustainability certification is updated, when this change occurs, then all users who have favorited that supplier should receive a notification alerting them of the updated certification.
Verification of third-party certification validity.
Given that a third-party sustainability certification has been integrated, when a user views the certification, then the system should display a verification status indicating whether the certification is current and valid, sourced directly from the certifying body.
Reporting on supplier sustainability certifications for audits.
Given that a user generates a report on supplier sustainability, when the report is created, then it should include a section detailing the sustainability certifications of all suppliers, including certification type and expiration dates, in a downloadable format.

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

This feature sends automated alerts when stock levels approach the predetermined reorder point, based on analysis of real-time sales data and historical trends. By ensuring the user is promptly informed, it helps businesses maintain optimal inventory levels and ensure seamless operations without unexpected stockouts.

Requirements

Automated Reorder Calculation
"As an inventory manager, I want the system to automatically calculate reorder points based on real-time sales data so that I can maintain optimal inventory levels without manual intervention."
Description

The Automated Reorder Calculation requirement entails developing an algorithm that continuously analyzes sales data, historical inventory levels, and market trends to dynamically adjust reorder points for each product. This feature will not only ensure optimal stock levels are maintained, but also adapt to seasonal changes in demand and unforeseen sales spikes. By integrating this intelligent logic, businesses will benefit from reduced manual oversight, minimized stockouts, and better alignment with actual consumer demand, maintaining operational efficiency and improving overall inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
Automated Reorder Calculation for Seasonal Demand Adjustment
Given the system has historical sales data for all products, when the system analyzes the sales data during a seasonal period, then the reorder points should dynamically adjust to reflect a 20% increase in anticipated demand compared to the previous season.
Real-time Inventory Level Monitoring
Given the user accesses the inventory dashboard, when the inventory level of any product falls below its calculated reorder point, then the system should trigger an automated alert to notify the user about the need to reorder that product.
Integration with Existing ERP Systems
Given the user has configured their ERP integration settings, when the Automated Reorder Calculation algorithm adjusts the reorder points, then the updates should reflect in the connected ERP system within 5 minutes.
Historical Data Analysis for Predictive Trends
Given that the system is fed historical sales data for the past 12 months, when the algorithm runs its analysis, then it must accurately predict a minimum of 80% of the reorder points for the subsequent month based on sales trends.
User Interface Notification for Reorder Alerts
Given the user has set up their preferences for reorder alerts in the settings, when the system triggers an automated reorder notification, then the alert must appear on the user's dashboard and send an email to the user's registered email address.
Testing for Unforeseen Sales Spikes
Given the system has recorded a sales spike of over 150% for a product in a given week, when the Automated Reorder Calculation algorithm is executed, then the reorder point for that product should be adjusted upward by at least 30% to maintain stock levels.
Multi-Location Support
"As a regional manager, I want to track inventory levels and reorder points for multiple locations in one dashboard so that I can optimize inventory distribution and prevent stock shortages."
Description

The Multi-Location Support requirement involves enabling users to manage inventory across various locations seamlessly within the InvenTrack platform. This feature will allow users to set distinct reorder points, track stock levels, and receive alerts tailored to each location. The integration will facilitate effective inventory control for businesses operating across multiple sites, ensuring that stock is allocated efficiently and reducing the risk of stockouts in any location. By offering a centralized view of inventory across all locations, the platform will enhance decision-making and operational agility in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to set distinct reorder points for each of their multiple inventory locations within the InvenTrack platform after logging in.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Multi-Location Support settings and input distinct reorder points for each location, then the system should successfully save these settings and display a confirmation message.
Inventory manager needs to track stock levels across multiple locations in real-time to avoid stockouts.
Given the user is monitoring stock levels, when they select a location, then the system should display the current stock levels for that specific location, updated in real-time based on sales data.
User receives alerts when inventory levels reach the predefined reorder point for a specific location.
Given the user has set reorder points for a location, when stock levels drop to or below this point, then the system should automatically send an alert notification to the user regarding low inventory at that location.
User wants to view consolidated inventory data across all locations to make informed decisions.
Given the user accesses the Multi-Location Support dashboard, when they view inventory data, then the system should present a unified view of stock levels, reorder points, and alert statuses for all locations.
Multiple users from different locations need to access and update inventory data simultaneously within InvenTrack.
Given multiple users are logged into InvenTrack from different locations, when they attempt to update stock levels, then the system should allow concurrent updates while ensuring data integrity and synchronization in real-time across all users.
User wishes to generate reports on inventory performance across various locations for review periods.
Given the user selects the reporting function, when they generate a report for a specified time frame, then the system should provide a detailed inventory performance report for each location, including stock movement and reorder alerts.
Customizable Alert Settings
"As a business owner, I want to customize how and when I receive reorder alerts so that I only get notifications that are relevant to my immediate needs."
Description

The Customizable Alert Settings requirement allows users to tailor the notification parameters for reorder alerts according to their preferences. This feature will enable users to choose the method of notification (email, SMS, app notification), set thresholds for alerts based on product categories or individual items, and determine the frequency of alerts. This customization will provide users with a sense of control and flexibility, ensuring that they are informed promptly while avoiding notification fatigue. Ultimately, this feature aims to enhance user experience and improve response times to reorder alerts, maintaining optimal stock levels.

Acceptance Criteria
User Configures Alert Settings for a Specific Product Category
Given a user has access to the Customizable Alert Settings, when they set up alert notifications for a specific product category, then alerts should be sent according to their selected method (email, SMS, app notification) when stock levels reach the defined threshold.
User Receives Alerts for Different Notification Methods
Given a user has configured alerts using multiple notification methods, when the stock for an item reaches the reorder point, then the user should receive notifications via all selected methods simultaneously without delay.
User Adjusts the Frequency of Alerts
Given a user has set the frequency of reorder alerts, when the stock for a product approaches the reorder level, then alerts should be sent out according to the user-defined frequency (e.g., daily, weekly), not more often than specified.
User Receives Alert for Individual Item Thresholds
Given a user has set individual item thresholds for alerts, when the inventory level for that item approaches the specified threshold, then the user should receive an alert specific to that item regardless of other inventory items.
User Modifies Alert Preferences Post-Setup
Given a user has initially configured their alert settings, when they modify these alert preferences at a later time, then the system should update the notification settings and apply the new preferences immediately, confirming the changes to the user.
User Tests Alert Functionality
Given a user wants to test their alert settings, when they trigger a manual stock level change for a configured item, then the system should send a notification to the user through their selected method to confirm alert functionality works as intended.
Integration with Analytics Tools
"As a data analyst, I want to integrate InvenTrack with my existing analytics tools so that I can derive deeper insights to inform our inventory management strategies."
Description

The Integration with Analytics Tools requirement involves the development of APIs and functionalities that allow seamless integration with third-party analytics platforms. This will enable users to analyze inventory trends, forecast demand, and assess the effectiveness of their reorder strategy over time. By leveraging advanced data analytics, users can make informed decisions regarding inventory purchases and sales strategies, ultimately contributing to better cash flow management and inventory optimization. This integration aligns with InvenTrack's capability to empower SMBs with data-driven insights.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration with third-party analytics platforms to enable seamless data exchange for real-time inventory trend analysis.
Given a valid API key, when the data from the analytics tool is pulled, then all inventory transactions within the last 30 days must be accurately reflected in the analytics platform.
User accesses the integration dashboard to connect to an analytics tool of their choice.
Given the user has selected an analytics tool, when they provide the necessary credentials and click 'Connect', then the integration must successfully establish a connection without errors.
Creation of historical reports that utilize data from the integrated analytics tool to assess reorder strategy effectiveness.
Given the integration is successful, when the user requests a report for the last quarter, then the report must display all relevant inventory data and reorder effectiveness metrics without discrepancies.
User receives notifications on inventory trends based on data analyzed by the connected analytics tools.
Given the analytics tool is integrated and analyzes the inventory data, when the stock level drops below the threshold, then the user must receive an alert via email and in-app notification.
User utilizes the insights gained from analytics tools to adjust reorder points in InvenTrack accordingly.
Given the user has accessed the analytics tool’s recommendations, when they adjust the reorder points based on this data, then the changes must be reflected in the InvenTrack system in real-time.
The API provides robust error handling to ensure seamless data integration with analytics tools.
Given a failed attempt to connect, when the integration process encounters an error, then a user-friendly error message must be displayed, detailing corrective steps to resolve the issue.
User can easily disconnect the analytics tool integration from the InvenTrack platform.
Given the user is on the integration settings page, when they click 'Disconnect Analytics Tool', then the integration must be removed, and all queries to the analytics service must cease immediately without any lingering processes.
User-Friendly Dashboard
"As a user, I want an intuitive dashboard where I can view all inventory alerts and metrics at a glance so that I can quickly manage my inventory without navigating through complex menus."
Description

The User-Friendly Dashboard requirement emphasizes the design and implementation of an intuitive and visually appealing interface for users to manage reorder alerts and inventory data effectively. This dashboard will present key metrics, trends, and alerts in a clear, easily digestible format, allowing users to quickly assess their inventory status and take necessary actions. A well-designed dashboard will enhance user engagement, reduce learning time for new users, and facilitate efficient inventory management, fostering a better overall experience within the InvenTrack platform.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the dashboard to check reorder alerts for the first time.
Given the user logs in to the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the User-Friendly Dashboard, then they should see a clear overview of current inventory levels and any active reorder alerts displayed prominently.
User customizes the dashboard to prioritize specific inventory items.
Given the user selects preferred inventory items to highlight, when they save the customization, then the dashboard should reflect the prioritization immediately with the selected items displayed at the top of the alerts section.
User receives a reorder alert notification via the dashboard.
Given a stock level for a specific item has reached the reorder point, when the user views the dashboard, then they should receive a visible alert notification indicating the item that requires replenishment along with recommended reorder quantities.
User interacts with historical sales data on the dashboard.
Given the user wants to analyze past sales trends, when they select the historical sales data section on the dashboard, then the data should update dynamically to show trends over the past quarter, including graphical representations of sales fluctuations.
User seeks help regarding the dashboard functionality.
Given the user is unsure how to utilize a feature on the dashboard, when they click on the help icon, then a tooltip or help guide should appear providing detailed information on using that feature effectively.
User finds the dashboard visually appealing and easy to navigate.
Given the user is evaluating the dashboard after their first use, when they provide feedback, then at least 80% of users should rate the dashboard layout and visual design as easy to navigate and visually appealing on a user satisfaction survey.
User updates their notification preferences for reorder alerts through the dashboard.
Given the user accesses the settings in the dashboard, when they modify their notification preferences, then the changes should be saved and reflect in the next set of alerts without requiring the user to log out.
Mobile Notifications for Reorder Alerts
"As a store manager, I want to receive mobile notifications for reorder alerts so that I can act quickly, even when I'm not in the office."
Description

The Mobile Notifications for Reorder Alerts requirement involves implementing push notifications that will inform users of reorder alerts directly on their mobile devices. This functionality will ensure that users can respond to inventory needs in real-time, especially when they are away from their computers. By prioritizing mobile functionality, this feature will enhance user accessibility and engagement, allowing for timely actions on inventory management decisions, which is critical for maintaining seamless operations across the business.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a mobile notification for a reorder alert when stock levels of a critical item drop below the reorder point after a spike in sales during a weekend sale.
Given that the stock level of a critical item is at the reorder point, when real-time sales data indicates increased demand, then the user should receive a push notification on their mobile device within 5 minutes of the alert being triggered.
A user is at an off-site meeting and receives a reorder alert on their mobile device for an item that requires immediate attention, such as a high-traffic product.
Given that the user has enabled mobile notifications for reorder alerts, when the stock level drops below the reorder point, then the notification should be delivered to the user's mobile device without delay and display all necessary information to take action.
A user tests the mobile notifications feature by adjusting the reorder point of a specific product.
Given that the user adjusts the reorder point for a product in the InvenTrack app, when the stock level of that product reaches the new reorder point, then a push notification should be sent to the user’s mobile device confirming the change has been saved and alerts will be sent against this new threshold.
An admin user checks the settings for push notifications to ensure they are properly configured for multiple user accounts across different locations.
Given that the admin accesses the notification settings, when reviewing the configuration for each user, then the admin should confirm that all users are set to receive mobile notifications for reorder alerts, and the settings can be modified easily.
A user occasionally experiences delays in receiving mobile notifications for reorder alerts and wants to verify performance reliability.
Given that a user wants to confirm the responsiveness of mobile notifications, when conducting a test with intentionally low stock levels, then the notification should arrive within 3 minutes on average for at least 90% of test cases.
A user wants to ensure that mobile notifications are secure and only received by those authorized.
Given that mobile notifications deliver sensitive inventory data, when a user with insufficient permissions attempts to access reorder alerts settings, then the system should deny access and display an appropriate error message.
A user checks their mobile device in a low-signal area to see if reorder alerts are received.
Given that the user is in an area with poor mobile signal, when a reorder event occurs, then the system should queue the notification and send it as soon as the device regains signal, without missing the alert.

Seasonal Demand Forecasting

Utilizing machine learning algorithms, this feature analyzes seasonal patterns and historical sales data to predict demand fluctuations. It helps users prepare for demand spikes or drops, allowing them to adjust reorder quantities and timing accurately, optimizing stock levels throughout the year.

Requirements

Automated Seasonal Alerts
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive automated alerts for seasonal demand changes so that I can adjust my stock levels promptly and reduce the risk of stockouts or overstocking during critical selling periods."
Description

This requirement involves implementing a feature that automatically generates alerts for users based on predicted seasonal demand fluctuations. By using historical sales data and seasonal patterns, the system will send notifications to the users when it is time to adjust reorder quantities or timing. This integration will enhance user proactive engagement, ensuring they are well-prepared for inventory management during peak seasons. The alerts will empower users to make data-driven decisions without the need for constant manual monitoring, thus optimizing stock levels and preventing stockouts or surplus.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives seasonal demand alerts for upcoming peak sales periods based on historical data analysis.
Given the user has set preferences for seasonal alerts, When the system detects an upcoming peak sales period based on historical trends, Then the user receives a notification alerting them to adjust reorder quantities accordingly.
The alert system initiates in advance of predicted seasonal demand fluctuations to provide users ample time to react.
Given the historical demand data indicates a significant upcoming fluctuation, When the forecast predicts a change more than 20%, Then the alert is sent to users at least 2 weeks prior to the anticipated change.
Users can customize the timing and frequency of their alert notifications.
Given the user accesses alert settings, When the user adjusts the notification preferences, Then the system saves and applies those preferences for future alerts accordingly.
The system tracks the effectiveness of the seasonal alerts by monitoring user actions post-alert.
Given an alert is sent to the user, When the user takes action based on that alert, Then the system logs the action and evaluates the status of inventory changes made.
Users can view a history of all seasonal alerts they received along with corresponding sales data.
Given the user navigates to the alert history section, When they review the historical alerts, Then they can view the details of each alert and the related sales data for those periods.
The alert system integrates seamlessly with the user's existing ERP system for streamlined operations.
Given the user has connected their ERP system to InvenTrack, When the seasonal alerts are generated, Then the system updates the ERP with suggested actions and alert notifications.
The system allows users to provide feedback on the relevancy and timing of the alerts.
Given the user receives an alert, When they provide feedback through the designated interface, Then the feedback is logged, and the system adapts future alerts based on user insights.
Multi-Location Demand Insights
"As a regional manager, I want to analyze seasonal demand trends across all my store locations so that I can strategically allocate inventory where it is most needed, enhancing sales and customer satisfaction."
Description

This requirement focuses on enabling users to view and analyze seasonal demand forecasting across multiple locations seamlessly. By integrating demand data from different sites, users will gain insightful analytics that highlight regional trends, allowing for tailored inventory strategies that meet specific market demands. This feature will empower users to optimize stock distribution across locations, ensuring availability while minimizing excess inventory and operational costs.

Acceptance Criteria
View and analyze seasonal demand forecasts for multiple locations within InvenTrack's dashboard.
Given a logged-in user with appropriate permissions, when the user accesses the Seasonal Demand Forecasting report, then the system should display forecast data aggregated from all specified locations for the selected time period.
Receive notifications for significant demand changes across different locations.
Given a user has configured alerts for demand changes, when a location experiences a forecasted demand spike that exceeds a specified threshold, then the user should receive a push notification alerting them to the change.
Export seasonal demand insights for reporting and strategic planning purposes.
Given a user in the reporting section of InvenTrack, when the user selects the ‘Export’ functionality on seasonal demand insights, then the system should generate a downloadable report in CSV format that includes all relevant demand data for the selected locations.
Ensure that users can filter demand insights by specific locations and timeframes.
Given a user is viewing the Seasonal Demand Forecasting dashboard, when the user selects specific locations and adjusts the date range filters, then only demand data relevant to the selected locations and timeframe should be displayed.
Compare seasonal demand trends across multiple locations side-by-side on the dashboard.
Given a user accesses the comparison functionality within the Seasonal Demand Forecasting report, when the user selects multiple locations, then the system should render a side-by-side comparison view of the seasonal demand trends for those locations.
Analyze and visualize regional trends based on aggregated seasonal demand data.
Given a user is on the Seasonal Demand Forecasting analytics page, when the user views the regional statistics, then the system should present visualizations (such as graphs or charts) reflecting demand trends across all locations covered by the analysis.
Historical Data Comparisons
"As an inventory analyst, I want to compare historical data with current forecasts so that I can analyze trends and improve the accuracy of future demand predictions."
Description

This requirement entails the development of a functionality that allows users to easily compare historical sales data with current seasonal forecasts. By providing visual comparisons and trend analyses, this feature aids users in understanding the accuracy of previous forecasts and makes it easier to adjust future forecasting models accordingly. This will help businesses refine their inventory strategies based on past performances, leading to better forecasting accuracy and stock management.

Acceptance Criteria
User compares historical sales data from the last five years with seasonal forecasts in the InvenTrack platform to adjust future inventory orders.
Given historical sales data is uploaded, When the user selects a specific season and year for comparison, Then the platform displays a graphical representation of historical sales versus seasonal forecasts, allowing the user to analyze trends effectively.
User needs to identify discrepancies between predicted seasonal demand and actual sales data to adjust forecasting models for better accuracy.
Given both historical sales data and seasonal forecasts are available, When the user initiates a comparison analysis, Then the system alerts the user of any significant discrepancies exceeding a predefined threshold (e.g., 20%) and provides suggestions for adjustments.
User wants to generate a report summarizing the effectiveness of past seasonal forecasts versus actual sales to present to management.
Given the historical data comparisons have been conducted, When the user requests a summary report, Then the system generates a detailed report that includes graphical comparisons, statistical analysis, and a summary statement of forecasting accuracy over the selected timeframe.
User engages with the seasonal forecasting feature during peak sales periods to ensure stock levels remain optimal based on historical data insights.
Given the seasonal demand forecasting feature is active, When the user inputs historical sales data, Then the system provides predictive stock level recommendations that reflect past sales trends for the upcoming season.
User needs to visualize seasonal trends for better inventory management decisions across multiple product categories.
Given multiple product categories have seasonal sales data available, When the user selects two or more categories for comparison, Then the platform allows side-by-side visualization of seasonal trends and forecasts, facilitating strategic inventory adjustments.
User assesses the accuracy of previous seasonal demand forecasts and their impact on inventory management to improve future forecasts.
Given a set of completed comparisons between forecasted and actual sales data, When the user applies a qualitative rating system to the forecasts, Then the system records feedback for each forecast, which can be used to refine future models.
User seeks to validate the effectiveness of past forecasting accuracy in real-time during a busy sales season.
Given that a new season has started, When the user reviews the most recent forecasting data against current sales figures, Then the system provides an immediate accuracy percentage score, showing how well the past forecasts align with actual sales results.
Custom Reporting Tools
"As a business owner, I want to create custom reports on seasonal demand forecasts so that I can tailor my analysis to specific business needs and make informed inventory decisions."
Description

This requirement involves creating customizable reporting tools that allow users to generate reports based on seasonal demand forecasts and historical sales data. Users will have the flexibility to select specific parameters and metrics important for their analysis. This enhancement will support businesses in making informed decisions through clear visualizations and insights derived from complex data sets, improving overall inventory management efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates a custom report to analyze seasonal demand forecasts for the upcoming quarter.
Given the user is logged in, When they select 'Custom Reporting' and choose 'Seasonal Demand Forecasting' as the report type, Then the system generates a report displaying sales data, forecasted demand, and graphical trends over the selected time period.
User customizes report parameters to focus on a specific product category for analysis.
Given the user is on the reporting page, When they apply filters to display only 'Product Category A' and set the date range to the last 12 months, Then the report should update to show relevant data for 'Product Category A' for the specified timeframe.
User saves a customized report for future access and analysis.
Given the user has generated a custom report, When they click on 'Save Report' and enter a report name, Then the report is saved in the user's account and can be retrieved in the 'Saved Reports' section.
User shares a customized report with team members.
Given the user has a custom report open, When they select the 'Share' option and enter team members' email addresses, Then an email notification is sent to the entered addresses with a link to access the report.
User views a report with visualizations and data points clearly representing the seasonal demand.
Given the custom report is generated, When the user views the report, Then the report should include graphs, charts, and key metrics effectively highlighting demand trends and seasonal patterns.
User retrieves a previously saved report for a detailed review.
Given the user is in the 'Saved Reports' section, When they select a saved report from the list, Then the report should load with all previously applied parameters and data visualizations intact.
Integration with ERP Systems
"As an IT manager, I want to integrate seasonal demand forecasting with our ERP system so that we can ensure data consistency and streamline our inventory management processes."
Description

This requirement focuses on ensuring seamless integration with existing ERP systems. By developing API connections, users will be able to synchronize seasonal demand forecasting data with their ERP tools, enabling automated updates and improving the accuracy of stock levels across systems. This integration will save time for users, reduce errors associated with manual data entry, and provide a unified view of inventory across departments, ultimately enhancing the operational efficiency of inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria
User can view updated inventory levels in their ERP system after adjustments in seasonal demand forecasts from InvenTrack.
Given that a user adjusts the seasonal demand forecasting settings in InvenTrack, when the data is synced with the ERP system, then the inventory levels in the ERP should reflect these updates accurately within 5 minutes.
User receives automated alerts in their ERP system for upcoming demand spikes identified by InvenTrack's forecasting feature.
Given that InvenTrack predicts a demand spike for a specific product, when the forecast is processed, then the ERP system should generate an automated alert for the user within 10 minutes.
User initiates a manual synchronization of inventory data to their ERP system from InvenTrack.
Given that a user selects the manual sync option in InvenTrack, when the synchronization is complete, then the user should receive a confirmation message stating that the sync was successful, with a detailed log of changes made.
Users can track changes made to inventory data in their ERP system due to InvenTrack integration.
Given that changes to inventory data are made in InvenTrack, when these changes are pushed to the ERP system, then a log of these changes should be accessible to the user within the ERP under 'Integration Logs.'
User's ERP system reflects changes in reorder quantities based on seasonal forecasts in InvenTrack promptly.
Given that InvenTrack updates a user's seasonal forecasts, when these changes are sent to the ERP system, then the reorder quantities displayed in the ERP system should reflect the updates within 5 minutes.

Supplier Performance Integration

This feature tracks and integrates supplier performance metrics into the reorder scheduling process. Users can assess supplier reliability and delivery times, thereby enhancing the decision-making process for reorder points and quantities. This ensures a smoother supply chain and minimizes disruptions.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Dashboard
"As an inventory manager, I want to view supplier performance metrics on a dashboard so that I can quickly assess their reliability and make informed reorder decisions."
Description

The Supplier Performance Dashboard requirement involves creating a dedicated interface that provides users with real-time insights into supplier performance metrics. This includes data on reliability, delivery times, fulfillment rates, and other key performance indicators (KPIs). The dashboard will help users quickly assess supplier effectiveness, enabling them to make data-driven decisions regarding reorders and supplier relationships. By integrating this feature, InvenTrack enhances visibility into supplier performance, assists in identifying trends, and allows for timely interventions when performance thresholds are not met, ultimately leading to improved supply chain efficiency and reduced disruptions.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier Performance Dashboard provides a comprehensive view of supplier reliability and delivery times for reorder planning.
Given the Supplier Performance Dashboard is accessible, when the user selects a supplier, then the dashboard displays the supplier's reliability percentage, average delivery time, and recent fulfillment rates.
Users can filter the Supplier Performance Dashboard to view metrics for specific time periods.
Given the dashboard is loaded, when the user selects a date range filter, then only metrics relevant to the selected time period are displayed.
Notifications are displayed for suppliers that fall below performance thresholds.
Given the Supplier Performance Dashboard is being monitored, when a supplier's reliability or delivery time metrics fall below pre-defined thresholds, then the system triggers an alert notification for the user.
The dashboard allows users to compare performance metrics among multiple suppliers.
Given multiple suppliers are displayed in the dashboard, when the user selects two or more suppliers for comparison, then the system shows a side-by-side comparison of key performance indicators (KPIs).
The Supplier Performance Dashboard enables users to view historical performance data trends.
Given the user is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when the user selects the 'trends' view, then they can visualize historical performance data in a graphical format over time.
Users can export supplier performance metrics from the dashboard for external reporting purposes.
Given the Supplier Performance Dashboard is displayed, when the user clicks the 'Export' button, then a spreadsheet file containing current performance metrics is generated for download.
Automated Supplier Rating System
"As a procurement officer, I want an automated rating system for suppliers so that I can quickly identify which suppliers to prioritize for future orders based on performance."
Description

This requirement is for developing an automated supplier rating system that evaluates and assigns ratings to each supplier based on predefined criteria, such as delivery timeliness, order accuracy, and quality of goods supplied. The system will automatically update ratings based on performance data gathered over time, making it easier for users to identify top-performing suppliers as well as those that require improvement. By implementing this feature, InvenTrack will empower users to base their reorder and supplier selection processes on objective performance data, thus enhancing supply chain management.

Acceptance Criteria
Automated Evaluation of Supplier Performance Data
Given a supplier with performance data recorded, when the automated supplier rating system is triggered, then the rating must be updated accurately based on the predefined criteria of delivery timeliness, order accuracy, and quality of goods supplied.
User Access to Supplier Ratings
Given a user with appropriate permissions, when they access the supplier performance dashboard, then they should be able to view the latest supplier ratings and performance metrics in real-time.
Notification of Supplier Rating Changes
Given a significant change in a supplier's rating due to performance evaluation, when the rating changes, then a notification must be sent to designated users to alert them of the update.
Integration with Reorder Scheduling
Given the automated supplier rating system has evaluated suppliers, when a reorder is initiated, then the system must suggest suppliers based on their ratings, prioritizing those with the highest scores.
Historical Performance Data Access
Given the automated supplier rating system has recorded performance data, when a user requests to view historical ratings, then they must be able to access data spanning the past 12 months.
Reporting on Supplier Performance Trends
Given that the automated supplier rating system has gathered enough data over time, when a user generates a performance report, then the report must include visual representations of trends in supplier ratings over a selected time period.
Reorder Point Adjustment Notifications
"As a supply chain analyst, I want to receive notifications to adjust reorder points based on supplier performance data so that I can prevent stockouts and maintain optimal inventory levels."
Description

The requirement focuses on configuring notifications for users when supplier performance metrics indicate potential disruptions. For instance, if a supplier's delivery times exceed acceptable thresholds, the system should automatically alert users to adjust reorder points accordingly. This feature will allow users to proactively manage their inventory levels based on real-time supplier performance, minimizing the risk of stockouts and overstock situations. Ultimately, the feature will integrate seamlessly with the existing reorder scheduling process within InvenTrack.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier delivery times exceed acceptable thresholds, prompting the system to notify users to adjust reorder points accordingly.
Given that a supplier's delivery time exceeds the pre-defined acceptable threshold, when the delivery performance is assessed, then the system sends an alert notification to the user regarding the need to adjust reorder points.
A user receives notifications for multiple suppliers with performance issues and needs to prioritize their actions based on the severity of each situation.
Given that multiple suppliers have performance metrics indicating potential disruptions, when notifications are sent, then the system ranks the suppliers by delivery time exceedance and displays them in order of priority for user action.
Users want to ensure notifications only trigger when there is a significant increase in delivery time beyond acceptable thresholds.
Given that a supplier's delivery time is assessed, when the increase in delivery time is below the acceptable threshold, then no notification is sent to the user regarding the reorder point adjustment.
A user manually adjusts reorder points based on performance metrics and confirms the changes through the system.
Given that a user receives a notification regarding a supplier's performance issue and manually adjusts the reorder points, when the user confirms the adjustment in the system, then the new reorder points are saved and reflected in the inventory management dashboard.
Users need to access historical supplier performance data to inform their reorder decisions and strategy.
Given that the user wants to review historical delivery times of suppliers, when they navigate to the supplier performance dashboard, then the system displays supplier performance metrics for the selected period, along with notification history and adjustment history.
Users want to receive a summary of adjusted reorder points and supplier performance metrics on a weekly basis.
Given that the user is managing inventory with several suppliers, when the weekly summary report is generated, then the report should include a list of all adjusted reorder points and the corresponding supplier performance metrics used for those adjustments.
Supplier Performance Reporting
"As a business owner, I want to generate reports on supplier performance so that I can evaluate relationships and negotiate better terms with suppliers based on data-driven insights."
Description

The Supplier Performance Reporting requirement aims to develop comprehensive reporting capabilities that allow users to generate detailed reports on supplier performance over specified time periods. Users will be able to customize reports based on various metrics, including delivery accuracy, lead times, and overall supplier ratings. This functionality will provide strategic insights that can aid in supplier negotiations and decision-making processes, ensuring that users have the necessary information to optimize the supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier performance report generation for a specific supplier over the last quarter, focusing on delivery accuracy and lead times.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they select a supplier and specify the reporting period as the last quarter, then a report should be generated that includes metrics for delivery accuracy, lead times, and overall supplier ratings.
Customization of supplier performance reports based on user-selected metrics and timeframes.
Given a user is on the report generation page, when they select specific metrics (delivery accuracy, lead times, overall rating) and a custom date range, then the system should generate a report reflecting those selected criteria.
Distribution of supplier performance reports to relevant stakeholders via email.
Given a user has generated a supplier performance report, when they enter the email addresses of stakeholders and click 'Send', then the report should be successfully emailed to all specified addresses without errors.
Comparison of multiple suppliers' performance metrics to support improved decision-making.
Given a user wants to compare suppliers, when they select multiple suppliers and metrics for comparison, then the system should display a comparative report highlighting key performance indicators for the selected suppliers.
Filtering supplier performance reports by delivery urgency levels to prioritize critical suppliers.
Given a user is viewing supplier performance reports, when they apply filters for delivery urgency levels, then the report should update to only display suppliers matching the specified urgency criteria.
Exporting supplier performance reports in various formats for offline analysis.
Given a user has generated a supplier performance report, when they select the export option and choose a format (PDF, Excel, CSV), then the system should successfully export the report in the selected format.
Integration with Existing ERP Systems
"As an IT stakeholder, I want InvenTrack to integrate with existing ERP systems so that our team can manage supplier data without double-entry and ensure consistent information across platforms."
Description

This requirement entails developing integration capabilities with various ERP systems that users may currently utilize. The integration will enable seamless data flow between InvenTrack and ERP platforms, allowing for real-time updates and synchronization of supplier performance metrics. By providing this integration, InvenTrack will enhance its utility and facilitate a more streamlined inventory management process for users, eliminating data silos and ensuring holistic supply chain visibility.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration with multiple ERP systems for real-time data synchronization and performance tracking.
Given that the user has set up a connection with the ERP system, when inventory changes occur, then InvenTrack should reflect these changes in real-time without data loss or delay.
User accesses supplier performance metrics via the integration dashboard.
Given that the user is on the supplier performance dashboard, when they select a supplier, then they should see real-time metrics including delivery times and reliability ratings that are in sync with the ERP data.
Automated notifications triggered by supplier performance metrics.
Given that a supplier's delivery time exceeds the threshold defined by the user, when this occurs, then the system should automatically send a notification to the user regarding the potential reorder alert.
Reporting functionality for supplier performance over time.
Given that the user requests a performance report for a specific supplier, when they specify the date range, then the report should generate and display metrics such as average delivery times and instances of delays for the specified period.
Handling errors during ERP integration process.
Given that an error occurs during data synchronization with the ERP system, when the system detects this error, then it should log the error details and notify the user through an accessible error message on the dashboard.
User setup for ERP integration configurations.
Given that the user is in the integration setup section, when they input their ERP credentials and test the connection, then the system should successfully validate the credentials and confirm the integration is active.
Monitoring and adjusting reorder points based on supplier reliability.
Given that the user is reviewing inventory levels, when they assess supplier reliability metrics, then they should be able to adjust reorder points accordingly to improve supply chain efficiency.

Optimized Reorder Quantity Calculator

This tool calculates the ideal reorder quantities based on multiple factors including current stock levels, projected sales, lead times, and storage capacity. By providing precise order suggestions, it reduces excess inventory while ensuring enough stock to meet customer demand.

Requirements

Dynamic Stock Level Analysis
"As an inventory manager, I want automated notifications for stock levels so that I can ensure my business never runs out of essential items during peak demand."
Description

The Dynamic Stock Level Analysis requirement involves developing an algorithm that continuously monitors current stock levels against preset thresholds and recent sales data. This algorithm will analyze trends and fluctuations in inventory, enabling accurate predictions for when stock will need to be reordered. It benefits users by providing timely reports and alerts for managing inventory efficiently, reducing the risk of stockouts and ensuring a balanced inventory flow. Integrated seamlessly within the InvenTrack platform, this functionality will improve the overall effectiveness of inventory management processes and enhance decision-making based on real-time data.

Acceptance Criteria
Dynamic Stock Level Monitoring for Timely Reorders
Given the current stock level is below the defined threshold, When the algorithm analyzes sales data and lead times, Then it triggers an automatic reorder alert to the inventory manager.
Regular Updates on Stock Levels and Trends
Given the system is operational, When an update occurs in stock levels or sales data, Then the platform must provide real-time updates on stock levels and trends at least every 10 minutes.
Threshold Alert Notifications to Users
Given stock levels approach the reorder threshold, When an inventory condition is met, Then notifications must be sent to users via email and in-app alerts within 5 minutes of triggering.
Integration with Current ERP Systems
Given the need for seamless operation, When a stock level analysis is performed, Then the results should integrate with the existing ERP systems without errors or data loss.
Historical Data Analysis for Predictive Insights
Given historical sales data, When analyzing stock levels, Then the system must provide predictive analytics that project optimal reorder quantities based on past trends with at least 85% accuracy.
User Interface for Inventory Management
Given an inventory manager is using the platform, When they access the Dynamic Stock Level Analysis feature, Then a user-friendly dashboard should be displayed showing current stock levels, alerts, and reorder recommendations.
Performance Evaluation of Stock Level Algorithm
Given initial implementation, When the algorithm processes stock level data, Then it should achieve a performance rate with 99% uptime and response time under 2 seconds for alerts and reports.
Lead Time Optimization
"As a purchasing agent, I want to understand supplier lead times so that I can make informed decisions about which suppliers to use for timely restocking."
Description

The Lead Time Optimization requirement focuses on refining the reorder process by analyzing and adapting to variations in lead times from different suppliers. This tool will take into account historical lead time data, categorize suppliers based on reliability, and recommend optimal reorder points that minimize risk of delays. By fully integrating with the existing supply chain settings in InvenTrack, this feature will enhance the accuracy of stock replenishment, thus supporting a more agile and responsive inventory management approach that aligns closely with actual supplier performance.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier lead time variations are recorded in real-time to optimize inventory replenishment decisions.
Given historical lead time data is inputted, when a supplier's lead time changes, then the system must automatically adjust reorder points accordingly without manual intervention.
The system categorizes suppliers based on the reliability of their lead times to ensure optimal stock levels.
Given suppliers are evaluated for reliability, when lead times from each supplier are compared, then suppliers should be sorted into categories of 'Reliable', 'Moderate', and 'Unreliable'.
Inventory managers review suggested reorder points based on optimized lead times for decision-making.
Given lead time optimization data is processed, when inventory managers access the reorder report, then they should see suggested reorder points that reflect current supplier lead times with an explanation for each suggestion.
The platform integrates with existing supply chain settings to enhance inventory management processes.
Given the current supply chain settings are configured, when the lead time optimization tool is enabled, then it must seamlessly integrate without errors and function correctly alongside existing features.
Businesses require accurate forecasting to prevent stockouts and oversupply due to lead time variations.
Given the lead time optimization feature is active, when analyzing projected sales data, then the tool must provide reorder quantities that are neither excessive nor insufficient, based on historical sales and lead time data.
Notifications about lead time changes are sent to inventory managers to promote responsiveness.
Given a supplier's lead time is updated, when the change occurs, then an automated notification should be sent to relevant users within the platform to inform them of the update and potential impact on inventory levels.
Reporting capabilities include the impact of lead time optimizations on inventory metrics.
Given the lead time optimization feature is implemented, when generating inventory reports, then the impact of optimized lead times on stock levels and order frequency should be clearly indicated in the report metrics.
Storage Capacity Evaluation
"As a warehouse manager, I want to view real-time storage capacity so that I can optimize space utilization and minimize overflow issues."
Description

The Storage Capacity Evaluation requirement entails creating a feature that assesses available storage space in real-time and aligns it with projected reorder quantities. This capability will help users avoid overstocking while ensuring enough space for incoming shipments. By incorporating data on current inventory levels, historical sales, and average lead times, this feature offers intelligent recommendations for reorder quantities that fit within storage capacity limits. It plays a crucial role in efficient inventory management, reducing costs associated with excess storage while maximizing stock turnover rates.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Storage Capacity Evaluation feature to assess available storage space before placing a new order.
Given the current inventory levels and historical sales data, when the user inputs the projected reorder quantities, then the system should display a calculated available storage capacity that is accurate and updated in real-time.
The system retrieves real-time data on existing inventory and upcoming shipments to calculate effective reorder quantities.
Given current stock levels and lead times, when the user requests who much to reorder, then the system should suggest reorder quantities that take into account the storage capacity limits without exceeding them.
A user receives an automated alert when the calculated reorder quantity exceeds available storage space.
Given a scenario where the projected reorder quantity is larger than the available storage space, when the user inputs new sales projections, then the system should notify the user of potential overstock risk before finalizing the order.
User wants to analyze the impact of historical sales trends on current inventory to make informed reorder decisions.
Given the historical sales data linked to the current inventory levels, when the user utilizes the analysis tool, then the system should provide insights into sales trends and reorder recommendations based on this data.
User adjusts the storage capacity limits within the system to see how it affects reorder quantity recommendations.
Given the user modifies the storage capacity settings, when the system recalculates the reorder quantities, then the suggestions should reflect the new capacity limits and ensure compliance with those limits.
User requests a report summarizing the effectiveness of reorder quantity calculations over a defined time period.
Given the user selects the report function, when the system generates the report, then it should include metrics on stock turnover rates, instances of stockouts, and excess inventory related to the calculated reorder quantities within the specified time frame.
Forecast Integration Tool
"As a sales analyst, I want to connect my forecasting system with InvenTrack so that I can ensure our inventory matches expected demand."
Description

The Forecast Integration Tool requirement is designed to link external sales forecasting systems with the InvenTrack platform. This capability will allow users to import sales forecasts into the system, enhancing the accuracy of the reorder suggestions generated by the Optimized Reorder Quantity Calculator. By analyzing sales trends alongside inventory levels, users can make more informed inventory decisions. This integration helps businesses to better prepare for demand spikes, thus avoiding unnecessary stockouts and excess inventory, driving overall efficiency in supply chain management.

Acceptance Criteria
Sales Forecast Import and Integration Verification
Given the user has a valid sales forecast file, when they upload it to the InvenTrack platform, then the system should successfully process and integrate the data without errors, displaying confirmation of the import.
Reorder Suggestion Accuracy Post-Forecast Integration
Given that the sales forecast has been integrated, when the user accesses the Optimized Reorder Quantity Calculator, then the reorder suggestions should reflect the changes based on the newly imported sales forecast, demonstrating improved accuracy compared to previous suggestions.
Automated Reorder Alert Functionality
Given the updated inventory levels and the sales forecast integration, when stock levels drop below the defined threshold, then the system should generate automated alerts to notify the user of the need to reorder stock.
User Access and Permissions for Forecast Data
Given a user role assigned within the InvenTrack platform, when they attempt to access the sales forecast integration settings, then authorization should be correctly enforced based on their role, allowing only permitted users to access and modify forecast settings.
Performance Metrics for Reorder Suggestions
Given that the sales forecasts have been integrated, when analyzing inventory performance metrics, then the system should provide reports showing the percentage decrease in stockouts and excess inventory over a defined period compared to prior metrics, demonstrating the impact of the integration.
Data Validation and Error Handling of Imported Forecasts
Given the user imports a sales forecast file with incorrect formatting or missing data, when the system processes the file, then it should generate clear error messages indicating the specific issues and prevent the integration until corrections are made.
User Feedback Collection on Reorder Accuracy
Given that users have access to the updated reorder suggestions, when they submit feedback on the accuracy of these suggestions, then the system should collect and display user feedback data, allowing for ongoing improvements in the algorithm based on real user experiences.
User-Friendly Dashboard
"As a business owner, I want a clear dashboard to visualize my inventory status so that I can quickly respond to changes in stock requirements."
Description

The User-Friendly Dashboard requirement aims to develop an intuitive interface that summarises key inventory metrics, including current stock levels, projected needs based on sales trends, and reorder suggestions from the Optimized Reorder Quantity Calculator. This dashboard will enhance overall accessibility of critical information for users, enabling them to make quick, informed decisions. By displaying visually engaging charts and real-time updates, the dashboard will foster greater user engagement and will serve as a central hub for inventory management insights.

Acceptance Criteria
User views the dashboard for the first time after logging into InvenTrack to gauge current inventory status and suggested reorder quantities.
Given the user is logged in, when they access the User-Friendly Dashboard, then they should see current stock levels displayed clearly, projected needs based on sales trends, and optimized reorder suggestions in an easy-to-read format.
The user wants to monitor changes in inventory levels in real time while also analyzing historical trends over the past month.
Given the dashboard is open, when the user navigates to the analytics section, then they should be able to view a visual representation of inventory trends over the past month alongside real-time stock level updates.
A user is assessing inventory needs prior to a busy sales period and wants to see reorder suggestions tailored to the upcoming demand.
Given the user has accessed the dashboard, when they review the reorder suggestions, then the system must provide recommendations that consider projected sales for the upcoming period based on historical data.
A user needs to quickly identify any stock levels that are below the safety threshold to avoid stockouts.
Given the user is viewing the dashboard, when they look for low stock indicators, then the dashboard should highlight any stock levels that are below the predefined safety threshold with visual alerts.
The user wishes to customize their dashboard view to prioritize specific inventory metrics relevant to their business operations.
Given the user is in the dashboard settings, when they select preferred metrics to display, then the dashboard should update in real-time to reflect the selected inventory metrics and maintain their layout preferences for future visits.
A user is comparing inventory performance across different locations and requires a comprehensive summary on the dashboard.
Given the dashboard is available, when the user selects a specific location from the filter options, then the system should display all relevant inventory metrics and reorder suggestions specific to that location without lag or delay.

Auto-Pilot Reorder Function

An automated feature that initiates purchase orders based on calculated reorder points and quantities without manual intervention. This streamlines the inventory replenishment process, saving time and reducing the risk of human error.

Requirements

Automatic Reorder Calculation
"As an inventory manager, I want the system to automatically calculate reorder points and quantities so that I can ensure products are restocked timely without manual calculations."
Description

The Auto-Pilot Reorder Function must implement an algorithm that calculates reorder points and quantities based on historical sales data, current inventory levels, and lead times. This functionality is crucial for ensuring that inventory levels are optimized to meet demand while minimizing holding costs. The system should automatically adjust the parameters as it learns from ongoing sales trends, providing a dynamic solution that enhances inventory management and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
Scenario 1: An SMB user inputs their current inventory levels and historical sales data into InvenTrack. As the system processes this data, the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function calculates accurate reorder points and quantities for each product based on set parameters. The user reviews the generated suggestions for accuracy and effectiveness before enabling automatic order placement.
Given the user has entered historical sales data and current inventory levels, when the system calculates reorder points and quantities, then the calculated values should accurately reflect sales trends and ensure no stockouts occur.
Scenario 2: The Auto-Pilot Reorder Function automatically simulates reorder calculations over a period of time, adjusting parameters based on changes in sales trends and lead times. This is performed while the system tracks changes in sales behavior due to seasonal trends.
Given that sales data fluctuates due to seasonal trends, when the system calculates reorder points and quantities, then the system should dynamically adjust the reorder values without user intervention, reflecting current trends accurately.
Scenario 3: A user queries the performance of the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function. They want to see how well the predictions align with actual sales and whether the reorder quantities are effectively minimizing storage costs without resulting in stockouts.
Given the historical sales data and generated reorder points are logged, when the user accesses the performance report, then the report should show a minimum of 95% alignment between predicted and actual sales, with no more than 2% stockouts occurring.
Scenario 4: After implementing the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function, a user must verify that purchase orders are automatically generated when inventory levels drop below the calculated reorder points without manual input.
Given the inventory level drops below the calculated reorder point, when the system triggers a purchase order, then the order should include accurate quantities and be sent to the designated supplier without user intervention.
Scenario 5: The user needs to ensure that the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function is able to effectively integrate with their existing ERP system to manage inventory seamlessly across multiple locations.
Given that the user links their existing ERP system to InvenTrack, when the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function runs, then it should synchronize inventory data in real-time between both systems without any discrepancies.
Scenario 6: A user wants to customize the parameters for the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function to fit their unique business needs, including adjustable lead times and reorder calculations based on different categories of products.
Given a user has access to customization options, when they adjust the parameters for lead times and reorder calculations, then the changes should be saved and immediately reflected in the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function's next run.
Integration with ERP Systems
"As a business owner, I want the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function to integrate with our ERP system so that I can maintain consistent data across all services and streamline order processing."
Description

The requirement entails seamless integration with existing ERP systems to synchronize inventory levels, sales data, and supplier information. This integration is vital for providing a holistic view of inventory across all platforms, facilitating accurate reorder processes without data discrepancies. It should support various ERP systems and provide APIs for easy implementation, enhancing the overall workflow and efficiency of inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
ERP System Integration for Inventory Synchronization
Given an existing ERP system is connected to InvenTrack, when inventory levels are updated in the ERP, then the inventory levels in InvenTrack should automatically reflect those changes within 30 seconds without data discrepancies.
Automated Purchase Order Generation
Given that the inventory level at a location falls below the reorder point, when the integration is functioning correctly, then a purchase order should be automatically generated and sent to the supplier without manual intervention within 5 minutes.
User Role Permissions for ERP Access
Given user roles in InvenTrack, when an administrator assigns permissions, then only users with the correct roles should have access to modify or view ERP integration settings, ensuring secure operation.
Handling ERP System Downtime
Given that the connected ERP system experiences downtime, when inventory levels change, then InvenTrack should store the changes and synchronize them once the ERP system is back online, maintaining data integrity.
Multi-ERP System Compatibility Tests
Given multiple ERP systems are in use, when a customer attempts to integrate any supported ERP system with InvenTrack, then the integration should be successful, and inventory data should synchronize correctly for all supported systems.
API Functionality for Custom ERP Integrations
Given a developer is working with InvenTrack APIs, when requests are made to pull or push inventory data, then the API should respond with accurate inventory information and return appropriate success or error messages within standard response times.
User Training for ERP Integration Features
Given the launch of the ERP integration feature, when users attend training sessions, then they should successfully conduct a simulated inventory update and purchase order creation using the integration within 20 minutes.
User Notifications for Reorder Actions
"As a warehouse staff member, I want to receive notifications when inventory is reordered automatically so that I can stay informed and prepare for incoming stock."
Description

The Auto-Pilot Reorder Function should include a notification system that alerts users when a reorder has been initiated or when inventory levels reach a critical point. This feature ensures that users are informed and can intervene if necessary, maintaining control over inventory management, which is integral in preventing stockouts and ensuring continuity in operations.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a notification when inventory levels drop below a predefined reorder point.
Given the inventory level for an item is at the reorder point, when the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function is triggered, then the user receives a notification alerting them of the reorder action initiated.
User receives a confirmation notification after a reorder has been successfully initiated.
Given a reorder action has been successfully processed, when the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function completes the action, then the user receives a confirmation notification with the reorder details.
User has the option to customize the notification settings for reorder alerts.
Given the user is in the settings menu, when the user changes notification preferences for reorder alerts, then those preferences are saved and correctly trigger appropriate notifications according to user-selected options.
Users can view a log of all reorder notifications received in the past month.
Given that the user accesses the reorder notification log, when viewing the log, then the user must see a complete list of all notifications including timestamps and item details for the past month.
Notifications are received in a timely manner without significant delays.
Given that auto-reorders are triggered based on inventory levels, when a reorder action initiates, then users must receive notifications within 5 minutes of the action.
Users can opt-out of receiving reorder notifications if they choose to do so.
Given that the user is in the notification settings area, when the user opts out of reorder notifications, then the system should no longer send any reorder notifications to that user.
The system handles simultaneous reorder notifications without loss of data or notification integrity.
Given multiple reorder actions are triggered at the same time, when the user checks their notifications, then all corresponding reorder alerts must be visible and accurate without missing any notifications.
Data Reporting and Analytics
"As a data analyst, I want the system to provide detailed reports on reorder performance so that I can analyze trends and make informed recommendations for future inventory purchases."
Description

This requirement requires the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function to generate detailed reports and analytics regarding inventory performance, reorder levels, and supplier efficiency. The reporting feature is essential for users to gain insights into inventory trends, reorder timelines, and the overall effectiveness of the Auto-Pilot system. This data will facilitate better decision-making regarding inventory management and future purchasing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria
Auto-Pilot Reorder Function generates daily inventory performance reports for review by inventory managers.
Given the system is operational, When the daily reporting time is reached, Then the system generates and emails a detailed report on inventory performance to designated users.
Users can access and view analytics regarding reorder levels for each product in their inventory.
Given the user is logged in, When they navigate to the analytics dashboard, Then they are able to see reorder levels for each product along with historical data.
The system provides alerts for inventory items that are approaching their reorder point based on the analytics data.
Given inventory levels are monitored, When an item's quantity drops to the reorder point, Then an automatic alert is triggered and sent to the user's device.
Users can generate custom reports to analyze supplier efficiency over a selected time period.
Given the user is on the reporting section, When they select a date range and choose the supplier analysis option, Then the system generates a custom report showing supplier performance metrics.
The Auto-Pilot Reorder Function allows users to track and visualize the effectiveness of their reorder strategy.
Given the Auto-Pilot Reorder system is in use, When users request an effectiveness report, Then the report displays metrics such as stockout instances and overstock occurrences due to the reorder strategy.
Users can export the generated reports and analytics data in various formats for further analysis.
Given a report is generated, When the user selects an export option, Then the report is available for download in PDF, CSV, or Excel formats.
The system logs all generated reports and analytics for audit and compliance purposes.
Given the report is generated, When the user accesses the report history, Then all previous reports should be listed with timestamps and preview options.
Customizable Reorder Parameters
"As an inventory manager, I want to customize reorder parameters so that I can adapt the Auto-Pilot system to our unique inventory needs and avoid overstocking or stockouts."
Description

Users must have the ability to customize reorder parameters such as minimum stock levels, safety stock quantities, and lead times. This flexibility allows businesses to tailor the Auto-Pilot Reorder Function to their specific operational needs and practices, ensuring a more effective and personalized inventory management experience. The customizable parameters should be user-friendly and easily adjustable to accommodate changes in business processes.

Acceptance Criteria
Users can access and modify customizable reorder parameters through an intuitive interface within the InvenTrack platform.
Given the user has permission to manage inventory settings, when they navigate to the reorder parameters section, then they should be able to view, edit, and save minimum stock levels, safety stock quantities, and lead times without errors.
Users receive visual feedback when adjustments to reorder parameters are successfully saved in the system.
Given the user modifies any reorder parameters, when they press the save button, then they should see a confirmation message indicating that the parameters were successfully updated.
The system should allow users to compare their customized reorder parameters with industry standards to help them make informed decisions.
Given the user is on the reorder parameters page, when they click on the 'Compare with Industry Standards' button, then they should see a comparison chart reflecting their settings against best practices.
Users should be able to revert to default reorder parameters in case they wish to reset custom settings.
Given users are on the reorder parameters section, when they select the option to reset to default, then the system should restore the original settings and prompt the user to confirm their action.
The system should log changes made to the reorder parameters for auditing purposes.
Given that the user changes any reorder parameter, then an entry should be created in the audit log capturing the user ID, timestamp, and details of the changes made.
Users can access help documentation from the reorder parameters section to assist with customization.
Given users are on the reorder parameters page, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then they should be redirected to the relevant help documentation outlining how to customize reorder settings.

Visual Demand Planning Calendar

A visual tool that displays projected sales trends and recommended reorder dates on a calendar interface. This aids users in planning inventory purchases around anticipated demand cycles, ensuring strategic stock management throughout the year.

Requirements

Interactive Calendar Interface
"As an inventory manager, I want to see projected sales trends on a calendar, so that I can make informed decisions about when to reorder stock based on anticipated demand cycles."
Description

The Interactive Calendar Interface requirement focuses on developing a user-friendly calendar within the Visual Demand Planning Calendar feature. This calendar will allow users to view projected sales trends and recommended reorder dates visually. The interface will be designed for intuitive navigation, enabling users to click on specific dates to view detailed insights into inventory needs based on anticipated demand cycles. It will integrate seamlessly with existing data sources to maintain real-time accuracy. The calendar will enhance users' ability to strategize inventory purchases effectively, preventing stockouts and reducing excess inventory, thus optimizing overall inventory management efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User views the calendar interface for the first time and interacts with it to view sales trends and reorder dates.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, then they should see a calendar displaying the current month's dates, colors representing projected sales, and icons for reorder dates.
User clicks on a specific date within the calendar to access detailed inventory insights.
Given the user is on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they click on a date with a projected sales trend, then a popup should display detailed insights including sales predictions, recommended reorder amounts, and inventory levels for that date.
User uses the calendar to navigate through different months to review upcoming demand cycles.
Given the user is viewing the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they click on the previous or next month button, then the calendar should update to display the sales trends and reorder dates for the selected month without any loading delays.
User accesses the calendar and sees real-time updates based on the latest inventory data.
Given the user has the Visual Demand Planning Calendar open, when new inventory data is uploaded to the system, then the sales trends and reorder dates on the calendar should automatically refresh to reflect this new data within 5 seconds.
User shares the calendar view with a team member through the platform.
Given the user is viewing the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they click the 'Share' button and select a team member, then the selected team member should receive a notification with a link to the calendar view and any associated comments the user included.
User customizes the calendar view to display only specific product categories' sales trends.
Given the user is on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they select specific product categories from the filter options, then the calendar should update to display only the sales trends and reorder dates for the selected categories, ensuring clarity and focus.
Sales Trend Analytics Integration
"As a business owner, I want to receive insights on projected sales trends based on historical data, so that I can better align my inventory purchases with expected demand."
Description

This requirement involves integrating advanced analytics capabilities that will process historical sales data to generate accurate sales trend forecasts displayed on the calendar. The analytics engine will utilize machine learning algorithms to identify patterns in sales data, informing users of potential sales spikes or drops based on previous performance. This integration will provide actionable insights directly on the visual calendar, enabling users to make proactive inventory management decisions. The analytics integration is essential for enhancing the accuracy of demand planning and empowering users to reduce instances of stockouts or overstocking, leading to improved cash flow management.

Acceptance Criteria
Integration of Sales Trend Analytics into the Visual Demand Planning Calendar allows users to view projected sales trends for the upcoming quarter, helping them make informed decisions about inventory purchases.
Given the user accesses the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when the sales trend analytics integration is functioning correctly, then the calendar displays accurate projected sales trends and recommended reorder dates for the next three months based on historical sales data.
Users want to receive notifications for potential sales spikes indicated by the sales trend analytics integrated into the calendar, ensuring timely reordering of inventory to meet demand.
Given the sales trend analytics integration, when a potential sales spike is identified, then the user receives a notification alerting them to proactively manage their inventory to avoid stockouts.
The analytics engine processes historical sales data to generate forecasts that inform users about possible sales drops, enabling them to adjust their inventory strategy accordingly.
Given the historical sales data is fed into the analytics engine, when the data is processed, then the calendar should reflect accurate forecasts of potential sales drops along with corresponding recommendations for inventory reduction.
Users are looking to compare historical sales performance with projected trends in order to validate the effectiveness of the sales trend analytics integration within the Visual Demand Planning Calendar.
Given the sales data from the previous year, when the user compares it with projected trends on the calendar, then the projected trends must align with historical data patterns, showing an accuracy rate of 85% or higher.
A user wants to utilize the Visual Demand Planning Calendar to plan their inventory purchases around anticipated demand cycles identified by the sales trend analytics.
Given the user views the calendar, when a projected sales trend coincides with a recommended reorder date, then the user should be able to see actionable insight that indicates the suggested quantity to reorder based on the sales forecast.
The integration must allow for multi-location visibility of projected sales trends for users managing inventory across different stores or warehouses.
Given the multi-location access, when a user selects a specific location on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, then they should be able to view tailored projected sales trends and reorder dates relevant to that location's historical sales data.
Users require a seamless experience when accessing the sales trend analytics data through the calendar, ensuring functionality and usability across various devices.
Given the Visual Demand Planning Calendar is accessed from different devices (mobile, tablet, desktop), when the user interacts with the sales trend analytics, then the functionality and layout should remain consistent across all devices, ensuring a smooth user experience.
Customizable Alerts and Notifications
"As a stock manager, I want to customize my alerts for key inventory dates, so that I never miss an important reorder date or sales spike."
Description

The Customizable Alerts and Notifications requirement enables users to set personalized alerts for key dates on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, such as projected sales peaks and suggested reorder dates. Users will be able to define their own thresholds for alerts, ensuring notifications cater specifically to their business needs and inventory management strategy. This feature will enhance responsiveness, as users will receive timely notifications to take appropriate actions rather than solely relying on manual monitoring. By automating reminders, the feature promotes proactive inventory management and minimizes the risk of stockouts while improving overall operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to set a personalized alert for projected sales peaks on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar to stay informed about potential stock increases.
Given a user is on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they select a date that corresponds to a projected sales peak and define an alert threshold, then the system should create a customizable alert that notifies the user at the specified time before the projected sales peak.
A user has set multiple alerts for different items in their inventory to manage restocking effectively before an item runs out.
Given a user has set alerts for various inventory items, when the defined alert thresholds for these items are triggered, then the system must send notifications to the user’s registered email or mobile app in a timely manner.
The user needs to modify an existing alert for a reorder date due to a change in their inventory policy.
Given a user has an existing alert for a reorder date, when they access the alert settings and adjust the threshold, then the system should update the alert successfully and reflect the changes on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar.
The user wants to delete an outdated alert from their Visual Demand Planning Calendar to eliminate unnecessary notifications.
Given a user is viewing their active alerts, when they select an alert to delete, then the system should remove the alert from their profile and confirm the removal through a notification message.
The user needs to receive alerts for multiple locations they manage to ensure appropriate restocking across all sites.
Given a user manages multiple locations, when they set alerts for any specific item, then the system should allow them to customize alerts per location and send notification messages relevant to each site.
A user wants to check the history of alerts they have received for their review and analysis of past inventory decisions.
Given a user accesses the alert history section, when they request to view historical alerts, then the system should display a comprehensive list of past alerts with timestamps and statuses for review.
Mobile Accessibility
"As an inventory manager, I want to access the demand planning calendar on my mobile device, so that I can manage inventory efficiently even when I am away from the office."
Description

Mobile Accessibility ensures that the Visual Demand Planning Calendar feature is optimized for mobile use, allowing users to access the calendar and relevant inventory insights through a mobile app or responsive web design. This feature will facilitate on-the-go inventory management, enabling users to view sales trends and receive alerts from anywhere, thereby increasing flexibility and responsiveness in their inventory operations. The mobile interface will be designed for ease of use, maintaining functionality similar to the desktop version, ensuring that users can continue to perform essential inventory tasks without being tied to a desk.

Acceptance Criteria
Users access the Visual Demand Planning Calendar on their mobile devices while traveling to monitor sales trends and reorder dates.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack mobile app, when they navigate to the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, then they should be able to view the calendar with all projected sales trends and recommended reorder dates accurately displayed without distortion.
Users receive automated alerts on their mobile devices for critical reorder dates while being away from their desktops.
Given that the user has set up alerts in the mobile app, when the scheduled reorder date approaches, then the user should receive a push notification alerting them of the upcoming reorder requirement.
Users utilize the mobile interface to add new inventory items based on the projected sales trends shown on the calendar.
Given the user is viewing the Visual Demand Planning Calendar on their mobile device, when they select a date and choose to add a new inventory item, then they should be able to input item details and save the entry successfully without errors.
Users compare past sales trends with current projections through the mobile app to make informed inventory decisions.
Given the user is on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar in the mobile app, when they toggle between past sales data and current projections, then the interface should load both sets of data clearly, allowing the user to analyze trends without performance lag.
Users navigate through different sections of the Visual Demand Planning Calendar on various mobile devices, ensuring consistent functionality.
Given the user is using different mobile devices (iOS and Android), when they access the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, then the calendar layout and functionality should remain consistent across all devices.
Users seek assistance using the mobile app through an integrated help feature related to the Visual Demand Planning Calendar.
Given the user is on the Visual Demand Planning Calendar page in the mobile app, when they press the help icon, then a help overlay should appear providing guidance and resources related to the calendar's features.
Users can seamlessly switch between the mobile app and desktop version of the Visual Demand Planning Calendar without data loss.
Given the user has made updates to the Visual Demand Planning Calendar in the mobile app, when they log into the desktop version, then all updates should be reflected accurately with no discrepancies in data.
Collaborative Sharing Features
"As a team lead, I want to share the demand planning calendar with my colleagues, so that we can collaborate effectively on our inventory management strategies and ensure everyone is aligned."
Description

The Collaborative Sharing Features requirement focuses on enabling users to share insights from the Visual Demand Planning Calendar with relevant team members. This functionality will allow users to create shared views of the calendar, highlighting important trends and reorder recommendations that can be viewed by their teams. The sharing options will include email notifications as well as generated reports. This requirement is critical for improving communication among team members and enhancing collaboration in inventory management, ensuring that everyone involved is aware of upcoming demands and inventory needs, thereby fostering a more cohesive approach to inventory strategy.

Acceptance Criteria
User Sharing Calendar Insights with Team Members via Email
Given a user is viewing the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they select the 'Share' option and enter team member emails, then a summary of projected sales trends and reorder recommendations is sent via email to the specified recipients with the correct data included.
Generating Reports from the Visual Demand Planning Calendar
Given a team member has access to the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a formatted report including key insights and trends is created and made downloadable in PDF format.
Collaborative Editing of the Calendar View
Given multiple users are viewing the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when one user makes changes to the calendar (like adjusting reorder dates), then all other users immediately see the changes reflected in their view of the calendar without needing to refresh.
Notification of Upcoming Reorders
Given a user has set reorder alerts in the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when the reorder date approaches, then an automated email notification is sent to the user and relevant team members with details of the items needing restocking.
User Permissions for Calendar Sharing
Given the admin user is managing team access to the Visual Demand Planning Calendar, when the admin assigns different permission levels to team members (viewer, editor, etc.), then each team member can only perform actions allowed by their assigned role.

Reorder Adjustment Recommendations

This feature analyzes sudden changes in sales patterns and offers recommendations for adjusting reorder points and quantities accordingly. By staying responsive to market shifts, users can mitigate the risks of overstocking or stockouts.

Requirements

Sales Pattern Analysis
"As a supply chain manager, I want to receive insights about sales patterns so that I can make informed decisions on reorder points and quantities to reduce the risk of stockouts and overstock situations."
Description

This requirement involves the implementation of an intelligent algorithm that will analyze historical sales data to identify patterns and trends. It will track significant fluctuations in sales volumes to generate actionable insights for inventory management. As part of the InvenTrack platform, this functionality will integrate with existing data inputs, providing users with tailored reports on sales trends that can inform reorder strategies. The expected outcome is to enhance inventory accuracy by ensuring decisions are data-driven, reducing both stockouts and overstock scenarios, ultimately improving customer satisfaction and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to analyze recent sales patterns to adjust reorder points and quantities.
Given that the user inputs historical sales data, when the intelligent algorithm processes the data, then it should identify patterns and fluctuations in sales volumes and display them in a user-friendly report.
User adjusts reorder points based on sales pattern analysis results.
Given a set of sales pattern recommendations, when the user selects a recommendation, then the system should successfully update the reorder point and quantity in the inventory management system.
System analyzes sales data for a specific time period and provides actionable insights.
Given that the user specifies a time range for analysis, when the intelligent algorithm runs the analysis, then it should generate a tailored report that highlights significant sales trends and recommends inventory adjustments.
User compares current inventory with predicted sales trends.
Given that historical sales data has been analyzed, when the user views the inventory report, then the system should clearly indicate any discrepancies between current stock levels and predicted sales to facilitate informed decision-making.
User receives alerts for significant sales fluctuations.
Given that the algorithm detects sudden changes in sales patterns, when those changes exceed a defined threshold, then the user should receive an automated alert recommending a review of their reorder strategies.
Multiple users access sales pattern insights from different locations.
Given that multiple users log into the InvenTrack platform, when they access sales pattern analysis, then all users should see consistent and updated data reflecting the latest sales trends and recommendations for inventory adjustments.
User wants to validate the accuracy of sales pattern predictions.
Given the initial historical sales data input, when the intelligent algorithm generates predictions, then the accuracy of these predictions must be validated against actual sales data after a defined period (e.g., monthly) with a minimum accuracy threshold of 85%.
Dynamic Reorder Point Adjustment
"As a store owner, I want my system to automatically adjust reorder points so that I can respond promptly to changing market demands without manual intervention."
Description

This requirement entails the capability of dynamically adjusting reorder points based on the analysis of sales patterns and market trends. The system will automatically suggest real-time adjustments to reorder levels to account for seasonality, promotions, and unexpected demand spikes. This functionality will provide users with proactive notifications and recommendations for order adjustments, ensuring their inventory levels remain optimal. The integration with the existing inventory management system will allow seamless updates and data consistency, ultimately supporting better financial performance and minimizing inventory holding costs.

Acceptance Criteria
Dynamic Reorder Points for Sudden Sales Spikes
Given a sudden increase in sales demand, when the sales data shows a rise of 30% over the last week, then the system should automatically suggest adjusting the reorder point by 15% to accommodate new demand.
Seasonal Demand Adjustments
Given a specified seasonal trend in sales data, when the system detects a transition into the identified season, then it must adjust reorder points by 20% based on historical sales patterns from previous years.
Automation of Reorder Notifications
Given that reorder points have been adjusted, when inventory levels fall below the new reorder threshold, then the system should send automatic notifications to relevant users, confirming the adjustment and suggesting reorder quantities.
Integration with Existing Inventory Systems
Given the integration of the dynamic reorder function with the existing inventory management system, when adjustments are made in reorder points, then these changes should reflect in the inventory records within 5 minutes.
User Interface for Reorder Recommendations
Given the need for user engagement, when the system generates a reorder recommendation based on variable demand factors, then the user interface should display the recommended reorder points and quantities in a clear and actionable format.
Performance Metrics for Recommendation Accuracy
Given the implemented dynamic reorder points, when reviewing sales and stock levels over a 3-month period, then the accuracy of reorder recommendations should meet or exceed a 90% alignment with actual sales trends.
User Alerts and Notifications
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time alerts about recommended reorder adjustments so that I can take timely action to prevent stockouts or overstocking situations."
Description

This requirement focuses on implementing a notification system that will alert users to the suggested reorder adjustments and any significant changes in sales patterns. Users will receive real-time alerts through multiple channels, including email and in-app notifications, ensuring they are always updated on critical inventory status changes. The goal is to keep stakeholders informed and facilitate timely actions that could affect inventory levels. This will enhance communication and decision-making efficiency across teams, leading to minimized inventory risks and improved operational performance.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives real-time reorder adjustment alerts via in-app notifications during business hours when sales patterns change significantly.
Given a significant change in sales patterns, when the reorder adjustment feature analyzes the data, then the user should receive an in-app notification within 5 minutes of the analysis completion.
User opts to receive email notifications for reorder adjustments while logged into the InvenTrack platform.
Given that the user has selected email notifications in their settings, when a reorder adjustment is triggered, then the user should receive an email alert within 5 minutes of the trigger event.
A user needs to check historical alerts for reorder adjustments to analyze past recommendations and decisions made by the system.
Given that the user navigates to the alert history section, when the user requests to view past alerts, then the system should display all historical reorder adjustment notifications with timestamps in a clear format.
System experiences a sudden surge in sales, prompting multiple reorder alerts to be sent to users.
Given a surge in sales results in more than one reorder adjustment needed, when the system processes these adjustments, then all relevant users should receive simultaneous notifications via their selected channels without delay.
A user wishes to manage their preferences for receiving notifications about reorder adjustments.
Given the user is in the notification settings section, when the user selects or deselects the notification preferences, then the system should save the changes instantly and confirm the update via an on-screen message.
Team members want to share the reasons for recent reorder adjustments with stakeholders not using the platform.
Given that the user selects a reorder adjustment notification, when they request to generate a summary report, then the system should create a shareable report including the reason for adjustments and the impacted inventory items.
User needs to address missed notifications about reorder adjustments and identify the missed changes.
Given that a user has missed notifications, when the user accesses the missed alerts section, then the system should display all missed notifications with actionable insights indicating necessary reorder adjustments.
User-friendly Dashboard Integration
"As a business owner, I want a visual dashboard that displays inventory insights and recommendations so that I can quickly assess my inventory needs and make informed decisions efficiently."
Description

This requirement involves the development of a user-friendly dashboard that will integrate the insights and recommendations generated from sales pattern analysis and dynamic reorder adjustments. The dashboard will present data visually, making it easier for users to comprehend and analyze the information at a glance. This feature will allow users to customize their views and focus on critical metrics relevant to their inventory management process, enhancing the user experience and supporting better decision-making with intuitive access to key inventory data.

Acceptance Criteria
Dashboard displays current inventory levels and sales data in real-time for quick decision-making.
Given that the user is logged in, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they see real-time inventory levels and sales data accurately reflected on the screen.
Users can easily customize the dashboard to focus on metrics that matter the most to their inventory management process.
Given that the user has access to customization settings, when they adjust the dashboard widgets, then the changes are saved and reflected immediately on the dashboard interface.
The dashboard integrates reorder adjustment recommendations based on sales trend analysis conducted by the system.
Given that the reorder adjustment analysis is performed, when the user views the dashboard, then they should see actionable recommendations regarding reorder points and quantities clearly displayed.
Users receive visual alerts on the dashboard for critical inventory levels that require immediate attention.
Given that inventory levels fall below the predefined threshold, when the user accesses the dashboard, then they see visual alerts indicating low stock items prominently highlighted.
The dashboard supports multi-location inventory visibility for users managing inventory across different sites.
Given that the user manages inventory across multiple locations, when they view the dashboard, then they can see inventory data segmented by location with an option to compare metrics between them.
Detailed analytics regarding past sales patterns are available on the dashboard to support forecasting.
Given that the user accesses the sales analytics section, when they view the relevant charts and graphs, then these should accurately represent historic sales data over chosen time periods.
Users can generate and export customized reports from the dashboard for further analysis.
Given that the user selects specific metrics and date ranges, when they click on the export button, then a detailed report in the chosen format (CSV, PDF) is generated and downloadable.
Feedback and Improvement Loop
"As a supply chain analyst, I want to provide feedback on reorder adjustments so that I can help improve the accuracy of future recommendations and make the system more effective."
Description

This requirement emphasizes creating a feedback mechanism for users to report the effectiveness and outcomes of the reorder adjustments suggested by the system. Users will provide insights on the sales forecasts and reorder points, helping to refine the algorithms and enhance the accuracy of predictions. This ongoing feedback loop will contribute to continuous improvement in the system's performance and adaptability to changing market dynamics, ensuring users benefit from increasingly accurate recommendations over time, leading to better inventory management practices.

Acceptance Criteria
User submits feedback on reorder recommendations after implementing suggested changes for one month.
Given the user accesses the feedback form, when they submit their feedback regarding the reorder recommendations, then the system should successfully record the feedback and provide a confirmation message.
The system analyzes user feedback regarding the effectiveness of reorder adjustments over two cycles of sales data.
Given the feedback is submitted by users, when the system performs its analysis, then it should reflect at least a 75% accuracy improvement in future reorder recommendations based on the collected feedback.
User receives a summary report of the feedback collected for the last quarter, detailing trends and areas for improvement.
Given the user requests a feedback summary report, when the report is generated, then it should include comprehensive insights into the feedback trends and at least three actionable recommendations for system improvement.
User tests the effectiveness of the new reorder points suggested by the system based on their feedback.
Given the user implements the suggested reorder points, when they review stock levels after one month, then the stockouts should decrease by at least 40% compared to the previous month.
Administrator reviews the feedback loop to ensure that it is functioning properly and that feedback is being processed.
Given the administrator accesses the feedback management dashboard, when they review the feedback submissions, then they should see all feedback categorized and actionable items documented with assigned follow-ups.
User interacts with the system's dashboard to provide real-time feedback while evaluating reorder recommendation effectiveness.
Given the user is on the inventory dashboard, when they click on the feedback button next to a reorder recommendation, then a feedback form should pop up for immediate submission without navigating away from the dashboard.

Delivery Time Analyzer

This feature offers a detailed breakdown of supplier delivery times, enabling users to track and evaluate the punctuality of their suppliers. By providing insights into on-time performance, businesses can make informed decisions about which suppliers to continue working with and identify any they need to address, ultimately optimizing their supply chain efficiency.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Dashboard
"As a supply chain manager, I want to view a comprehensive dashboard of suppliers' delivery performance so that I can make informed decisions about which suppliers to engage with and ensure timely inventory replenishments."
Description

The Supplier Performance Dashboard will provide users with a visual representation of supplier delivery metrics, including average delivery times, on-time percentage, and historical performance trends. This will help businesses easily assess and compare supplier reliability, identify patterns of poor performance, and enable prompt interventions or changes in supplier strategy. The dashboard will integrate with the existing inventory tracking system, pulling real-time delivery data to ensure that decision-making is based on the most current information available. Its implementation will enhance data visibility and operational efficiency, ultimately supporting more strategic supplier relationships.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier Performance Tracking and Assessment
Given a supplier has delivered products, when the user accesses the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then the dashboard should display the average delivery times for that supplier over the past three months.
On-Time Delivery Percentage Calculation
Given multiple suppliers are being evaluated, when the user views the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then the on-time delivery percentage for each supplier should be accurately calculated and displayed based on historical delivery data.
Historical Performance Trend Visualization
Given a supplier's performance data is available, when the user selects a supplier from the dashboard, then a graphical representation of the supplier's historical performance trends should be displayed, showing delivery times over the past six months.
Integration with Real-Time Inventory Data
Given that the inventory tracking system is functional, when the user accesses the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then the delivery metrics should reflect real-time data pulled from the inventory tracking system.
Supplier Reliability Comparison
Given multiple suppliers are displayed on the dashboard, when the user compares suppliers, then the dashboard should allow the user to filter and sort suppliers based on their performance metrics such as average delivery time and on-time percentage.
Actionable Insights for Supplier Management
Given that the user identifies a supplier with poor performance metrics, when the user reviews the supplier's data on the dashboard, then the dashboard should provide suggestions for potential corrective actions based on the performance insights.
Automated Supplier Alerts
"As an operations manager, I want to receive automated alerts about supplier delivery performance so that I can quickly address any issues and minimize disruptions in our supply chain."
Description

The Automated Supplier Alerts feature will notify users when a supplier's delivery performance drops below a certain threshold. This functionality will help businesses proactively address issues with suppliers, allowing for quick resolution before they impact inventory levels. The alerts will be customizable, enabling users to set specific criteria for notifications, such as delayed deliveries or consistency in late shipments. This feature will be integrated with the overall notification system of InvenTrack, ensuring that users do not miss critical updates regarding supplier performance. The timely alerts will improve supply chain responsiveness and efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier delivery performance falls below the predefined threshold due to delays in shipments.
Given a supplier's delivery performance metric falls below 80% on-time delivery, When the performance falls below the threshold, Then the system should trigger an automated alert to the user within 5 minutes.
User customizes alert settings for different suppliers based on their delivery performance.
Given a user is setting up alert preferences for suppliers, When the user specifies a performance threshold and notification settings, Then the system should save the customized alert preferences accurately and apply them to the respective suppliers.
User receives alerts about suppliers with inconsistent delivery performance over the last month.
Given a supplier's delivery performance is monitored over the previous month, When the supplier shows more than three late shipments within that month, Then the user should receive an alert notifying them of the supplier's inconsistency.
User opts to review the historical performance of suppliers after receiving an automated alert.
Given a user has received an alert about supplier performance, When the user clicks on the alert notification, Then the system should redirect the user to a detailed report of the supplier's delivery performance for the last three months.
System integrates with the overall notification system of InvenTrack to ensure all alerts are compatible.
Given the Automated Supplier Alerts feature is implemented, When the system broadcasts an alert, Then the alert should appear seamlessly in all user notification channels without delays or discrepancies.
User can disable specific alerts for suppliers they no longer wish to track.
Given a user has the option to manage their alert settings, When the user chooses to disable alerts for a specific supplier, Then the system should stop sending notifications for that supplier immediately and confirm the change to the user.
User can assess the impact of alerts on supplier management decisions over time.
Given that alerts have been generated over a quarter, When the user generates a performance review report, Then the report should show a correlation between received alerts and actions taken regarding supplier retention or review.
Supplier Rating System
"As a procurement officer, I want to rate suppliers based on their performance metrics so that I can evaluate and choose the best suppliers for our needs effectively."
Description

The Supplier Rating System will allow users to rate suppliers based on their delivery performance, quality of goods, and communication. This feature will provide a structured way to evaluate supplier relationships and will contribute valuable insights when deciding whether to renew contracts or seek new suppliers. Ratings will be aggregative, drawing on data from multiple parameters over time, and will assist users in making strategic decisions based on historical performance. The rating system will be seamlessly integrated into the Supplier Performance Dashboard, providing an easy way to access insights and supplier evaluations in one place.

Acceptance Criteria
User rates a supplier based on their delivery performance after receiving a shipment.
Given the user is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they select a supplier and provide a rating for delivery performance, then the rating should be saved and reflected in the supplier's profile immediately.
User views the aggregated supplier ratings over a specified time period.
Given the user selects a date range on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they view the supplier ratings, then the system should display the average rating based on the selected date range accurately.
User accesses the Supplier Performance Dashboard to evaluate suppliers based on multiple parameters.
Given the user is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they filter suppliers by delivery performance, quality of goods, and communication, then only suppliers meeting the selected criteria should be displayed.
User receives notifications of suppliers with low ratings.
Given the user has set up notifications in their profile, when a supplier's rating drops below a specified threshold, then the user should receive an alert via their preferred notification method.
User compares multiple suppliers side by side based on their ratings.
Given the user selects multiple suppliers from the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they choose the compare feature, then the system should present a side-by-side comparison of all selected suppliers' ratings and performance metrics.
User updates a supplier's rating based on new performance data.
Given the user is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they update a supplier's rating after the delivery of new items, then the system should recalculate the overall supplier rating and reflect the updates across the platform.
Enhanced Analytics Report
"As a business analyst, I want to generate detailed reports on supplier delivery performance so that I can analyze trends and present data-driven recommendations for procurement strategies."
Description

The Enhanced Analytics Report will generate detailed reports on supplier delivery times, including comparisons across suppliers, trending delivery performance, and impact on stock levels. This feature will equip businesses with valuable insights, allowing them to pinpoint not only which suppliers are consistently late but also how these delays affect inventory management and customer satisfaction. Integration with existing reporting tools will enable users to customize data visualizations and share results with relevant stakeholders for collaborative decision-making. This analytics capability is essential for optimizing supply chain operations.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates a detailed Enhanced Analytics Report to review supplier delivery times for the last quarter, comparing various suppliers' performance and its impact on inventory levels.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack and has access to the Enhanced Analytics Report feature, when the user selects the 'Generate Report' option for the last quarter, then the system should display a report that includes supplier delivery times, comparisons, and inventory impact within 5 seconds.
A user wants to customize the visual representation of supplier performance in the Enhanced Analytics Report before sharing it with stakeholders.
Given the user is viewing the Enhanced Analytics Report, when the user selects different visualization options (e.g., bar charts, line graphs) and applies filters for specific suppliers, then the system should update the report visualizations accordingly and allow for exporting the report in multiple formats (PDF, Excel).
An administrator requires a summary of the overall punctuality rate for suppliers based on the Enhanced Analytics Report data for presentation to top management.
Given the administrator accesses the Enhanced Analytics Report, when the administrator selects the option to view a summary report, then the system should calculate and display the overall punctuality rate for all suppliers, along with the number of late deliveries and a historical trend chart, within 2 seconds.
A business analyst reviews the impact of supplier delivery delays on customer satisfaction metrics integrated within the Enhanced Analytics Report.
Given the business analyst is in the Enhanced Analytics Report, when the analyst selects the integration option to compare delivery times with customer satisfaction scores, then the system should generate a correlation analysis report highlighting the relationship and display it visually in a single view within 10 seconds.
Users want to share their Enhanced Analytics Report findings with team members via email after customization.
Given the user has customized the Enhanced Analytics Report, when the user clicks the 'Share via Email' button and enters the email addresses, then the system should successfully send the report to the provided addresses and display a confirmation message stating 'Report sent successfully.'
A user is testing the Enhanced Analytics Report for potential errors or discrepancies in delivered data compared to expected outcomes.
Given the user generates an Enhanced Analytics Report, when the user compares the displayed supplier delivery times against an external dataset for accuracy, then discrepancies should not exceed 5% for the report to be considered valid.
A project manager needs to create a recurring schedule for the Enhanced Analytics Report to ensure stakeholders receive updates on supplier performance automatically.
Given the project manager accesses the scheduling feature in InvenTrack, when the manager sets up a recurring schedule for the Enhanced Analytics Report (daily, weekly, or monthly), then the system should send automated emails with the report attached according to the set schedule without errors.
Benchmarking Against Industry Standards
"As a supply chain director, I want to benchmark our suppliers' performance against industry standards so that we can identify areas for improvement and ensure we are competitive."
Description

The Benchmarking Against Industry Standards feature will allow businesses to compare their suppliers' delivery performance against industry benchmarks. This functionality will provide context to the data collected, helping users assess whether their current suppliers are meeting industry standards. The benchmarking criteria will be based on industry research and will be updated regularly to reflect current best practices. This feature will promote supplier accountability and encourage improvements within the supply chain, ultimately leading to better operational performance and inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User reviews supplier performance metrics for the first time and wants to compare their delivery times against the industry standards provided by InvenTrack.
Given the user selects the 'Benchmarking Against Industry Standards' feature, when they view supplier delivery performance metrics, then they should see a comparison of their suppliers' delivery times against the latest industry standards in a clear and easily understandable format.
Business manager accesses the benchmarking report for the first quarter and needs to evaluate which suppliers are consistently meeting industry standards.
Given the business manager generates a benchmarking report for the first quarter, when the report is displayed, then it should include a clear indicator of which suppliers met or exceeded industry standards, along with any relevant notes for underperforming suppliers.
An operations team reviews the updated benchmarking criteria in InvenTrack to ensure alignment with current industry practices.
Given the operations team navigates to the benchmarking criteria section, when they access the criteria details, then they should see the latest updates reflected accurately along with the source of industry research used for the updates.
Users want to receive notifications when their suppliers are not meeting industry delivery standards based on the benchmarking feature.
Given the user has set up alerts for supplier performance, when a supplier fails to meet the established industry benchmarks, then the user should receive a notification outlining the supplier's performance and recommendations for action.
A supply chain analyst utilizes the benchmarking feature to prepare a presentation on supplier performance for an upcoming meeting.
Given the supply chain analyst is preparing a presentation using the benchmarking feature, when they export the benchmarking data to a presentable format, then the exported file must include graphs, tables, and text summaries that are comprehensible and visually appealing for stakeholders.
Users want to regularly assess the improvement efforts of their suppliers based on benchmarking results over a year.
Given the user accesses the benchmarking feature after one year, when they select the historical performance comparison, then they should see a trend analysis indicating improvement, stagnation, or decline in supplier delivery performance against industry standards.
User Role-based Access Controls
"As an IT administrator, I want to set role-based access controls to supplier performance data so that I can protect sensitive information and ensure users access only the data they need."
Description

The User Role-based Access Controls feature will implement different levels of access to supplier delivery data based on user roles within the organization. This will enhance data security and confidentiality, ensuring that sensitive supplier performance data is only accessible to those who need it for their specific roles. It will include admin, manager, and staff roles, each with tailored access permissions. This function will ensure compliance with internal controls while enabling collaboration among teams working on supplier management.

Acceptance Criteria
Admin users should be able to view, edit, and manage all supplier delivery data, ensuring complete oversight.
Given the user is logged in as an admin, when they access the supplier delivery data section, then they should have full access to view, edit, and manage all supplier delivery information.
Managers should access supplier delivery performance data but with restricted editing capabilities to ensure data integrity.
Given the user is logged in as a manager, when they access the supplier delivery data section, then they should be able to view all supplier delivery performance but only have permission to comment, not edit.
Staff users should only see a summary of supplier delivery times to prevent exposure to sensitive data.
Given the user is logged in as a staff member, when they access the supplier delivery data section, then they should only be able to view a summary view that does not include sensitive supplier performance details.
All user roles must not be able to access data outside their defined permissions to maintain data security and confidentiality.
Given any user is logged in, when they attempt to access data outside their role permissions, then they should be presented with an 'Access Denied' message.
Access permissions should be easily manageable by admin users to ensure quick adaptation to role changes.
Given an admin user is logged in, when they navigate to the user management section, then they should be able to easily modify access permissions for any user role.
Activity logs should track all user interactions with the supplier delivery data for compliance and auditing purposes.
Given any user accesses the supplier delivery data, then their actions should be logged in the system with a timestamp and user identifier for compliance tracking.
The system should automatically notify admins of any unauthorized access attempts to enhance security measures.
Given any unauthorized access attempt occurs, then an automatic notification should be sent to the admin users to alert them of the breach.

Order Accuracy Dashboard

This dashboard provides a visual representation of order accuracy metrics, allowing users to easily assess the correctness of supplies received compared to what was ordered. By pinpointing discrepancies, users can engage with suppliers to resolve issues and improve future order fulfillment rates, reducing lost sales from incorrect inventory.

Requirements

Real-time Data Sync
"As an inventory manager, I want the Order Accuracy Dashboard to sync data in real-time so that I can immediately address discrepancies and improve order fulfillment rates."
Description

The Real-time Data Sync requirement ensures that the Order Accuracy Dashboard automatically updates order accuracy metrics as new data becomes available. This functionality is crucial for providing users with the most current and accurate feedback on their inventory levels and order status. By leveraging cloud-based technology, the system will synchronize with existing data sources, minimizing delays and improving operational efficiency. The expected outcome is that users will have immediate access to up-to-date metrics, allowing for quicker decision-making and enhanced interactions with suppliers.

Acceptance Criteria
Users receive real-time updates on order accuracy metrics when new data is synced from the supplier's system during business hours.
Given the user is logged into the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when new order data is available from the supplier, then the dashboard should refresh automatically and display the updated metrics within 5 seconds.
Users can observe the system's response to data updates without manual intervention during peak operational hours.
Given the Real-time Data Sync functionality is active, when the system receives data from any connected ERP, then there should be no manual refresh needed and the time taken for updates should not exceed 10 seconds under high load conditions.
Users can consistently track discrepancies between ordered and received items throughout the day.
Given the user has an active inventory order, when an order is marked as received, then the dashboard should reflect discrepancies within 1 minute, showing a clear visual indicator of the accuracy percentage.
The system maintains a consistent connection to the data source during data sync events.
Given the system is attempting to sync data, when network latency occurs, then the system should automatically retry the sync process up to 3 times before notifying the user of a connection issue.
Users are able to access historic data prior to the latest synchronization for comparison in performance meetings.
Given the user accesses the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they select the 'Historic Data' button, then the system should display order accuracy metrics for at least the last 30 days without performance degradation.
Buyers can evaluate the impact of order discrepancies on current inventory levels.
Given the user views the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when discrepancies exceed a predefined threshold (e.g., 5%), then the dashboard should highlight affected items and provide a summary of potential financial impacts.
Discrepancy Reporting Tool
"As an operations manager, I want to generate detailed reports on order discrepancies so that I can hold suppliers accountable and improve future order accuracy."
Description

The Discrepancy Reporting Tool requirement involves creating a feature within the Order Accuracy Dashboard that allows users to generate detailed reports of discrepancies between ordered items and received supplies. This tool will enable users to capture specific details, such as the type of discrepancy, quantity differences, and supplier information. By providing granular insights into order accuracy, users can effectively communicate issues to suppliers, fostering better relationships and minimizing future errors. This requirement is essential for supporting data-driven decision-making and supplier accountability.

Acceptance Criteria
Users need to generate a report of discrepancies after receiving supplies from a supplier to identify issues for better communication with the supplier and improving future order accuracy.
Given the user has access to the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they select the Discrepancy Reporting Tool and enter the relevant order period, then the system should generate a detailed report listing discrepancies including type, quantity differences, and supplier information.
After generating a discrepancy report, users should be able to view detailed information regarding each discrepancy to facilitate better discussions with suppliers.
Given the discrepancy report is generated, when the user clicks on a specific discrepancy entry, then the system should display a pop-up with detailed information about that discrepancy including item type, quantity variation, and any associated supplier notes.
Users should be able to export the generated discrepancy report to different file formats for ease of sharing and record-keeping.
Given a discrepancy report is displayed, when the user selects the export option, then the system should allow the user to save the report in at least three formats (e.g., PDF, Excel, CSV).
The system should allow users to filter discrepancy records by supplier and order date to streamline the review process.
Given the user is viewing the discrepancy report, when they apply filters for supplier name and order date, then the report should update to only show discrepancies that match the selected criteria.
Users should receive an automatic notification alert when a report of discrepancies is generated so they can take timely action on supplier follow-ups.
Given the user has generated a discrepancy report, when the report is successfully created, then the system should send an automated notification to the user’s registered email address confirming the report generation.
Users want to track the resolution status of discrepancies reported to suppliers, ensuring follow-ups are accurate and timely.
Given the user has accessed a generated discrepancy report, when they update the resolution status of each discrepancy, then the system should save the changes and display the updated status clearly in the report view.
Users should be able to view a historical log of all discrepancies reported over time to identify trends or recurring issues with specific suppliers.
Given the user is on the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they select the 'View Historical Discrepancies' option, then the system should display a chronological log of all past discrepancies including dates, suppliers, and statuses.
Supplier Performance Metrics
"As a procurement specialist, I want to view supplier performance metrics in the Order Accuracy Dashboard so that I can evaluate our suppliers and make informed sourcing decisions."
Description

The Supplier Performance Metrics requirement includes the development of a visual representation within the Order Accuracy Dashboard that displays supplier-specific order accuracy metrics over time. This feature will allow users to assess supplier reliability and performance trends, thereby improving sourcing decisions and supplier negotiations. By integrating these metrics into the dashboard, users will gain insight into which suppliers consistently meet order specifications and which do not, ultimately driving improved inventory management strategies and reducing stock discrepancies.

Acceptance Criteria
Visualization of Supplier Order Accuracy Metrics
Given the user is on the Order Accuracy Dashboard, When they select a specific supplier from the dropdown menu, Then the dashboard displays the respective order accuracy metrics for that supplier over the past 12 months.
Supplier Performance Trend Analysis
Given the user is viewing the Supplier Performance Metrics, When they hover over a data point on the graph, Then a tooltip appears showing the exact order accuracy percentage for that time period along with the total number of orders fulfilled.
Comparison of Supplier Performance Over Time
Given the user is on the dashboard, When they select multiple suppliers to compare, Then the dashboard displays a side-by-side comparison of order accuracy metrics and trends for the selected suppliers.
Supplier Alert for Underperformance
Given the user has defined a threshold for acceptable order accuracy, When a supplier's order accuracy falls below this threshold, Then the user receives a notification alerting them to the underperformance.
Export Supplier Performance Data
Given the user is on the Supplier Performance Metrics, When they click the 'Export' button, Then the dashboard generates a downloadable report in CSV format containing the order accuracy data for the selected suppliers.
Monthly Performance Summary for Suppliers
Given the user accesses the Supplier Performance Metrics, When the month changes, Then the dashboard automatically updates to reflect the new month’s order accuracy data and provides a summary of improvements or declines in performance.
Filter Suppliers by Order Accuracy
Given the user is on the dashboard, When they apply a filter to show only suppliers with over 95% order accuracy, Then the dashboard refreshes to display only those suppliers meeting the criteria.
User Customization Options
"As a user of the Order Accuracy Dashboard, I want to customize my view and notifications so that I can focus on the most relevant metrics and improve my efficiency."
Description

The User Customization Options requirement entails providing a feature that allows users to customize the Order Accuracy Dashboard according to their specific needs. Users will be able to select which metrics are displayed, adjust data visualization formats, and set personal notification preferences for order discrepancies. This level of customization fosters a more user-centric experience, enabling users to focus on the information most pertinent to their role. The anticipated outcome is increased user engagement and satisfaction with the dashboard's functionality.

Acceptance Criteria
User selects specific metrics to display on the Order Accuracy Dashboard.
Given a user is on the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they select their desired metrics from the customization options, then the dashboard should update to reflect only those selected metrics.
User adjusts data visualization formats for the Order Accuracy Dashboard.
Given a user is customizing the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they choose a different visualization format for the displayed metrics, then the dashboard should immediately refresh to display the metrics in the new format.
User sets notification preferences for order discrepancies on the dashboard.
Given a user is on the customization settings of the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they save their notification preferences for order discrepancies, then the system should confirm that these preferences have been successfully saved and alerts should be sent based on the user's specified criteria.
User resets the customization settings on the Order Accuracy Dashboard.
Given a user has customized their Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they choose to reset the settings to default, then all previously selected metrics and visualization formats should revert to the original defaults without any error.
User accesses saved customization settings on the Order Accuracy Dashboard.
Given a user has previously customized the Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they log in again, then the dashboard should automatically load with their saved customization settings reflecting their chosen metrics and formats.
User receives alerts for significant discrepancies in order accuracy.
Given a user has defined specific thresholds for order discrepancies, when the discrepancies exceed these thresholds, then the system should trigger a notification to the user regarding the issue immediately.
Mobile Accessibility
"As an inventory manager on the go, I want to access the Order Accuracy Dashboard on my mobile device so that I can manage discrepancies anytime and anywhere."
Description

The Mobile Accessibility requirement focuses on ensuring that the Order Accuracy Dashboard is fully responsive and accessible from mobile devices. Users will be able to view order accuracy metrics, generate reports, and engage with suppliers directly from their smartphones or tablets. This capability is essential for promoting flexibility and on-the-go decision-making, particularly for those who manage inventory while visiting multiple warehouses or facilities. The expected outcome of this requirement is to enhance user mobility and responsiveness in inventory management activities.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Order Accuracy Dashboard from a mobile device while in a warehouse to check the latest order accuracy metrics during inventory checks.
Given the user has a smartphone or tablet and is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the Order Accuracy Dashboard, then the dashboard should display order accuracy metrics responsively and without any layout issues.
User generates a report of order accuracy metrics while on the go using their mobile device.
Given the user is on the mobile Order Accuracy Dashboard, when they select the report generation option, then the app should generate a report that can be downloaded or shared via email without errors.
User engages directly with a supplier about a discrepancy noted on the Order Accuracy Dashboard while using a smartphone.
Given the user views a specific order discrepancy on the mobile dashboard, when they click on the communicate with supplier button, then the app should redirect to the user's email or chat interface pre-populated with relevant details of the order discrepancy.
User checks order accuracy metrics during a meeting while using a tablet.
Given the user enters a meeting with decision-makers, when they open the Order Accuracy Dashboard on their tablet, then the dashboard should load within 5 seconds and present live metrics clearly and visibly without scrolling issues.
User receives a notification on their mobile device when a new order accuracy report is available.
Given the user is subscribed to notifications, when a new report is generated, then the mobile app should push a notification to the user’s device informing them of the available report.
User checks the dashboard in various mobile browsers to validate compatibility and display integrity.
Given the user accesses the Order Accuracy Dashboard using different mobile browsers (Chrome, Safari, Firefox), when they view the dashboard, then it should perform consistently across all browsers with no rendering issues.

Supplier Reliability Scorecard

A comprehensive scorecard that rates suppliers based on multiple KPIs such as delivery times, order accuracy, and responsiveness. This consolidated view allows users to quickly assess supplier performance and reliability at a glance, facilitating better negotiation strategies and partnerships based on comprehensive performance data.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Analytics
"As a supply chain manager, I want to track supplier performance metrics so that I can make data-driven decisions and improve my vendor relationships."
Description

The Supplier Performance Analytics feature will provide users with comprehensive insights into supplier performance by evaluating key performance indicators (KPIs) such as on-time delivery rates, order accuracy percentages, and communication responsiveness. This functionality will utilize data from past orders to generate performance metrics displayed through visual dashboards and reports. By clearly presenting supplier reliability, users can make informed decisions about their vendor partnerships, leading to more efficient supply chain management and potentially reduced costs associated with supplier issues.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to assess supplier performance at the end of a quarterly review to make informed decisions about continued partnerships.
Given the user has selected a date range for analysis, When the user requests the supplier performance report, Then the system should display performance metrics such as on-time delivery rates, order accuracy percentages, and communication responsiveness in a visual dashboard format.
A user is exploring the reliability of a new supplier prior to initiating an order for the first time.
Given the user is viewing the Supplier Reliability Scorecard, When the user clicks on the new supplier's profile, Then the system should display the supplier's average scores for delivery times, order accuracy, and responsiveness based on past data.
The finance manager requires metrics on supplier performance to justify budget allocations for the upcoming fiscal year.
Given the user has selected the 'Yearly Performance Overview' report, When the user generates the report, Then the system should calculate and display year-over-year performance comparisons for all suppliers listed with key performance indicators.
A procurement officer needs to share supplier performance analytics with stakeholders during a quarterly business review meeting.
Given the procurement officer has selected the desired performance metrics, When the user exports the report to a PDF format, Then the system should generate a well-formatted PDF containing graphs and key insights suitable for presentation.
A team leader is tasked with identifying underperforming suppliers to address performance issues.
Given the user is reviewing the Supplier Performance Analytics dashboard, When the performance filtering options are applied to show only suppliers with under 75% on-time delivery rates, Then the system should display only those selected suppliers for further action.
An operations manager analyzes trends in supplier performance over a selected time frame to adjust future orders.
Given the user selects a specific timeframe for analysis, When the user views the timeline graph of supplier performance, Then the graph should accurately reflect performance trends in on-time delivery and accuracy over the selected period.
Customizable Scorecard Metrics
"As a procurement officer, I want to customize the metrics on the Supplier Reliability Scorecard so that I can tailor it to my company's specific requirements and priorities."
Description

The Customizable Scorecard Metrics feature allows users to select and customize the KPIs that are most relevant to their business from a list of predefined metrics. This flexibility enables users to assess supplier performance according to their specific needs and industry standards, ensuring that the scorecard reflects what matters most to their operations. Users will also be able to add comments and notes related to each metric for enhanced context, promoting better supplier evaluation and decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria
User customization of scorecard metrics for supplier evaluation.
Given the user is on the supplier reliability scorecard page, when they select a predefined metric from the list and click 'Add', then the metric should be added to their customized scorecard.
Ability to reorder and prioritize selected KPIs on the scorecard.
Given the user has selected multiple KPIs for their scorecard, when they drag and drop the metrics to reorder them, then the scorecard should reflect the new order immediately.
Adding comments and notes for each selected KPI.
Given the user has metrics on their scorecard, when they click on a metric and enter a comment in the provided text box, then the comment should be saved and displayed alongside that metric.
Saving customized scorecard metrics for future use.
Given the user has customized their scorecard, when they click the 'Save' button, then the system should save their changes and load this scorecard on their next visit.
Deleting a selected metric from the scorecard.
Given the user has selected metrics on their scorecard, when they click the 'Delete' option next to a metric, then that metric should be removed from the scorecard immediately.
Exporting the scorecard to a report format.
Given the user has customized their scorecard, when they click the 'Export' button, then the scorecard data should be downloaded in a specified report format (e.g., PDF, CSV).
Automated Supplier Alerts
"As a logistics coordinator, I want to receive alerts about supplier performance issues so that I can proactively manage and resolve supply chain disruptions."
Description

The Automated Supplier Alerts feature will notify users about significant changes in supplier performance that fall below pre-established thresholds for KPIs. These alerts will be delivered via email or push notifications in real-time, allowing users to quickly address potential issues before they escalate. For example, if a supplier's delivery performance drops below 90%, users will receive an immediate notification, prompting them to investigate and take necessary action to mitigate risks in the supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an alert for a supplier’s delivery performance dropping below 90% threshold.
Given the user has set a KPI threshold of 90% for delivery performance, when the supplier's delivery performance drops below this threshold, then an email notification should be sent to the user within 5 minutes.
User customizes alert settings for supplier performance notifications.
Given the user accesses the notification settings, when the user changes the threshold for delivery performance alerts to 85%, then the system should save the new threshold and apply it to future alerts.
User receives a push notification for low-order accuracy of a supplier.
Given the user's device has push notifications enabled, when a supplier's order accuracy falls below 95%, then a push notification should be displayed on the user's mobile device within 5 minutes of the change.
User reviews the alert history of supplier performance notifications.
Given the user accesses the alert history section, when the user requests to view past alerts, then all alerts related to supplier performance within the last month should be displayed in chronological order, including timestamps and reasons for alerts.
User verifies the alert frequency settings for suppliers.
Given the user sets the alert frequency to daily, when the supplier performance metrics are checked, then the user should receive alerts once a day if any KPIs fall below the established thresholds.
User reacts to an alert and modifies supplier orders accordingly.
Given the user receives an alert for a supplier’s performance drop, when the user clicks on the alert, then they should be directed to the supplier’s profile where they can view detailed performance metrics and make adjustments to their orders.
System ensures alerts for all relevant supplier performance metrics are triggered.
Given multiple suppliers are being monitored, when any supplier performance metric (delivery times, order accuracy, responsiveness) falls below the set threshold, then alerts for all affected suppliers should be generated and sent to the user within 5 minutes.
Integrated Collaboration Tools
"As a purchasing agent, I want to collaborate directly with suppliers on performance issues so that I can resolve concerns swiftly and maintain strong partnerships."
Description

The Integrated Collaboration Tools feature will provide communication tools within the Supplier Reliability Scorecard, enabling users to engage directly with suppliers regarding performance issues and queries. This includes features such as messaging, document sharing, and issue tracking. By facilitating real-time collaboration, users can resolve discrepancies faster and improve overall supplier relationships while ensuring that all communication is documented within the platform for reference.

Acceptance Criteria
User initiates a communication with a supplier regarding a delivery delay through the Supplier Reliability Scorecard.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they select a supplier from the scorecard, then they should see a messaging feature to initiate direct communication with the supplier.
User shares a document with a supplier while discussing order discrepancies through the platform.
Given a user is in a conversation with a supplier on the messaging feature, when the user selects the document sharing option, then they should be able to upload and send documents successfully.
User tracks and resolves an issue raised in supplier performance through the integrated tools.
Given a user is engaging with a supplier about a performance issue, when they record a new issue in the issue tracking tool, then the system should log the issue with a timestamp and notify the supplier.
User accesses past communication with a supplier regarding previous performance inquiries through the platform.
Given a user is viewing the supplier’s scorecard, when they click on the communication history link, then they should see a chronological list of all documented communications associated with that supplier.
A user receives a notification when a supplier responds to their message regarding order accuracy.
Given a supplier has replied to a user’s message, when the user logs into the platform, then they should receive a visible notification indicating a new response from the supplier.
Supplier Rating History
"As a supply chain analyst, I want to review the historical performance ratings of suppliers so that I can make informed decisions on future contracts and partnerships."
Description

The Supplier Rating History feature will maintain a historical record of supplier ratings over time, allowing users to see trends in performance and reliability. This will help users to assess potential suppliers based on their historical data rather than just recent performance, offering a more comprehensive view. Users can visualize performance changes across different periods and include notes on past communications and issues, ensuring informed decision-making for future contracts.

Acceptance Criteria
User views the Supplier Rating History to analyze a specific supplier's performance over the past year.
Given that the user has selected a supplier, when they access the Supplier Rating History, then they should see a graphical representation of the supplier's ratings for each month over the past year, along with specific KPIs displayed for each month.
User adds notes on past communications with a specific supplier within their Rating History.
Given that the user is on the Supplier Rating History page, when they select a specific date in the history, then they should be able to add, edit, or delete notes associated with supplier interactions for that date, and the notes should be saved successfully.
User filters the Supplier Rating History to view suppliers based on their performance rating in a specific date range.
Given that the user is on the Supplier Rating History page, when they apply filters for a specific date range, then the displayed supplier ratings should update accordingly, showing only suppliers rated within that timeframe.
User exports the Supplier Rating History data for compliance and record-keeping purposes.
Given that the user is viewing the Supplier Rating History, when they choose to export the data, then they should receive a downloadable CSV file containing the supplier ratings and notes for the selected suppliers and date range.
User compares the Supplier Rating History between two suppliers.
Given that the user has selected two suppliers, when they choose to compare their Supplier Rating History, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of ratings, KPIs, and notes for both suppliers, clearly indicating differences in performance.
User accesses the Supplier Rating History from different locations or devices without losing data integrity.
Given that the user has previously saved their Supplier Rating History notes and ratings, when they log in from a different device or location, then they should see the same historical data and notes exactly as they left them, ensuring data consistency across platforms.

Feedback Loop Feature

This feature enables users to provide feedback on supplier performance directly through InvenTrack, creating a two-way communication channel. It allows users to report issues or praise exceptional service, which suppliers can use to improve their offerings. This interaction enhances trust and collaboration within the supply chain.

Requirements

Feedback Submission Interface
"As a user of InvenTrack, I want to submit feedback on supplier performance so that I can help improve their service and contribute to better overall supply chain efficiency."
Description

The Feedback Submission Interface is a user-friendly feature that allows users to easily submit their feedback regarding supplier performance directly through the InvenTrack platform. This interface will include dropdown menus for selecting suppliers, rating scales for service quality, and text fields for detailed comments. It is essential for ensuring that users can communicate their experiences efficiently, offering suppliers valuable insights into their performance. The integration with existing user profiles will ensure that the feedback is linked back to the correct businesses, enhancing accountability and responsiveness within the supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria
User submits feedback on supplier performance using the Feedback Submission Interface.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they select a supplier from the dropdown menu, rate the service quality using the rating scale, and enter comments in the text field, then the feedback is successfully submitted and a confirmation message is displayed.
The feedback submission links back to the correct user profile within InvenTrack.
Given a user submits feedback through the interface, when the feedback is recorded, then it must be associated with the user's profile and be retrievable for reporting purposes.
The feedback submission interface should display an error message if mandatory fields are not filled out.
Given a user attempts to submit feedback without selecting a supplier or providing a rating, when they click the submit button, then an appropriate error message should be displayed indicating the missing information.
The feedback submission process should be accessible from both desktop and mobile versions of InvenTrack.
Given a user is using either the desktop or mobile version of InvenTrack, when they access the Feedback Submission Interface, then all components (dropdowns, rating scales, text fields) should function seamlessly and responsively.
Users can view a summary of their submitted feedback for personal tracking.
Given a user has submitted feedback, when they navigate to their feedback history section in their profile, then they should be able to view a summary of all feedback they have submitted, including supplier names, ratings, and comments.
Suppliers receive notifications when new feedback is submitted.
Given feedback is submitted through the interface, when the feedback submission is complete, then the respective supplier should receive a notification about the new feedback provided by users.
Supplier Dashboard Integration
"As a supplier using InvenTrack, I want to see feedback from users on my performance, so that I can identify areas for improvement and enhance my services accordingly."
Description

The Supplier Dashboard Integration will provide suppliers with a dedicated dashboard within the InvenTrack platform, enabling them to view feedback received from users, track performance metrics, and respond proactively to any issues raised. This integration aims to foster transparency and collaboration between suppliers and users, allowing suppliers to gain insights into areas for improvement and maintain high service standards. Alerts and notifications will also be implemented to inform suppliers of new feedback submissions in real time, ensuring timely responses and fostering a stronger partnership.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier Dashboard displays real-time feedback received from users.
Given that a supplier is logged into their dashboard, when they navigate to the feedback section, then they should be able to view all feedback submitted by users and see the details including date, user comments, and ratings.
Suppliers receive notifications for new feedback submissions.
Given that a user submits new feedback, when the submission is confirmed, then the supplier should receive a real-time notification alerting them of the new feedback received.
Suppliers can respond to feedback on their dashboard.
Given that a supplier views feedback on their dashboard, when they click on the option to respond, then they should be able to enter a response that is saved and visible to the users who submitted the feedback.
Performance metrics are displayed for suppliers on their dashboard.
Given that a supplier is logged into their dashboard, when they navigate to the performance metrics section, then they should see visual representations of their performance over time, including key indicators like average rating and response time.
Suppliers can filter feedback by date and rating.
Given that a supplier is viewing feedback, when they apply filters for date range and rating, then the dashboard should only display feedback that matches the specified filters.
Dashboards are protected by security protocols to protect sensitive information.
Given that a supplier accesses their dashboard, when they log in, then they should be required to use two-factor authentication to ensure secure access to their account.
Automated Feedback Notifications
"As a supplier, I want to receive notifications whenever users submit feedback so that I can stay informed and respond to any concerns or commendations in a timely manner."
Description

Automated Feedback Notifications will be a feature that triggers email notifications to suppliers whenever feedback is submitted by users. This ensures that suppliers are promptly informed about new feedback, enabling them to respond quickly and engage with users effectively. The notifications will include key details such as the nature of the feedback, the associated user, and a summary rating. This feature is crucial in maintaining open lines of communication and will help suppliers enhance their service by promptly addressing issues or acting on praise received from the users.

Acceptance Criteria
User submits feedback on supplier performance through the InvenTrack platform.
Given a user submits feedback, when the feedback is presented, then an automated email notification should be sent to the designated supplier.
User provides both positive and negative feedback through the InvenTrack platform.
Given feedback is submitted, when the feedback type is identified as positive or negative, then the email notification should include a summary rating indicating this type.
Supplier receives email notification for feedback submitted by a user.
Given the supplier's email is registered in the InvenTrack system, when feedback is submitted, then the supplier should receive an email containing the feedback details within 10 minutes.
User reports an issue with a supplier's service through feedback submission.
Given that a user has reported an issue, when the automated email is generated, then it must include specific details about the issue and the associated user.
Supplier accesses feedback received through InvenTrack after notification.
Given that the supplier has received notification, when they log into their InvenTrack account, then they should be able to view all submitted feedback and any actions taken on it.
Multiple users provide feedback on the same supplier simultaneously.
Given that multiple feedback submissions occur, when notifications are triggered, then each notification must be sent individually without data loss or error in formatting.
Feedback notifications are generated for various suppliers depending on the user submission.
Given a user submits feedback for multiple suppliers, when notifications are triggered, then each supplier should receive a separate email notification with relevant information.
Feedback Analytics and Reporting
"As a business manager using InvenTrack, I want to analyze feedback trends so that I can make better decisions when selecting suppliers and improve my overall procurement strategy."
Description

Feedback Analytics and Reporting will provide InvenTrack users with access to insights derived from feedback submissions. This feature will aggregate and analyze feedback data, creating visual reports that highlight trends, common issues, and overall satisfaction levels for each supplier. The ability to review this data will help users make informed decisions when selecting suppliers and improve their supplier management processes, thus enhancing their operational efficiency along the supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Feedback Analytics and Reporting dashboard to review supplier performance data after receiving several feedback submissions from team members.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, When they navigate to the Feedback Analytics and Reporting dashboard, Then they should see an aggregated report of feedback submissions for each supplier, including trends and satisfaction levels over a specified time period.
User wants to generate a visual report from the feedback data to present to management.
Given the user is on the Feedback Analytics and Reporting dashboard, When they select the 'Generate Report' option, Then a downloadable visual report should be created, summarizing the key metrics and insights from the feedback data for the selected supplier and time frame.
User notices a recurring issue highlighted in the feedback analytics which affects supplier rating.
Given the user is reviewing the feedback trends, When they identify a common issue affecting a supplier’s satisfaction score, Then they should be able to click on that issue to see detailed feedback submissions related to it, including comments from other users.
Supplier accesses their performance report through a shared link to understand areas for improvement based on user feedback.
Given the supplier is provided with access to the performance report link, When they open the link, Then they should see a dashboard displaying their overall rating, feedback trends, and specific areas noted by users for improvement, ensuring data security protocols are followed.
User filters supplier feedback analytics to view data pertaining to a specific time range to assess performance during a promotional period.
Given the user is on the Feedback Analytics and Reporting dashboard, When they apply a date filter for their desired time range, Then the displayed analytics should refresh to accurately reflect feedback and performance data only within that specified range.
Admin user reviews supplier feedback data to ensure compliance with company standards and prompt replies to user feedback.
Given the admin has access to the Feedback Analytics and Reporting feature, When they review the feedback submissions, Then they should be able to see response times and compliance metrics related to each supplier, allowing for actionable insights.
Mobile Feedback Submission
"As a user, I want to submit feedback through my mobile device so that I can easily share my thoughts on supplier performance even when I am not at my desk."
Description

The Mobile Feedback Submission feature will allow users to submit feedback through a mobile application or responsive website interface. This ensures that users can provide immediate feedback while on the go, enhancing engagement and increasing the volume of feedback collected. This functionality is vital for capturing user experiences in real-time and continually improving supplier services. By making feedback accessible and convenient, InvenTrack strengthens the communication loop between users and suppliers.

Acceptance Criteria
User submits feedback via mobile app during a supplier delivery.
Given a user is logged into the mobile application, when they navigate to the feedback section and submit their feedback about a supplier, then a confirmation message should appear indicating that their feedback has been successfully submitted.
User submits a feedback form while using the responsive website on a tablet.
Given a user is accessing the InvenTrack responsive website on a tablet, when they complete the feedback form with their comments and ratings, then the feedback should be recorded in the system and a thank you message should be displayed.
User tries to submit feedback without filling mandatory fields.
Given a user is on the feedback submission page, when they attempt to submit the form without filling in all mandatory fields, then an error message should indicate which fields need to be completed before submission.
User submits feedback while offline and later reconnects to the internet.
Given a user submits feedback while in offline mode, when they regain internet connectivity, then the feedback should automatically be sent to the server and confirmed with a success message.
User reviews and edits their feedback submission before finalizing.
Given a user has entered feedback, when they choose to edit their submission, then they should be able to modify their comments and ratings, and upon resubmission, a confirmation message should reflect the updated feedback.
User accesses feedback submission from multiple devices.
Given a user has submitted feedback from their mobile app, when they log into the InvenTrack website from a desktop, then they should be able to view their previously submitted feedback and its status.

Supplier Comparison Tool

Users can compare multiple suppliers side-by-side based on various performance metrics such as delivery times, accuracy rates, and historical performance. This feature provides businesses with a clear picture of their options, aiding in effective decision-making when selecting or switching suppliers to meet their operational needs.

Requirements

Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface
"As an inventory manager, I want to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side so that I can easily identify the best supplier based on their performance metrics and make informed purchasing decisions."
Description

The Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface provides users with an intuitive graphical interface to compare multiple suppliers simultaneously. It allows users to select various performance metrics such as delivery times, accuracy rates, and historical performance indicators. This feature is crucial for users to efficiently assess suppliers' capabilities and advantages, facilitating more informed strategic decisions. Additionally, the interface will include filtering options, enabling users to refine their comparisons based on specific criteria, ensuring they can tailor the analysis to their operational needs. Integrating this feature into InvenTrack enhances user experience and operational efficiency by presenting insights in a visual format that is easy to understand and navigate.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface to evaluate three different suppliers for delivery speed and accuracy rates during a procurement decision-making process.
Given the user is on the Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface, when the user selects three suppliers and performance metrics of delivery times and accuracy rates, then the interface should display a side-by-side comparison of the selected metrics along with numerical values and visual indicators (graphs) for each supplier.
User applies specific filters on the Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface to refine the comparison of suppliers based on their historical performance metrics.
Given the user is viewing the comparison results, when the user applies filters for historical performance metrics, then the interface should update to show only the suppliers that meet the specified criteria, reflecting real-time data adjustments.
User saves a comparison view of selected suppliers for future reference or sharing with a team member.
Given the user has configured a supplier comparison, when the user clicks on the 'Save Comparison' button, then the system should save the current comparison settings and provide a confirmation notification to the user.
User navigates through the Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface using a mobile device to review supplier performance while out of the office.
Given the user is accessing the platform on a mobile device, when the user opens the Multi-Supplier Comparison Interface, then the interface should be responsive, allowing the user to view and interact with the supplier comparison effectively without layout issues.
User finds additional insights into the best-performing suppliers after completing the comparison.
Given the user has made a supplier comparison, when the user reviews the results, then the interface should provide recommendations for the top suppliers based on the selected performance metrics alongside other detail insights such as cost and customer reviews.
User requires real-time updates on supplier performance indicators during the comparison process.
Given the user is in the comparison view, when any selected supplier updates their performance data, then the interface should reflect the changes in real-time without the user needing to refresh the page or navigate away.
Supplier Performance Metrics Database
"As a purchasing agent, I want to access a database of supplier performance metrics so that I can have reliable information for comparing suppliers and improving procurement strategies."
Description

The Supplier Performance Metrics Database is a central repository that stores detailed performance data for each supplier, updated regularly to reflect the most current information. This database captures vital statistics including delivery times, order accuracy rates, and historical data over time. By maintaining this database, InvenTrack ensures users have access to reliable and up-to-date information, enhancing the integrity of supplier comparisons. This systematic approach benefits users by providing a comprehensive overview of supplier performance trends, ultimately supporting better decision-making and supplier management practices.

Acceptance Criteria
As a user, I want to view the supplier performance metrics in a table format that displays delivery times, accuracy rates, and historical performance for each supplier.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they access the Supplier Performance Metrics Database, then they should see a table listing all suppliers with their respective performance metrics.
As a user, I want to filter supplier performance metrics based on specific criteria such as delivery time thresholds and accuracy rate ranges to find suppliers that meet my operational needs.
Given the user is on the supplier performance metrics page, when they apply filter criteria for delivery times and accuracy rates, then the displayed suppliers should be only those that meet the specified filters.
As a user, I need the supplier performance metrics database to automatically update with the most recent data at regular intervals without manual intervention.
Given the supplier performance metrics database is in place, when the system is scheduled to perform updates, then the database should reflect updated performance metrics without any manual input required.
As a user, I want to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side based on their delivery times and accuracy rates to aid in my decision-making process.
Given the user has selected multiple suppliers to compare, when they initiate a comparison, then the system should display a side-by-side view of the selected suppliers’ performance metrics.
As an administrator, I want to easily input and update supplier performance data in the database to ensure all information is current and accurate.
Given the admin is on the supplier data input page, when they enter updated performance metrics for a supplier and submit, then the updated metrics should be accurately recorded in the supplier performance metrics database.
As a user, I want to receive notifications if any suppliers fall below the established performance thresholds so I can take action.
Given the user has set performance thresholds for suppliers, when a supplier's performance falls below these thresholds, then the user should receive an automated notification alerting them to this issue.
As a user, I want to generate a report of supplier performance metrics over time to analyze trends and make informed decisions.
Given the user is on the report generation page, when they select the desired time frame and metrics, then a comprehensive report detailing the performance trends of suppliers should be generated and available for download.
Customizable Comparison Reports
"As an operations director, I want to generate customizable reports comparing suppliers so that I can effectively present my findings to management and facilitate strategic discussions."
Description

The Customizable Comparison Reports feature enables users to generate detailed reports based on their specific supplier comparisons, allowing for tailored analysis of chosen metrics. Users can select the parameters they wish to compare, such as pricing, reliability, and historical performance data, and generate reports that can be exported in various formats (e.g., PDF, CSV). This flexibility serves to empower users by allowing them to present data in formats that best suit their needs, whether for internal assessment or supplier negotiations. Additionally, this feature contributes to enhanced communication within teams and with external stakeholders by providing clear, organized insights and data summaries.

Acceptance Criteria
User creates a customizable comparison report for three selected suppliers based on defined metrics such as delivery times, pricing, and reliability to assess their performance for an upcoming project.
Given the user has selected three suppliers and defined their comparison metrics, When the user generates the comparison report, Then a detailed report is created displaying the selected metrics side-by-side for the chosen suppliers, and it is exportable in PDF and CSV formats.
User wants to update the criteria for comparing suppliers after generating an initial report to include additional metrics like customer support responsiveness and historical performance data.
Given a previously generated comparison report, When the user selects additional metrics and regenerates the report, Then the report updates dynamically to include the new metrics alongside the previously selected ones, and the report format remains consistent.
User needs to share the comparison report with team members for a meeting, requiring the report to be easily accessible and in a suitable format for viewing and printing.
Given the comparison report is generated, When the user exports the report in PDF format, Then the PDF should be formatted correctly without any data loss, ensuring all metrics and comparisons are clearly visible and printable.
User requires the ability to filter suppliers in the comparison report generation phase based on specific performance criteria, such as exceeding a minimum reliability rate.
Given the user is in the comparison report creation interface, When the user applies a filter for a minimum reliability rate, Then only suppliers meeting the filter criteria should be displayed for selection and inclusion in the report.
A user attempts to generate a comparison report without selecting any suppliers or metrics and needs to be presented with appropriate feedback.
Given the user has not selected any suppliers or metrics, When the user clicks on the 'Generate Report' button, Then an error message should be displayed informing the user that they must select suppliers and metrics to proceed.
Automated Supplier Rating System
"As a business owner, I want an automated rating system for suppliers so that I can quickly assess which suppliers are most reliable and prioritize them in my procurement process."
Description

The Automated Supplier Rating System utilizes algorithms to analyze supplier performance data and assign a quantitative rating based on predefined criteria. This system will automatically update the ratings as new data comes in, ensuring real-time accuracy in assessing supplier reliability and effectiveness. The ratings will be visually represented on the supplier comparison tool, providing users with quick insights and aiding in decision-making by highlighting top-performing suppliers. Implementing this system not only streamlines the comparison process but also reinforces data-driven decision-making within the inventory management lifecycle.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier ratings are automatically updated in the system whenever new performance data is ingested from suppliers, ensuring users always have access to the most recent ratings without manual input.
Given that new performance data for suppliers is available, when the system processes this data, then the supplier ratings should be updated within a 10-minute timeframe to reflect the latest performance metrics.
Users can visually see the updated supplier ratings on the supplier comparison tool, allowing for quick assessments during supplier selection or evaluation processes.
Given that supplier ratings are updated, when the user navigates to the supplier comparison tool, then the updated ratings must be visually represented with clear indicators (e.g., color-coding or star ratings) for ease of comparison.
The Automated Supplier Rating System accurately compares suppliers based on multiple predefined performance metrics, ensuring that users have reliable and comprehensive insights at their disposal.
Given that the system has received performance data for multiple suppliers, when the ratings are generated, then the scores must be based on the weighted averages of categories including delivery times, accuracy rates, and historical performance, resulting in a total score for each supplier.
Users receive alerts if supplier ratings drop below a certain threshold, prompting them to review supplier performance and make necessary changes.
Given that a supplier's rating falls below the designated threshold, when the system processes performance updates, then users must receive an alert notification within their dashboard indicating the change in rating status.
The system can handle performance data input from multiple ERP systems, ensuring seamless integration and accurate supplier ratings for businesses using diverse platforms.
Given that the system is connected to multiple ERP systems, when new supplier performance data is gathered from any of these sources, then the Automated Supplier Rating System must successfully process and update the supplier ratings without errors.
Historical performance data is available for users to analyze trends and make informed decisions about supplier relationships based on past performance.
Given that historical performance data from suppliers is collected, when users access the supplier comparison tool, then they must be able to view a tracking chart of ratings over time for each supplier, displaying points of improvement or decline.
Supplier Feedback Integration
"As a procurement specialist, I want to log feedback on suppliers based on my team's experiences so that we can consider qualitative aspects alongside performance metrics when making supplier decisions."
Description

The Supplier Feedback Integration feature allows users to input and store qualitative feedback about suppliers based on their experiences and interactions. This integrated feedback system will be associated with the supplier performance metrics, offering a comprehensive view that combines quantitative data with qualitative insights. By doing so, users can better assess suppliers’ strengths and weaknesses and have a more holistic understanding of vendor capabilities. This feature enhances supplier evaluations and allows for informed adjustments and negotiations, ultimately refining the supplier selection process.

Acceptance Criteria
User inputs qualitative feedback for a supplier after receiving an order and reviewing the supplier's performance.
Given the user has received an order from a supplier, when they navigate to the Supplier Feedback Integration tool and enter feedback about the supplier's performance, then the feedback should be successfully saved and associated with the respective supplier's profile.
Users can view the qualitative feedback associated with a supplier alongside their performance metrics.
Given the user has accessed the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they select a specific supplier to view, then all associated qualitative feedback should be displayed alongside the quantitative performance metrics in a clear, organized manner.
Admin reviews all supplier feedback submissions for quality control and moderation purposes.
Given that feedback has been submitted by users, when the admin accesses the Supplier Feedback Integration dashboard, then they should be able to view, approve, or reject feedback submissions based on predefined quality standards.
User edits previously submitted feedback for a supplier to correct or update information.
Given a user has submitted feedback on a supplier, when they access their feedback submission in the Supplier Feedback Integration tool and make changes, then the updated feedback should replace the previous entry without creating duplicates.
User generates a report to analyze qualitative feedback trends across multiple suppliers over a specified timeframe.
Given the user selects a date range and specific suppliers, when they generate a feedback report, then the report should accurately reflect the qualitative feedback trends, highlighting any notable changes in supplier performance over that period.
The system alerts users when qualitative feedback on a supplier indicates consistent issues or negative experiences.
Given a user is monitoring supplier feedback, when feedback entries accumulate indicating consistent problems with a supplier, then the user should receive an alert notifying them of the emerging trends for further review.
User deletes outdated or irrelevant feedback for a supplier to maintain an accurate record of supplier performance.
Given the user identifies feedback that is outdated or irrelevant, when they initiate a delete action on that feedback entry, then the feedback entry should be permanently removed from the system without affecting other data.

Automated Alerts Monitoring

Set automated alerts for specific supplier performance metrics, such as frequent late deliveries or recurring order inaccuracies. This proactive approach keeps users informed about potential issues before they escalate, allowing for timely action and adjustments in supply management.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Alerts
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive automated alerts about supplier performance issues so that I can address potential problems before they affect my inventory levels and overall operations."
Description

The 'Supplier Performance Alerts' requirement involves creating an automated system that monitors specific metrics related to supplier performance. This requirement will enable users to set alerts for parameters such as late deliveries, inconsistencies in order accuracy, and overall supplier reliability. By integrating this functionality into InvenTrack, businesses will be equipped to proactively manage their supply chain, mitigating risks associated with poor supplier performance. The benefits include enhanced awareness of supplier issues, allowing teams to take timely action and maintain smooth operations while optimizing inventory management processes. This feature will streamline communication and collaboration between inventory managers and suppliers, contributing to improved operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier Performance Alerts - Late Deliveries Notification
Given a supplier with a history of late deliveries, when the delivery date is missed on two consecutive orders, then the system should trigger an automatic alert to the inventory manager indicating the lateness.
Supplier Performance Alerts - Order Inaccuracy Monitoring
Given a supplier with recurring order inaccuracies, when the system detects that the order accuracy rate falls below 90% over the last three months, then an alert should be sent to the relevant team to review the supplier.
Supplier Performance Alerts - Overall Reliability Assessment
Given a supplier's historical performance data, when the reliability score drops below the predefined threshold of 75%, then the system should notify the inventory manager with a suggestion to assess the supplier's performance.
Supplier Performance Alerts - Custom Alert Settings
Given an inventory manager, when they set custom thresholds for late deliveries and order inaccuracies, then the system must save these settings and activate alerts based on the configured parameters.
Supplier Performance Alerts - Alert Summary Reporting
Given a reporting period of the last month, when the inventory manager requests an alert summary, then the system should generate a report detailing all triggered alerts and their context for decision-making.
Supplier Performance Alerts - Alert Escalation Process
Given an unresolved alert regarding supplier performance, when the alert is not addressed within 48 hours, then the system should escalate the alert to the supply chain director.
Supplier Performance Alerts - Integration with ERP System
Given the successful integration with the existing ERP system, when a new supplier is added to the system, then the automated alerts should activate for that supplier based on their performance metrics.
Custom Alert Configurations
"As a supply chain manager, I want to customize my alert settings for supplier performance metrics so that I can receive the most relevant notifications that help me manage orders effectively."
Description

The 'Custom Alert Configurations' requirement focuses on allowing users to tailor their alert settings based on specific needs and preferences. This includes the ability to define thresholds for various supplier performance metrics and select the notification methods (e.g., email, SMS, in-app notifications). By personalizing alert configurations, users can prioritize which issues are critical to their operations, fostering a more targeted approach to supply chain management. This flexibility will enhance user experience and increase the likelihood of timely responses to supplier-related concerns, ultimately leading to improved inventory accuracy and management effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria
User Configures Custom Alerts for Late Deliveries
Given that a user has access to the Custom Alert Configurations, when they set a threshold for late deliveries to be more than 3 days, then they should receive an alert via their chosen notification method (email or SMS) whenever a supplier exceeds this threshold.
User Receives Alerts for Recurring Order Inaccuracies
Given that the user has defined a threshold for order accuracy, when an order accuracy falls below 90% from a specific supplier, then the user receives an immediate in-app notification regarding the performance issue.
User Customizes Notification Preferences
Given that a user is in the Custom Alert Configurations, when they select different notification methods (email, SMS, in-app), then those preferences should be saved and used for subsequent alerts without requiring further configuration.
User Tests Alert Configuration Functionality
Given that the user has configured alerts for specific thresholds, when the user initiates a test alert for each configured threshold, then they should receive notifications as per their selected methods confirming the alerts have been set up correctly.
User Edits Existing Alert Configurations
Given that a user has existing alert configurations, when they change the threshold for a late delivery from 3 days to 2 days, then the system should update the alert configuration and notify the user of the change successfully saved.
User Views Alert History
Given that alerts have been triggered, when the user accesses the alert history section, then they should see a comprehensive list of all alerts received, including the date, supplier, and issue type.
User Receives Alert Summary on Scheduled Basis
Given that a user has enabled daily summaries for alerts, when the scheduled time arrives, then the user receives a summary report of all alerts triggered in the last 24 hours via their specified notification method.
Performance Metrics Dashboard
"As a business owner, I want a performance metrics dashboard that displays supplier performance at a glance so that I can make informed decisions about my supply chain management."
Description

The 'Performance Metrics Dashboard' requirement involves the development of a user-friendly dashboard that visually presents the performance metrics of suppliers. This dashboard will aggregate data such as delivery times, order accuracy rates, and historical performance trends, providing users with a clear overview of supplier reliability. The visual representation of data will help users quickly identify performance issues and make informed decisions regarding supplier relationships and inventory adjustments. By integrating this dashboard into InvenTrack, users will have greater visibility into supplier performance, facilitating smarter inventory management and enhancing overall operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the Performance Metrics Dashboard to review supplier performance before placing a new order.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Performance Metrics Dashboard, then they should see a visual summary of each supplier's performance metrics, including delivery times and accuracy rates for the past month.
User sets up automated alerts for specific supplier performance metrics to stay informed of any issues.
Given the user is on the dashboard, when they configure automated alerts for late deliveries and order inaccuracies, then the system should display a confirmation message and the user should receive alerts as per the specified configurations.
User reviews historical performance trends of suppliers over the past six months to make informed supply decisions.
Given the user is viewing the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select a supplier, then they should be presented with a historical performance chart that displays trends in delivery times and order accuracy for the past six months.
User identifies a supplier with consistent late deliveries through the dashboard and decides to take action.
Given the user has filtered the performance metrics for late deliveries, when they view the results, then they should be able to see all suppliers categorized by performance, allowing them to identify the supplier with the worst performance easily.
User generates a report from the Performance Metrics Dashboard to share with their team for strategic discussions.
Given the user is on the dashboard, when they select the option to generate a performance report, then they should be able to download a PDF report that includes key performance metrics and trends.
User navigates the Performance Metrics Dashboard on a mobile device to check supplier performance while on the go.
Given the user accesses the dashboard from a mobile device, when the dashboard loads, then the performance metrics should be displayed in a responsive layout that is easy to read and navigate on a smaller screen.
User evaluates the effectiveness of automated alerts after receiving notifications for poor supplier performance.
Given the user has been receiving automated alerts for supplier performance metrics, when they review the alert history, then they should see a log of alerts received and be able to provide feedback on their accuracy and timeliness.

Historical Performance Analytics

This feature enables users to analyze historical data on supplier performance over time, facilitating trend analysis and long-term decision-making. By identifying patterns in supplier reliability, users can develop stronger, more strategic supplier relationships and plan future ordering strategies based on past performance.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Dashboard
"As a supply chain manager, I want to view a comprehensive dashboard of supplier performance data so that I can make informed procurement decisions and build stronger supplier relationships based on reliable historical data."
Description

The Supplier Performance Dashboard will display actionable insights and visual representations of supplier performance metrics over time. It will include graphical trends, attentional alerts for any declining performance indicators, and benchmarks against industry standards. This dashboard will help users quickly assess supplier reliability and efficiency, facilitating strategic sourcing decisions. Its integration with existing database systems will ensure real-time data synchronization, providing users a more clear and actionable understanding of their suppliers' historical performance, ultimately leading to enhanced decision-making capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria
Supplier Performance Overview Retrieval
Given that an authorized user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then they should see a comprehensive overview of supplier performance metrics, including delivery times, order accuracy, and quality ratings, displayed in graphical formats such as line charts and bar graphs.
Performance Alert Notifications
Given that the system has been operating for a defined period, when a supplier's performance metrics fall below established thresholds, then the user should receive real-time notifications in the dashboard indicating which suppliers are underperforming, along with suggested actions.
Benchmark Comparison Functionality
Given that the supplier performance data is displayed, when the user selects the option to compare against industry benchmarks, then the dashboard should visually show how each supplier's metrics stack against the industry average, with clear indicators for areas of concern.
Historical Data Analysis
Given that the user is viewing the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they select a specific date range for analysis, then the historical performance data should update accordingly to reflect the chosen timeframe, enabling trend analysis over the selected period.
Real-Time Data Synchronization
Given that the user has made updates in the connected ERP system, when they refresh the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then the latest performance metrics should automatically display, ensuring that all information is current and accurate.
User Access and Permissions Control
Given that multiple users have access to the InvenTrack platform, when a user attempts to view the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then they should only see data that falls within their assigned permissions, ensuring data security and confidentiality.
Exporting Performance Reports
Given that a user wants to analyze and share supplier performance data, when they click on the export button, then a report should be generated in a user-friendly format (e.g., CSV, PDF) that includes all displayed metrics and graphs.
Custom Reporting Tools
"As a business analyst, I want to generate custom reports on supplier performance so that I can analyze specific data points relevant to my department's needs and support decision-making processes with detailed insights."
Description

The Custom Reporting Tools feature will enable users to create tailored reports based on selected metrics and periods relevant to supplier performance. It will empower users to extract specific data insights needed for their unique analytical needs and strategic planning. The feature will support exporting reports in various formats, including PDF and Excel, allowing for easy sharing with stakeholders. This will enhance the platform's adaptability to different user requirements and help in efficient long-term planning and performance reviews.

Acceptance Criteria
User generates a custom report based on supplier performance metrics for the past quarter.
Given the user is authenticated and on the reporting page, when they select 'Supplier Performance' metrics and choose the date range for the last quarter, then a tailored report should generate displaying the selected metrics with accurate data.
User exports a custom report to PDF format after ensuring all data is correct.
Given the user has successfully generated a custom report, when they select the 'Export as PDF' option, then the system should provide a downloadable PDF file that includes all relevant data accurately formatted and free of errors.
User modifies an existing custom report by adding new metrics and changing the date range.
Given the user selects an existing report, when they add a new metric and adjust the date range, then the system should update the report to reflect the new changes and display the updated data accurately.
User shares a custom report with stakeholders via email.
Given the user has generated a custom report, when they enter stakeholders' email addresses and click 'Share', then the system should send an email containing a link to access the report, with verification of successful delivery to all provided addresses.
User saves a custom report for future access.
Given the user has generated a custom report, when they click on 'Save Report', then the system should prompt for a report name and, upon submission, confirm that the report has been successfully saved for future use.
User filters custom report data by supplier rating criteria.
Given the user is viewing a generated report, when they apply the filter to only show suppliers with a rating of 4 stars or higher, then the report should refresh to display only the relevant suppliers and metrics based on the applied filter.
User accesses the help section for custom reporting tools.
Given the user is on the reporting page, when they click on the help icon, then the system should display a help section that provides detailed instructions and FAQ regarding the use of the custom reporting tools.
Supplier Comparison Feature
"As a procurement officer, I want to compare suppliers based on historical performance metrics so that I can choose the most reliable suppliers and negotiate better contracts with them."
Description

The Supplier Comparison Feature will allow users to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side based on historical performance metrics. This will include parameters like delivery times, quality ratings, and pricing trends. Implementing this feature will enable users to identify the best options and negotiate better terms with suppliers based on quantifiable data. The comparison will also take into account past performance trends for a comprehensive overview, supporting strategic sourcing decisions that align with business goals.

Acceptance Criteria
User wants to compare delivery times of multiple suppliers to determine which supplier consistently meets deadlines for a specific product type over the last year.
Given the user has selected multiple suppliers and specified a product type, when the user views the supplier comparison, then the delivery times for each supplier should be displayed side-by-side in a clear and accessible format.
User needs to evaluate the quality ratings of suppliers for a particular category of items to assess which supplier provides higher quality products.
Given the user selects a category of items and multiple suppliers, when the user accesses the supplier comparison feature, then the quality ratings for each supplier should be compared and visually represented in an easy-to-read format.
User intends to analyze pricing trends for suppliers over the last two years to support negotiation efforts.
Given the user has specified a time frame and selected several suppliers, when the user initiates the supplier comparison, then pricing trends should be calculated and displayed graphically to indicate fluctuations and averages per supplier for the specified period.
A user is preparing to review supplier performance data before making a purchasing decision for the upcoming quarter.
Given the user has set a timeframe and selected relevant suppliers, when the user accesses the comparison feature, then the historical performance metrics should include delivery times, quality ratings, and pricing, aggregated for easy comparison.
User wishes to see how their preferred suppliers stack up against competitors based on historical analysis.
Given the user selects their preferred suppliers and market competitors, when the user views the side-by-side comparison, then the suppliers should be ranked based on delivery times, quality ratings, and pricing trends to facilitate informed decision-making.
A manager wants to present supplier performance data to stakeholders to justify selecting a specific supplier for future orders.
Given the user selects necessary suppliers and desired performance metrics, when the user generates a report from the comparison feature, then the report should include visual charts and tables showcasing strengths and weaknesses for each supplier, ready for presentations.

Barcode Scanning

This feature allows users to quickly scan product barcodes using their mobile device's camera. By facilitating fast and error-free stock checks, it empowers users to conduct inventory audits with ease and efficiency, reducing the time spent on manual entry and ensuring accurate record-keeping.

Requirements

Barcode Scanning Integration
"As an inventory manager, I want to quickly scan barcodes of products so that I can perform inventory audits efficiently and accurately without the risk of manual entry errors."
Description

The Barcode Scanning Integration requirement focuses on enabling users to scan product barcodes using their mobile devices. This feature will streamline inventory audits by allowing for quick and accurate updates to the inventory records. It will eliminate manual data entry errors and reduce the time spent on inventory checks, leading to enhanced operational efficiency. This integration will work seamlessly with existing inventory management features within InvenTrack to provide real-time inventory updates, ensuring that businesses have accurate stock levels available at all times.

Acceptance Criteria
User initiates a barcode scan using the app to check stock levels for a specific product during an inventory audit.
Given that the user is logged into the InvenTrack app, When the user selects the 'Scan Barcode' option and points the camera at a product barcode, Then the system should correctly recognize the barcode and display the product details within 2 seconds.
A user scans a product barcode that is not currently in the inventory system during an inventory check.
Given that a user scans a barcode that does not exist in the inventory database, When the scan is completed, Then an error message should be displayed indicating that the product is not found and an option to add the product to inventory should be available.
User performs multiple barcode scans in rapid succession to update inventory levels during a stocktake.
Given that the user scans multiple barcodes consecutively, When the scans are completed, Then all product details should be accurately updated in the inventory management system without any errors or delays, and a success message should be displayed after each scan.
User attempts to scan a barcode in a poorly lit environment.
Given that the user is in a poorly lit location, When the user points the camera at the barcode and attempts to scan, Then the system should ensure that the barcode is still recognized and provide an option to manually enter the barcode if the scan fails within 3 attempts.
User checks inventory levels after scanning to ensure accuracy of data.
Given that the user has conducted several scans during the inventory audit, When the user navigates to the inventory report section, Then the stock levels displayed must reflect the latest updates from the scans with 100% accuracy.
User wants to receive feedback after scanning a barcode successfully.
Given that the user scans a product barcode successfully, When the barcode is recognized, Then the system should provide visual and audio feedback confirming the successful scan and subsequent action taken.
User needs to verify product information after scanning a barcode.
Given that the user has scanned a product barcode, When the product details are displayed, Then the information must include the product name, quantity on hand, and location in the warehouse, allowing verification before finalizing the inventory count.
Real-Time Data Sync
"As a warehouse staff member, I want to see live updates on inventory levels after scanning barcodes so that I can ensure accuracy in our stock counts during audits."
Description

The Real-Time Data Sync requirement ensures that all barcode scans are instantly reflected in the inventory database. This feature allows for immediate updates to stock levels, supporting better decision-making and reducing discrepancies between physical and digital inventory. The functionality will implement background synchronization processes to guarantee that users accessing inventory data always receive the most current information, significantly enhancing the reliability of inventory reporting.

Acceptance Criteria
User scans a product barcode using their mobile device while conducting an inventory audit at the warehouse.
Given the user has scanned a product barcode, When the scan is successful, Then the inventory database should be updated in real-time reflecting the new stock level for that product.
A user performs a stock check on multiple products using the barcode scanning feature in a store setting.
Given the user scans multiple barcodes consecutively, When each scan is processed, Then the system should ensure that each stock level update occurs within 2 seconds for each item scanned.
An employee is conducting an inventory audit and needs to verify if the physical stock levels match the digital records.
Given the user has completed scanning, When the audit report is generated, Then the report should display a comprehensive summary showing any discrepancies between physical stock and digital records, with an accuracy rate of 99% or higher.
A user wants to ensure that the most current inventory data is being presented after multiple scans throughout the day.
Given the user accesses the inventory overview after performing scans, When the inventory data is retrieved, Then it should reflect the latest updates from the barcode scans made throughout the day with no lag in information.
An administrator needs to review the synchronization logs after multiple inventory updates.
Given the administrator accesses the synchronization logs, When reviewing the logs, Then they should see a complete history of each barcode scan and its corresponding timestamp, ensuring all updates are accounted for without any missing entries.
Error Detection Alerts
"As a store manager, I want to receive alerts when a scanned barcode doesn't match our inventory so that I can correct data inaccuracies immediately before they impact stock levels."
Description

The Error Detection Alerts requirement establishes a system where the application will notify users when a scanned barcode does not match the existing inventory records. This feature will automatically flag discrepancies and prompt users to verify the information, reducing the chances of mismanagement of inventory data. By providing real-time alerts for potential errors, this functionality aims to enhance accountability and accuracy in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
When a user scans a barcode using the mobile device, the application should identify if the scanned barcode exists in the inventory records.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when they scan a valid product barcode, then the application should display a confirmation message stating 'Product found in inventory.'
When a user scans a barcode that does not match any product in the inventory, the application should alert the user of the discrepancy.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when they scan an invalid product barcode, then the application should display an alert message saying 'Barcode does not match any inventory records. Please verify.'
If a user scans multiple barcodes in succession, the application should efficiently handle each scan and provide immediate feedback for each one.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when they scan multiple barcodes consecutively, then the application should process each scan and display respective confirmation or alert messages without delay.
The system should log all scanned barcodes along with their status (found/not found) for audit and verification purposes.
Given the user has scanned a product barcode, when the scan is processed, then the system should record the barcode, the associated status, and the timestamp in the audit log.
Users should be able to access historical data for previously scanned barcodes to aid in tracking and managing inventory changes.
Given the user is on the barcode scanning history page, when they request to view historical scans, then the application should display a list of scanned barcodes along with their statuses and timestamps.
The application should provide a user-friendly interface for handling alerts and error messages when discrepancies arise.
Given the user encounters an error alert for a scanned barcode, when they click the alert, then the application should display a detailed explanation of the issue along with steps to resolve it.
User Access Control for Scanning Features
"As an IT administrator, I want to manage user permissions for barcode scanning features so that only authorized employees can make inventory changes, adding a layer of security to our inventory management process."
Description

The User Access Control for Scanning Features requirement focuses on providing different access levels for users based on their roles within the organization. This would ensure that sensitive operations such as barcode scanning and inventory adjustments are restricted to authorized personnel only. By implementing role-based access, InvenTrack will enhance security and allow for better tracking of modifications made to inventory records.

Acceptance Criteria
User with 'Admin' role attempts to access the barcode scanning feature to perform a stock audit.
Given the user has 'Admin' role, when they access the barcode scanning feature, then they should successfully view and use the scanning functionality without any restrictions.
User with 'Employee' role attempts to access the barcode scanning feature for inventory adjustments.
Given the user has 'Employee' role, when they attempt to access the barcode scanning feature, then they should receive an access denial message stating insufficient permissions.
User with 'Manager' role accesses the barcode scanning feature to conduct an inventory check.
Given the user has 'Manager' role, when they access the barcode scanning feature, then they should see all items available for scanning and can successfully conduct a stock audit.
System behavior when a non-registered user attempts to access the barcode scanning feature.
Given the user is non-registered, when they try to access the barcode scanning feature, then they should be redirected to the registration or login page with a notification about restricted access.
Audit log verification when different roles access the barcode scanning feature.
Given various user roles access the barcode scanning feature, when the administrator reviews the audit logs, then all access attempts (successful and denied) should be accurately logged with user details and timestamps.
Testing system response when an 'Admin' user modifies access controls for scanning features.
Given an 'Admin' user modifies the access level for the barcode scanning feature, when the changes are saved, then the system should update access levels accordingly and notify all affected users of the changes.
User experience during simultaneous access requests for barcode scanning from different users.
Given multiple users with different roles attempt to access the barcode scanning feature simultaneously, then the system should handle each request appropriately, granting or denying access based on their respective roles without system lag or errors.
Mobile Optimization for Scanning UI
"As a field employee, I want a mobile optimized interface to scan barcodes easily so that I can quickly check inventory without fumbling through small buttons."
Description

The Mobile Optimization for Scanning UI requirement aims to design a user-friendly interface specifically for mobile devices, focusing on barcode scanning functionalities. The mobile UI will include larger buttons for scanning, easy navigation, and quick access to inventory details post-scan. This optimization will significantly enhance user experience, facilitating the use of barcode scanning in fast-paced environments where efficiency is key.

Acceptance Criteria
User scans a product's barcode in a warehouse environment to quickly check its availability.
Given the user is on the barcode scanning interface, when they aim the camera at the barcode and click the scan button, then the product details should display within 2 seconds with accurate stock information.
User navigates the scanning interface to access inventory details after scanning a barcode.
Given the user has scanned a product barcode, when they tap on the product detail screen, then they should be able to view a complete description, stock quantity, and reorder level without any lag.
User with different mobile devices uses the scanning UI to conduct inventory checks.
Given the user accesses the mobile scanning interface from various devices (iOS and Android), when they use the barcode scanning feature, then the interface should perform consistently across devices with no functionality loss.
User frequently scans barcodes for items in a fast-paced retail setting.
Given the user is in a busy retail environment, when they scan items consecutively without interruption, then the system should allow at least 10 scans in a 1-minute time frame without errors or delays in processing.
User accesses the scanning interface under different lighting conditions.
Given the user is in a poorly lit area, when they attempt to scan a barcode, the scanning UI should adjust the camera settings automatically to enhance readability and still provide accurate results within 3 seconds.
User provides feedback on the usability of the scanning UI.
Given the user has completed a series of scans, when they are prompted for feedback, then they should be able to submit their ratings and comments easily, and the feedback should be stored for analysis without any errors.
User in a high-traffic area needs to quickly switch between scanning and navigation functions.
Given the user is actively scanning items, when they need to navigate to a different section of the app, then the transition should take no longer than 1 second and maintain the context of the current scan.

Stock Level Notifications

Users receive real-time notifications about stock levels for items they are monitoring or managing. This proactive feature ensures that users are alerted when stock is low, enabling timely reordering and preventing stockouts, thus enhancing overall inventory management responsiveness.

Requirements

Real-time Stock Monitoring
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time updates on stock levels so that I can efficiently manage inventory and respond swiftly to changes in demand."
Description

This requirement entails the implementation of a real-time stock monitoring system that continuously tracks inventory levels across all products. It provides users with up-to-the-minute data regarding stock quantities, allowing for immediate visibility of inventory status. The benefits include improved decision-making capabilities, increased visibility of stock levels preventing overselling and enabling timely restocking. This feature will integrate seamlessly with existing inventory databases, updating stock levels as sales and restocking occur, thereby enhancing operational efficiency and allowing users to focus on strategic management rather than manual monitoring.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives notifications for products with low stock levels within the InvenTrack dashboard.
Given a product's stock level is at or below the predefined threshold, When the stock level changes, Then the user should receive a real-time notification about the low stock via the dashboard and email.
User can set custom low stock level thresholds for different products.
Given the user is on the stock management settings page, When the user adjusts the low stock threshold for a product, Then the updated threshold should be saved and applied, and a notification is sent if the threshold is subsequently reached.
User views the history of stock level notifications for tracking and analysis.
Given the user accesses the stock level notifications history section, When the user views the notifications list, Then the list should display all notifications sent in the past 30 days along with timestamps and product details.
User confirms a stock level notification to acknowledge receipt.
Given the user receives a low stock notification, When the user clicks the confirmation button, Then the notification should be marked as acknowledged in the system.
User receives notifications across multiple platforms (email, SMS, app).
Given the user has enabled notifications for low stock, When a stock notification is triggered, Then the user should receive the alert via their chosen platforms (email, SMS, and/or app notifications).
User can disable stock level notifications for specific products.
Given the user is on the notification settings page, When the user selects a product to disable notifications for, Then the system should cease sending notifications for that specific product until re-enabled.
User receives a summary report of stock levels and notifications at the end of the week.
Given the user is subscribed to weekly reports, When the end of the week is reached, Then the user should receive an email summarizing stock levels and any notifications sent during the week.
Automated Low Stock Alerts
"As a store owner, I want automated alerts for low stock items so that I can reorder before running out and avoid disappointing my customers."
Description

This requirement focuses on the creation of automated alerts that notify users when stock levels of specific items fall below a predefined threshold. These alerts will be customizable based on user preferences and will be delivered through multiple channels such as email or SMS. The primary benefit is proactive inventory management, ensuring users can initiate replenishment orders promptly and prevent stockouts. Integration with the existing notification system is essential to provide a seamless experience and high reliability of alerts, thereby reducing the risk of missed stock signals and improving overall customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria
User sets a low stock threshold for item A in their inventory management dashboard.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they set a low stock threshold for item A to 10 units, then the system should save this threshold and notify the user when stock levels fall below 10 units.
User receives a low stock notification via email when stock levels fall below the threshold.
Given the user has set a low stock threshold for item A and the stock level drops below 10 units, when the stock level is updated in the system, then the user should receive an email notification alerting them of the low stock status.
User customizes notification preferences for low stock alerts.
Given the user navigates to the notification settings page, when they select their preferred notification channels (email or SMS), then the system should update the user’s preferences and reflect those changes in the notification settings.
System integrates with existing notification system to send low stock alerts.
Given the user has configured low stock alerts for item A, when stock levels fall below the threshold, then the notification system should successfully dispatch alerts through the selected channels without delay.
User tests the notification system by temporarily reducing stock to trigger alerts.
Given the user has reduced stock levels of item A below the low stock threshold, when the stock update is processed, then the user should receive an alert through their chosen notification method within 5 minutes.
User acknowledges a low stock alert and updates stock levels accordingly.
Given the user receives a low stock alert for item A, when the user acknowledges this alert and updates the stock level, then the system should confirm the update and log the action for future reference.
User views a history of low stock notifications received.
Given the user navigates to the notification history section, when they request to view past low stock alerts, then the system should display a list of low stock notifications with timestamps and relevant item details.
Customizable Notification Settings
"As a business owner, I want to customize my notification settings so that I receive alerts only for the items that matter most to my business operations."
Description

This requirement includes the development of a feature that allows users to customize their notification preferences for stock level alerts. Users will be able to select which items they want notifications for, set the low stock thresholds, and choose how they receive notifications (e.g., via email, SMS, or in-app alerts). The benefit of this feature is enhanced user experience and efficiency, allowing users to tailor the system to fit their unique operational needs. This will aid in reducing notification fatigue while ensuring that important updates are not missed, thereby aligning with individual business strategies.

Acceptance Criteria
User sets custom notification preferences for low stock alerts for specific inventory items in their InvenTrack dashboard.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, When they navigate to the notification settings, Then they should be able to choose specific inventory items to receive notifications for.
User establishes a low stock threshold for a specific item in the system.
Given the user is on the notification settings page, When they input a low stock threshold for an item, Then the system should save this setting without error.
User selects preferred methods of receiving notifications for stock levels—email, SMS, or in-app alerts.
Given the user is on the notification settings page, When they select their preferred notification method(s), Then the system should confirm the selection and allow for multiple options to be selected.
User wants to receive an alert when stock falls below the set threshold via their preferred notification method.
Given the user has set a low stock threshold and selected a preferred notification method, When the stock falls below that threshold, Then the user should receive a notification through their selected method immediately.
User decides to modify their existing notification settings for stock level alerts after monitoring effectiveness.
Given the user has previously configured notification settings, When they navigate back to the notification settings page, Then they should see all their existing settings and be able to modify them as needed.
User chooses to disable notifications for specific items or completely.
Given the user is on the notification settings page, When they choose to disable notifications for specific items or for all items, Then the system should prompt for confirmation and subsequently disable the selected notifications successfully.
Integration with Supplier Reordering Systems
"As a logistics manager, I want automatic reordering processes linked to stock alerts so that I can ensure our products are always available without manual intervention."
Description

This requirement encompasses the integration of InvenTrack's stock level notifications with external supplier systems for automatic reordering of inventory based on low stock alerts. This feature will enable seamless communication between inventory levels and supplier partners, significantly reducing the manual workload for inventory replenishment. The benefit includes preventing stockouts by ensuring orders are placed automatically, improving supply chain efficiency, and minimizing human error in reordering processes, ultimately leading to improved service level and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an automated reorder notification when stock levels for a specific item fall below the predefined threshold.
Given an item has a stock level below the set threshold, When the notification service checks stock levels, Then the system sends an automated reorder notification to the supplier's system.
Integration with the supplier's system is established and functioning for automatic reorder placement.
Given that stock level notifications are triggered, When a stock alert is received, Then an order for the specified items is automatically placed with the supplier without user intervention.
Users can customize the reorder threshold for different items within InvenTrack.
Given that a user is logged into InvenTrack, When the user sets a new reorder threshold for an item, Then the system saves the new threshold and updates future stock level notifications accordingly.
The system logs all automatic reorder actions for auditing and review purposes.
Given that an automated reorder has been executed, When the action occurs, Then the system logs details of the order, including time, items, quantities, and supplier response.
The system allows users to view and manage all recent reorder notifications in a user-friendly dashboard interface.
Given that there are recent reorder notifications, When the user navigates to the reorder notifications dashboard, Then all recent notifications are displayed with relevant details like status and timestamps.
Integration processes can handle errors and provide alerts for manual intervention if the automatic reorder fails.
Given that an automated reorder fails due to a connectivity issue, When the failure occurs, Then the system sends an alert to the user for manual intervention and logs the error details.
Users receive confirmation of successful order placements from the supplier's system through InvenTrack.
Given that an order has been successfully placed, When the supplier's system confirms the order, Then the user receives a notification in InvenTrack indicating successful placement and expected delivery dates.
Historical Stock Level Analytics
"As an inventory analyst, I want to access historical stock level analytics so that I can identify trends and improve our stock management strategies in the future."
Description

This requirement entails implementing a feature that tracks historical stock level data over time, allowing users to analyze trends and patterns in inventory management. By providing visual representation of stock fluctuations, this feature aids in forecasting and demand prediction, allowing for better strategic decision making. The integration of analytics tools into the InvenTrack platform enhances its value by delivering actionable insights that can inform business operations and mitigate risks related to stock management, ultimately contributing to a more robust inventory strategy.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the historical stock level analytics feature via the InvenTrack dashboard to review past inventory data for specific items over the last 6 months.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they navigate to the 'Historical Stock Level Analytics' section and select an item from the list, then they should see a graphical representation of stock levels over the last 6 months with key data points indicated.
User sets parameters to filter historical stock data based on date ranges and item categories to analyze trends in inventory management.
Given that the user is in the 'Historical Stock Level Analytics' section, when they apply filters for a specific date range and item category, then the displayed analytics should update accordingly to reflect only the relevant data points and trends for the selected criteria.
User receives a summary report of historical stock levels sent via email after analyzing inventory trends on the InvenTrack platform.
Given the user has completed their analysis of the historical stock levels, when they select the 'Email Report' option, then they should receive an email within 10 minutes containing a summary report of their selected historical stock data in a PDF format.
User wants to compare historical stock levels against current stock levels to identify potential discrepancies in inventory management.
Given that the user is viewing the historical stock levels for an item, when they click on the 'Compare with Current Stock' option, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of historical data and current stock levels, highlighting any discrepancies.
User views historical stock level trends and identifies seasonal fluctuations to inform future stock ordering decisions.
Given that the user is analyzing the historical stock levels for a group of seasonal items, when the user examines the graphical trends over different seasons, then they should be able to identify at least three key seasonal fluctuations in inventory that occurred over the past 12 months.
User collaborates with team members to share insights derived from historical stock level analytics to facilitate strategic decision-making.
Given that the user has generated insights from the historical stock levels, when they choose to share the findings with team members through the platform's collaboration tools, then all selected team members should receive notifications and access to the shared insights in their InvenTrack accounts.

Order Creation Wizard

This user-friendly wizard guides users through the process of creating and placing orders directly from the app. With intuitive prompts and predefined templates, it simplifies the ordering process, reduces errors, and accelerates purchasing decisions, allowing users to maintain optimal inventory levels seamlessly.

Requirements

Dynamic Order Templates
"As a purchasing manager, I want to create and save order templates so that I can quickly place orders for frequently purchased items without having to re-enter all the information each time."
Description

The Dynamic Order Templates requirement allows users to create, save, and modify templates for frequent orders. This feature will streamline the order creation process by allowing users to select predefined templates tailored to their inventory needs, which not only speeds up the ordering process but also minimizes errors associated with manual entry. Furthermore, these templates can be integrated with real-time inventory data to automatically adjust quantities based on current stock levels, ensuring that orders align with optimal inventory management practices.

Acceptance Criteria
User selects a predefined order template from the Order Creation Wizard to place an order for frequently purchased items.
Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Order Creation Wizard and select a predefined template, then the template should automatically fill in the order details based on current inventory levels, displaying the recommended quantities to order.
User modifies an existing dynamic order template for an upcoming order based on a recent inventory audit.
Given a user has an existing order template saved, when they access the template and adjust any item quantities or details, then the changes should be saved accurately and reflected in the template for future use.
User attempts to create a new dynamic order template with specific criteria for a seasonal product line.
Given a user is creating a new order template, when they input details and specify selected items from the inventory, then the template should be saved successfully with those specifications, and the system should confirm the creation of the new template.
User reviews an order placed using a saved dynamic template and verifies the alignment with current inventory levels.
Given a user has placed an order using a dynamic template, when they review the order details, then the quantities displayed should match the adjusted quantities based on real-time inventory data at the moment of order placement.
User receives a notification when an item on a dynamic template runs low in inventory, prompting a restock order.
Given an inventory item's stock level falls below the predefined threshold set in the order template, when the system detects this low stock level, then the user should receive an automated alert to consider placing a reorder using the corresponding template.
User accesses the Order Creation Wizard from a mobile device to place an order using a dynamic template.
Given a user is on the InvenTrack mobile application, when they navigate to the Order Creation Wizard and select a dynamic template, then the process to confirm and place the order should be optimized for mobile use, ensuring usability and responsiveness.
Real-Time Inventory Validation
"As an inventory controller, I want to validate inventory levels in real-time during order creation so that I can avoid ordering items that are out of stock and ensure smooth operations."
Description

The Real-Time Inventory Validation requirement ensures that users can verify the availability of items in their inventory in real-time while creating orders. This validation checks against current stock levels before finalizing an order, preventing stockouts and ensuring that users do not place orders for items that are unavailable. This feature integrates with the existing inventory tracking system to provide accurate data and enhance user confidence in the ordering process, ultimately contributing to better inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria
User attempts to create an order for items they need to restock in the inventory while ensuring that available stock levels are accurately reflected before placing the order.
Given the user has selected items to order, when they access the Real-Time Inventory Validation feature, then the system should display current stock levels for each item, indicating whether they are available for ordering or not.
A user creates an order, and the system performs a validation check against current stock levels in real-time during the order creation process.
Given the user is in the order creation wizard, when they enter the quantity for each item, then the system should validate if the entered quantities are less than or equal to the available stock, preventing any ordering of unavailable items.
A user completes the order creation process having ensured real-time validation for each item selected within the inventory before finalizing the order.
Given the user has confirmed their order details, when they submit the order, then the system should verify the availability of all items in real-time without errors and successfully finalize the order, while alerting the user of any out-of-stock items.
A user revisits an old order to check item availability against real-time inventory before deciding to reorder those items.
Given the user opens an old order, when they request a real-time inventory validation, then the system should provide updated stock levels for all items in the old order, indicating availability in a clear manner.
An administrator needs to ensure that the system correctly integrates with the existing inventory database to reflect real-time stock levels during order processing.
Given the administrator accesses the integration settings, when they verify real-time inventory connections, then the system should successfully retrieve and display the accurate stock levels from the existing inventory database in the order creation wizard.
A user tests the Real-Time Inventory Validation under high-load conditions to ensure system performance and reliability.
Given a high number of simultaneous users creating orders, when inventory validation requests are performed, then the system should maintain response times under 2 seconds for stock level checks without errors or crashes.
Customizable Order Conditions
"As a procurement officer, I want to set custom order conditions so that I can enforce purchasing policies and ensure that our procurement process remains compliant and efficient."
Description

The Customizable Order Conditions requirement provides users with the ability to set specific conditions or rules for their orders, such as minimum order quantities or preferred vendors. This feature can help users avoid errors, reduce processing time, and ensure compliance with organizational purchasing policies. The customization options will enhance flexibility in order management, allowing users to align orders with company standards while maximizing efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
User sets a minimum order quantity for a specific product.
Given the user has access to the Order Creation Wizard, when they define a minimum order quantity of 10 units for Product X, then the system should prevent the user from placing an order for fewer than 10 units.
User selects preferred vendors for specific products.
Given the user has identified preferred vendors for their inventory items, when they create an order for Product Y, then the preferred vendor should be automatically selected in the order form.
User attempts to submit an order that violates set order conditions.
Given the user has established a maximum order quantity of 50 units for Product Z, when they attempt to place an order for 60 units, then the system should display an error message indicating the violation of order conditions.
User reviews and edits existing order conditions.
Given the user has previously set order conditions for Product A, when they access the order conditions settings, then they should be able to view, edit, and save any changes to those conditions successfully.
User receives notifications on order condition violations during order creation.
Given that the user is in the Order Creation Wizard, when they enter an order that does not comply with their customizable order conditions, then the system should provide an alert notifying the user of the specific violation before allowing submission of the order.
User applies order conditions to multiple products at once.
Given the user is creating an order involving multiple products, when they apply a predefined set of order conditions, then all applicable products should reflect the conditions successfully without errors.
User verifies saved order conditions for accuracy.
Given the user has saved customizable order conditions for specific products, when they navigate to the order conditions overview, then all stored conditions should be accurately displayed for review and confirmation.
Guided Ordering Process
"As a new user, I want a guided tutorial during the order creation process so that I can learn how to navigate the system and accurately place orders without making mistakes."
Description

The Guided Ordering Process requirement is designed to offer a step-by-step tutorial or walkthrough for users during the order creation phase. This interactive guide will help users navigate through the order creation wizard, showing them how to enter information, select products, and take advantage of available features. This educational aspect is particularly beneficial for new users, ensuring they understand how to use all functionalities effectively and minimizing mistakes during order submissions.

Acceptance Criteria
New users interact with the Guided Ordering Process for the first time as they navigate through the Order Creation Wizard after logging into their InvenTrack account.
Given a new user is logged in to InvenTrack, when they access the Order Creation Wizard, then they should be presented with an interactive tutorial that includes prompts for entering information and selecting products.
A returning user decides to use the Guided Ordering Process to create an order after reviewing the available features in the Order Creation Wizard.
Given a returning user has previously accessed the Order Creation Wizard, when they select the option to view the Guided Ordering Process, then they should receive an update that includes new features since their last visit.
Users need to complete an order quickly while utilizing the Guided Ordering Process to ensure accuracy in their order details.
Given a user is following the Guided Ordering Process, when they fill in the required fields and confirm their selections, then the system must validate the input and allow the user to proceed to the checkout without errors.
A user encounters difficulties during the order creation phase and seeks assistance from the Guided Ordering Process.
Given a user is in the middle of creating an order using the Order Creation Wizard, when they click on the 'Help' option, then they should receive contextual assistance and links to relevant sections of the Guided Ordering Process.
Users test the ease of use of the Guided Ordering Process compared to traditional order creation methods within InvenTrack.
Given users are provided with both the Guided Ordering Process and a standard order creation method, when they complete an order using both methods, then the Guided Ordering Process should result in a lower error rate and reduced time taken to submit an order compared to the traditional method.
Automated Reorder Notifications
"As a stock manager, I want to receive automated notifications when inventory is low so that I can promptly reorder products and avoid stockouts."
Description

The Automated Reorder Notifications requirement involves setting up a system that alerts users when inventory levels for items fall below a specified threshold. Users will receive notifications prompting them to place orders for replenishment, which is essential for maintaining optimal inventory levels and preventing stockouts. This feature will be integrated with the order creation wizard, allowing users to quickly initiate the order placement process directly from the notification.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an automated reorder notification when inventory levels for a specific item drop below the set threshold.
Given an item with a current inventory level below the reorder threshold, when the inventory check is performed, then the user should receive a notification alerting them to reorder the item.
User clicks on the reorder notification to initiate the order creation process directly from the alert.
Given the user receives a reorder notification, when they click on the notification, then the Order Creation Wizard should launch with the relevant item details pre-filled.
User views a list of low inventory items in the dashboard indicating which items have triggered the automated reorder notifications.
Given that there are items below the threshold, when the user accesses the dashboard, then they should see a clear list of these items and their corresponding stock levels.
The system updates inventory levels automatically upon successful order placement through the Order Creation Wizard.
Given that an order is successfully placed through the Order Creation Wizard, when the order confirmation is received, then the inventory levels for the ordered items should be updated accordingly in real-time.
User is able to set and modify reorder thresholds for individual items in the inventory management settings.
Given the user accesses the inventory management settings, when they select an item, then they should be able to view and modify the reorder threshold for that particular item successfully.
Automated reorder notifications are triggered at the specified time intervals to ensure consistent inventory monitoring.
Given that the inventory monitoring is operational, when the system checks for low stock, then it should trigger notifications at predetermined time intervals if items fall below their reorder thresholds.
Multi-Location Order Management
"As an operations manager, I want to create orders for different locations from one platform so that I can efficiently manage inventory across multiple sites without switching between systems."
Description

The Multi-Location Order Management requirement provides the ability for users to create and manage orders across multiple locations seamlessly. This feature enables users to view inventory levels and create orders tailored to different warehouses or store locations from a single interface. Enhancing convenience and improving inventory visibility, this capability supports businesses with distributed operations, enabling more efficient inter-location inventory transfers and order processing.

Acceptance Criteria
Users can create an order from multiple locations using the Order Creation Wizard.
Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack app, when they access the Order Creation Wizard, then they should see a list of available locations and be able to select multiple locations to create an order for each selected location.
Users can view real-time inventory levels for selected locations before placing an order.
Given a user has selected multiple locations in the Order Creation Wizard, when they view the inventory levels, then they should see accurate and up-to-date stock information for each selected location displayed within the wizard.
Users can automated reorder alerts for low stock levels across multiple locations.
Given a user has set reorder thresholds for inventory items in the system, when stock levels fall below the defined threshold in any selected location, then the system should trigger an automated alert to the user for that specific location.
Users can manage and adjust orders for multiple locations from a single interface.
Given a user has created an order for multiple locations, when they access the order management interface, then they should be able to view, edit, or cancel orders for each location from the same dashboard.
Users can efficiently transfer inventory between locations using the Order Creation Wizard.
Given a user is creating an order that involves transferring stock between locations, when they specify the source and destination locations in the Order Creation Wizard, then the system should facilitate the transfer by updating inventory levels accordingly.
Users receive confirmation notifications for successfully created orders across multiple locations.
Given a user has completed the order creation process for multiple locations, when the order is successfully placed, then the system should send confirmation notifications to the user for each location involved in the order.

Mobile Dashboard

The mobile dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of key inventory performance metrics, such as stock levels, order statuses, and upcoming low-stock alerts. This feature optimizes the mobile user experience by enabling quick decision-making and enhancing situational awareness for effective inventory management.

Requirements

Real-Time Notifications
"As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time notifications for critical inventory events so that I can make prompt decisions and prevent stockouts."
Description

This requirement entails implementing a robust notification system that alerts users in real-time about critical inventory events, such as low-stock levels, incoming shipments, and order statuses. The feature should provide the flexibility to customize notification preferences across different channels (e.g., push notifications, SMS, and email) to ensure users can stay informed regardless of their location. By delivering timely alerts, the notification system enhances user responsiveness and decision-making, thereby preventing stockouts and improving inventory management efficiency. Furthermore, integration with existing notification systems will ensure a seamless experience for users, allowing them to manage alerts from a single interface.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives a low-stock alert on their mobile device when the inventory level drops below the defined threshold for any product.
Given that the user has configured low-stock level thresholds for their products, When the stock level of a product drops below the threshold, Then the user receives a push notification on their mobile device with details of the product and current stock level.
User receives an incoming shipment notification via email when new stock arrives at the warehouse.
Given that an incoming shipment has been recorded in the system, When the shipment status is updated to 'Arrived', Then the user receives an email notification with details of the shipment including product information and quantity.
User customizes their notification preferences for different types of alerts in the mobile dashboard settings.
Given that the user navigates to the notification settings in the mobile dashboard, When the user selects preferences for push notifications, SMS, and email for specific alert types, Then the system saves these preferences and applies them accordingly to subsequent alerts.
User receives a status update notification for an ongoing order via SMS.
Given that the user has opted to receive SMS notifications for order status updates, When the status of an order changes, Then the user receives an SMS notification with the updated order status and estimated delivery time.
User accesses the notification history to review past alerts.
Given that the user clicks on the notification history section in the mobile dashboard, When the user views the history, Then the user can see a chronological list of past notifications with timestamps and details of each alert.
The notification system integrates with existing ERP systems to avoid duplicate notifications.
Given that the user has linked their ERP system with InvenTrack, When a critical inventory event occurs that triggers a notification, Then the system ensures that no duplicate notifications are sent via multiple channels.
Customizable Dashboard Widgets
"As a user, I want to customize my mobile dashboard widgets so that I can quickly access the inventory metrics that matter most to me."
Description

This requirement aims to allow users to customize their mobile dashboard by choosing specific widgets that display the most relevant inventory metrics for their needs. Users should have the option to add, remove, and rearrange widgets, selecting from a variety of metrics such as stock levels, sales trends, and order statuses. This personalization not only caters to individual preferences but also enhances the overall user experience by enabling quick access to the most pertinent information. The feature should be easily configurable, requiring minimal steps for users to modify their dashboard. A user-friendly interface for customization will facilitate adoption and engagement with the mobile dashboard.

Acceptance Criteria
User customization of the mobile dashboard to view specific metrics that matter most to them.
Given a user is logged into the mobile dashboard, when they navigate to the customization settings, then they should be able to add, remove, or rearrange widgets with no more than three taps.
User ability to select from a variety of widget types that reflect different inventory metrics.
Given a user is customizing their dashboard, when they browse the available widget options, then they should see at least five distinct widget types including stock levels, sales trends, and order statuses.
User experience while modifying the dashboard's layout and the impact on data visibility.
Given a user has added and rearranged widgets, when they save the new layout, then the dashboard should reflect the changes immediately with no delays or errors.
User feedback regarding the ease of customization when using the mobile dashboard for the first time.
Given a new user accesses the mobile dashboard, when they follow the prompted steps to customize their dashboard, then they should complete the customization process within five minutes without any external assistance.
User verification that the dashboard widgets display real-time data accurately after customization.
Given a user has customized their dashboard with selected widgets, when they view those widgets, then the data displayed should be up-to-date and refresh without user intervention at least every five minutes.
User ability to revert back to default widget settings if desired.
Given a user is in the customization settings, when they choose to reset to default settings, then all dashboard widgets should revert to the original configuration immediately with confirmation feedback to the user.
Historical Data Analysis
"As an inventory analyst, I want to analyze historical inventory data so that I can make informed decisions about future inventory purchases."
Description

This requirement focuses on implementing a feature that allows users to access historical inventory data and analyze trends over specific periods. Users should be able to visualize data through graphs and charts, enabling them to identify patterns in stock usage, sales performance, and seasonal demand fluctuations. This analytical capability will empower users to make data-driven decisions regarding inventory replenishment and discarding obsolete stock, thereby optimizing inventory levels and increasing profitability. The integration of historical data analysis into the mobile dashboard will provide users with comprehensive insights without needing to switch between multiple systems or reports.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the historical data analysis feature on the mobile dashboard to review inventory trends over the past quarter.
Given that the user is logged into the mobile dashboard, when they navigate to the historical data analysis section, then they should be able to select a quarter from a dropdown menu and view corresponding trend graphs for stock usage and sales performance.
A user wants to analyze the seasonal demand fluctuations for a specific product category within a selected date range.
Given that the user is on the historical data analysis page, when they specify a product category and select a date range, then the system should display graphs that illustrate demand fluctuations for that category over the specified time period.
The user has accessed the historical data analysis section and wants to visualize data for multiple product categories simultaneously.
Given that the user is viewing the historical data analysis, when they select multiple product categories, then the dashboard should show comparative trend graphs for all selected categories in a single view.
A user is seeking insights on obsolete stock through historical performance analysis using the mobile dashboard.
Given that the user is in the historical data analysis section, when they apply filters for sales performance below a defined threshold over the past year, then the system should highlight items that are considered obsolete or slow-moving stock.
A user desires to export the historical trend data for further offline analysis.
Given that the user has finished analyzing the historical data, when they click the export button, then the system should generate a downloadable CSV file containing selected historical data trends and metrics.
A user intends to utilize historical data comparisons to inform purchase decisions during a busy sales season.
Given that the user has accessed the historical data feature, when they request data for the previous sales season alongside the current stock levels, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of last season’s sales against current stock levels in a readable format.
Multi-Location Support
"As a warehouse manager, I want to manage inventory across multiple locations from my mobile dashboard so that I can ensure efficient operations and accurate stock levels."
Description

This requirement is centered on enhancing the mobile dashboard to support users managing inventory across multiple locations. The feature should enable users to view and manage inventory levels, stock movements, and order statuses for each location directly from the mobile dashboard. Users should be able to filter views by location or aggregate data for a holistic overview. This capability will significantly improve operational efficiency for businesses with multiple warehouses or stores, allowing for coordinated inventory management across all locations. By facilitating effective multi-location tracking, this feature will help users streamline operations and minimize stock discrepancies.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the mobile dashboard to view inventory levels for multiple locations simultaneously.
Given the user is logged into the mobile dashboard, when they navigate to the multi-location view, then the system displays current inventory levels for all locations with the ability to filter by individual location or all locations collectively.
User receives a low-stock alert for a specific location on the mobile dashboard.
Given the user has set threshold levels for each location, when the stock level for an item falls below the set threshold at any location, then the user receives an immediate alert on the mobile dashboard indicating the specific item and location.
User reviews recent stock movements across multiple locations on the mobile dashboard.
Given the user is on the multi-location dashboard, when they select the 'Stock Movements' tab, then the system displays a timeline of stock movements (incoming and outgoing) for each location with filters for specific items or timeframes.
User aggregates data from multiple locations to generate a holistic overview of inventory status.
Given the user is on the mobile dashboard, when they select the 'Overview' option, then the system presents a summary of total stock levels, outstanding orders, and low-stock alerts aggregated from all locations.
User filters inventory data by a specific location to manage stock levels effectively.
Given the user is viewing the mobile dashboard, when they apply the location filter for a specific site, then the system updates the displayed metrics to show only inventory information pertinent to the selected location.
User updates inventory levels for an item at a specific location through the mobile dashboard.
Given the user has the necessary permissions, when they select an item at a specific location and update its quantity on the mobile dashboard, then the system reflects the new inventory level immediately and logs the change in the inventory history.
User accesses historical inventory data for analysis on the mobile dashboard.
Given the user is on the mobile dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Historical Data' section, then the system allows them to view and analyze past inventory levels and movements for each location over a user-defined timeframe.
User Access Control
"As an administrator, I want to manage user access controls so that I can ensure appropriate access levels are maintained across my team."
Description

This requirement involves implementing a user access control feature that allows administrators to define and manage user permissions within the mobile dashboard. This capability is essential for businesses that require varying levels of access for different team members. Administrators should be able to grant, revoke, or adjust user permissions based on roles, ensuring that sensitive information is protected and only accessible to authorized personnel. By enhancing security and accountability within inventory management processes, this feature will boost confidence among users regarding data integrity and privacy.

Acceptance Criteria
Admin manages user access on the mobile dashboard for team members with varying permissions.
Given an administrator is logged into the mobile dashboard, when they navigate to the User Access Control section and select a user, then they should be able to successfully grant, revoke, or adjust permissions for that user, and these changes should be reflected in the user's access immediately.
A new team member is onboarded and requires specific access to the mobile dashboard features.
Given an administrator accesses the User Access Control, when they create a new user account for the team member and assign the appropriate role, then the new user should receive an email with access details, and they should be able to log in and access features based on the assigned role.
An unauthorized user attempts to access features restricted to their role within the mobile dashboard.
Given a logged-in user with restricted permissions attempts to access a feature they are not authorized for, when they navigate to that feature, then they should receive a clear error message indicating insufficient permissions, and they should be redirected back to the dashboard.
The administrator wants to view a log of all permission changes made within the mobile dashboard.
Given an administrator is logged into the mobile dashboard, when they access the User Access Control audit log, then they should see a comprehensive history of all changes made to user permissions, including timestamps and the user who made the changes.
An admin needs to validate that the user access control is functioning securely after making changes.
Given an administrator makes changes to user permissions, when they log out and log back in as the affected user, then they should only see the features that correspond to their updated permissions, confirming the security of the changes made.
An administrator needs to ensure that permissions can be changed efficiently even when accessed through a mobile device.
Given an administrator is using the mobile app to manage user permissions, when they adjust a user's access permissions, then the app should respond within two seconds and confirm that the changes have been applied successfully with a notification.
A manager wants to confirm that sensitive data remains protected after permission changes.
Given an administrator has adjusted user permissions, when a user without access attempts to view sensitive data, then they should be denied access and presented with a user-friendly message explaining that the content is restricted due to permissions.
Integrated Help and Support
"As a user, I want integrated help and support options on my mobile dashboard so that I can quickly resolve any issues I encounter."
Description

This requirement seeks to establish an integrated help and support feature within the mobile dashboard. Users should have access to a comprehensive knowledge base, FAQs, and user manuals, along with options for direct support through chat or ticket submission. This feature will enhance user experience by providing instant assistance, addressing common questions, and guiding users on how to maximize the dashboard's functionalities. By ensuring that help is readily available, users will be less frustrated and more likely to utilize the full capabilities of the mobile dashboard, thus improving overall satisfaction and engagement.

Acceptance Criteria
User accesses the integrated help and support feature from the mobile dashboard to seek assistance with understanding order statuses.
Given that the user is on the mobile dashboard, when they click on the help icon, then they should be directed to a help section that includes a knowledge base, FAQs, and user manuals.
User submits a support ticket through the integrated help and support feature for an issue they are experiencing.
Given that the user has filled out the support ticket form with valid information, when they submit the ticket, then they should receive a confirmation message that their ticket has been submitted successfully with a unique ticket ID.
User interacts with the chat support option on the mobile dashboard for real-time assistance.
Given that the user clicks on the chat support option, when the live chat window opens, then the user should be able to engage with a customer service representative in real-time.
User browses the knowledge base within the integrated help and support feature.
Given that the user is in the help and support section, when they access the knowledge base, then they should be able to search and view articles related to various topics concerning inventory management.
User accesses the FAQs to find answers to common questions.
Given that the user is on the help and support section, when they click on the FAQs link, then they should be presented with a list of frequently asked questions and their corresponding answers.
User opts for additional support options within the integrated help and support feature when facing a complex issue.
Given that the user encounters an unresolved issue, when they select the additional support options, then they should be provided with details on how to contact customer support via phone or email.
User reviews a user manual within the help and support feature.
Given that the user selects a user manual from the help section, when they open the manual, then it should display relevant information pertaining to the mobile dashboard functionalities clearly and concisely.

Location-Based Tracking

This feature utilizes GPS technology to enable users to easily retrieve and track inventory items based on their location. It streamlines operations by helping teams locate stock across multiple sites or stores quickly, improving accuracy in fulfilling orders and managing inventory in diverse environments.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Location Update
"As a warehouse manager, I want to see the real-time location of inventory items so that I can quickly locate stock across multiple storage areas, reducing time spent searching and improving order fulfillment accuracy."
Description

This requirement focuses on enabling GPS-based real-time updates of inventory items' locations. It facilitates the automatic tracking of items at various locations, ensuring that users can see the current status of stock availability and location. This helps reduce the time spent searching for items and enhances order fulfillment accuracy. The integration with the InvenTrack platform will leverage existing inventory data, providing users with a seamless experience. Users can instantly access detailed location data for each inventory item, leading to enhanced operational efficiency, reduced mismanagement of stocks, and improved productivity across teams.

Acceptance Criteria
User retrieves the location of an inventory item in real-time during a stock-taking session at multiple locations.
Given the user is logged into InvenTrack and has GPS enabled, when the user searches for an inventory item, then the system displays the current location and availability of the item across all locations in real-time.
Warehouse staff need to locate an item quickly to fulfill an urgent customer order.
Given the warehouse staff member is on the InvenTrack platform, when they enter the item SKU, then the system provides the current location, quantity available, and estimated retrieval time for the item.
The operations manager reviews inventory levels across different stores to optimize stock distribution.
Given the operations manager accesses the inventory dashboard in InvenTrack, when they request a report on inventory locations, then the system generates a comprehensive report showing real-time inventory status for each location, including low-stock alerts.
A team member is alerted of a misplacement of an inventory item based on GPS tracking data.
Given the system detects that an inventory item's location is outside its designated storage area, when the GPS data is updated, then the system sends an automatic alert to the relevant team members containing details of the item's new location and corrective action required.
Customers want to know the availability of an item at their local store before placing an order.
Given a customer is using the InvenTrack web application, when they search for a product, then the application displays the real-time availability and location of that product at their selected store, along with pickup options.
Multi-location Inventory Search
"As a store employee, I want to search for inventory items across multiple locations so that I can find stock quickly and efficiently fulfill customer orders without delay."
Description

This requirement allows users to execute searches across multiple locations for specific inventory items. By integrating advanced search functionality, users can filter results based on location, stock levels, and item categories. This feature is vital for businesses with numerous storage locations, as it significantly streamlines the inventory management process. Quick and accurate searches will help teams make informed decisions regarding stock transfers, fulfill orders promptly, and maintain optimal levels of inventory across locations. It enhances collaboration amongst teams working at different sites by providing easy access to critical information.

Acceptance Criteria
User searches for a specific inventory item across multiple locations to fulfill an urgent customer order.
Given the user is on the inventory search page, when they input an item name and select multiple locations, then the system returns a list of the item availability across those locations with accurate stock levels displayed.
User wants to filter search results for inventory items based on location and stock levels to evaluate transfer needs.
Given the user has selected a location and specified minimum stock levels, when they perform the search, then the system should display only those items that are in stock at the selected location and meet the stock criteria.
Users from different locations need to collaborate on inventory management by sharing search results.
Given that user A has searched for an inventory item, when they share the search results link with user B, then user B should see the same search results with the same filters applied without additional actions.
User requires exportable search results for reporting purposes after performing an inventory search.
Given the user has completed an inventory search, when they click the export button, then the system shall generate a CSV file with the search results, including item names, quantities, and locations.
User wants to perform a quick search for items in a specific category across all locations.
Given the user selects a category from the dropdown menu and executes the search, when the search is completed, then the results should only display items from the selected category available in all locations.
User needs to receive alerts for low-stock items found during the multi-location search.
Given the user sets a low-stock threshold before executing the search, when the search concludes, then the system should highlight and notify the user of any items below the specified threshold across the selected locations.
Geofencing Inventory Alerts
"As a supply chain coordinator, I want to receive alerts when inventory items cross predefined geofenced areas so that I can take immediate action to prevent stock misplacement and optimize inventory flow."
Description

This requirement will establish geofencing capabilities that notify users when inventory items are being moved into or out of designated areas. By leveraging GPS technology, the system will send alerts via the InvenTrack platform whenever stock reaches specified geofenced boundaries. This feature is essential for maintaining security and control over inventory movement. Users can manage stock more efficiently, ensuring that inventory levels meet business demands and preventing loss or misplacement of items. The alerts will help users respond promptly to critical changes, enhancing inventory handling and operational responsiveness.

Acceptance Criteria
User receives an alert when an inventory item is moved into a designated geofenced area.
Given an inventory item is moved into a defined geofenced area, when the item crosses the geofencing boundary, then an alert should be sent to the user's mobile device and dashboard on the InvenTrack platform.
User receives an alert when an inventory item is moved out of a designated geofenced area.
Given an inventory item is moved out of a defined geofenced area, when the item crosses the geofencing boundary, then an alert should be sent to the user's mobile device and dashboard on the InvenTrack platform.
System logs all geofence alert notifications for auditing purposes.
Given the system sends a geofence alert, when the alert is triggered, then the system should log the time, item, and user information related to that alert for future audits.
User can configure the boundaries of geofenced areas within the platform.
Given the user has access to the geofencing configuration settings, when the user defines a new geofenced area, then the system should save and display the newly defined geofence accurately on the application interface.
User can adjust settings for how they receive geofencing alerts.
Given the user is in the settings menu for geofencing alerts, when the user selects their preferred alert method (email, SMS, app notification), then the system should successfully update and confirm the new alert preferences.
Users are notified of inventory levels when exiting a geofenced area with low stock.
Given an inventory item with a low stock level is moved out of a designated geofenced area, when the item crosses the boundary, then the system should send an alert indicating that the stock level of the item is critically low.
Users have the ability to view the history of geofencing alerts triggered.
Given the user is navigating to the geofencing alerts history page, when the user requests to view previous alerts, then the system should display a chronological list of all geofenced alerts, including timestamps and item details.
Historical Location Tracking
"As an operations analyst, I want to access the historical location data of inventory items so that I can analyze movement patterns and optimize our inventory management strategies based on past performance."
Description

This requirement entails the implementation of a historical tracking feature that allows users to review the movement history of inventory items. By providing insights into where items have been at specific times, this feature helps businesses identify patterns in inventory handling. It can assist in investigating discrepancies, analyzing usage trends, and improving future stock management strategies. The integration with InvenTrack's data analytics tools will support users in generating reports that outline item movements, contributing to more informed decision-making and enhanced operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
As a warehouse manager, I want to review the historical movement of inventory items to investigate discrepancies in stock levels over the past month.
Given that I select an inventory item and specify a date range, when I request the movement history, then the system should display a chronological list of locations and timestamps where the item was stored or moved, including the user's ID who performed the actions.
As an operations analyst, I want to generate a report on inventory movement trends over the past quarter to identify patterns in usage.
Given that I access the reporting tool and select a specific item category along with the date range, when I generate the report, then the system should produce a visual representation (chart/graph) showing the movement history of items by location and time, which I can export as a CSV or PDF file.
As a store manager, I need to confirm the historical location of a specific item following a customer complaint about stock availability.
Given that I search for the item by its ID in the historical tracking feature, when I view the movement history, then I should be able to see all the previous locations of the item along with the dates and times, ensuring the accuracy of the information provided.
As an inventory control specialist, I want to analyze discrepancies by comparing expected versus actual inventory movements within a specific timeframe.
Given that I input the expected stock movement data along with the actual movement logs, when I run the discrepancy analysis tool, then the system should highlight any mismatches, showing the differences along with potential reasons for those discrepancies, to facilitate investigation.
As a business owner, I want to access a summary dashboard that displays key metrics on inventory movement history for better decision-making.
Given that I log in to the InvenTrack platform, when I navigate to the inventory summary dashboard, then I should see metrics including total items moved, average days in each location, and most frequent transfer routes, updated in real time for maximum accuracy.
As a compliance officer, I need to ensure that the historical tracking of inventory movements is secure and auditable.
Given that I access the system's audit log, when I review the logs concerning historical location tracking, then I should see a complete trail of all interactions, including timestamp, user ID, and nature of the action (view, edit), ensuring accountability and transparency.
User-friendly Location Filters
"As a sales associate, I want to use filters to view inventory items at specific store locations so that I can assist customers more effectively by quickly finding available products."
Description

This requirement focuses on creating user-friendly interfaces for filtering inventory based on location attributes. It will enable users to easily find inventory items located in specific stores, warehouses, or regions through an intuitive filtering system. The simplicity of these filters will enhance user experience, making it easy to access necessary information without navigating complex menus. This addition is essential for increasing productivity and ensuring that teams can quickly locate the right stock when needed, ultimately supporting faster operations and smoother business workflows.

Acceptance Criteria
User retrieves inventory items from a specific warehouse using the location-based filters in the InvenTrack dashboard.
Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when the user selects the 'Warehouse' filter and inputs the specific warehouse location, then the application should display only the inventory items available in that warehouse.
A team member is searching for products across multiple locations using the filtering system during a busy workday.
Given the team member is on the inventory page, when they apply multiple filters (region, store, and item category), then the system must return accurate results within 3 seconds and without any errors or downtime.
An admin configures the location filters for specific user roles to enhance their inventory retrieval capabilities based on their responsibilities.
Given the admin has access to user role configurations, when they designate location filters for different roles, then the users in those roles should only see the inventory items applicable to their specified locations without access to other locations.
The user wants to clear all location filters to view the complete inventory list after searching by location.
Given the user has applied multiple location filters, when they click the 'Clear Filters' button, then all filters should reset and the complete inventory list should be displayed accurately, reflecting the real-time inventory status.
A manager assesses the effectiveness of the new location filters in improving order fulfillment accuracy over a month.
Given the manager reviews the order fulfillment reports, when comparing metrics from before and after implementing the location filters, then there should be at least a 20% improvement in accuracy and speed of order fulfillment.
Users provide feedback on the intuitiveness and effectiveness of the location filters after a training session.
Given the user training session has concluded, when users are surveyed about their experience with the location filters, then at least 85% of users should rate the filters as 'easy to use' and 'effective in locating inventory items.'
Inventory Condition Reporting
"As a quality control manager, I want to assess the condition of inventory items across various locations so that we can ensure inventory quality and compliance with our operational standards."
Description

This requirement introduces the capability to report on the condition of inventory based on location. Users will be able to assess the state of items (e.g., damaged, expired, or in good condition) across different locations, helping businesses manage stock quality more effectively. By incorporating this feature, InvenTrack will allow users to maintain higher standards of inventory quality control and ensure compliance with regulatory standards. This capability will aid in timely decision-making regarding inventory replenishment, updates, and retirements, thereby reducing waste and enhancing overall supply chain efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
Users can select a specific location and generate a report on the condition of inventory items stored at that location.
Given the user is on the Inventory Condition Reporting page, when they select a location and click 'Generate Report', then the system should display a detailed report listing all inventory items at that location, categorized by their condition (e.g., damaged, expired, good).
Users can update the condition of an inventory item and view changes reflected in real-time across all locations.
Given the user updates the condition of an item in the report, when they click 'Save Changes', then the updated condition should be reflected in real-time for all users viewing the inventory report at that location.
Users receive alerts when the condition of inventory items falls below a predefined standard (e.g., items marked as damaged or expired).
Given the user has set condition thresholds in the system, when an item's condition changes and meets the threshold for alerts, then the system should send a notification to the user and display a warning in the inventory report.
Users can filter the report by specific conditions to focus on items that require immediate attention.
Given the user is viewing the inventory condition report, when they apply a filter to show only 'Damaged' or 'Expired' items, then the report should update to show only those items, and the count of filtered items should be displayed at the top of the report.
Users can export the inventory condition report in various formats for external sharing and record-keeping.
Given the user has generated an inventory condition report, when they select 'Export' and choose a format (e.g., PDF, CSV), then the system should create the report in the selected format and prompt the user to download the file successfully.
Users can view historical reports to track changes in inventory conditions over time.
Given the user is on the Inventory Condition Reporting page, when they select a date range and click 'View History', then the system should display a summary table of inventory condition reports for the selected period, showing item conditions and any changes made.

User Permissions Control

The app allows administrators to set and manage user permissions for different team members directly from their mobile devices. By providing streamlined control over access rights, it enhances security and ensures that sensitive inventory information is only shared with authorized personnel.

Requirements

Role-Based Access Control
"As an administrator, I want to set user roles and permissions so that I can control who accesses sensitive inventory data and ensure compliance with company policies."
Description

This requirement allows the application to enforce role-based permissions for all users. Administrators can define user roles with specific access rights, ensuring that only authorized personnel can view or edit sensitive inventory information. This functionality not only enhances the security of the application but also simplifies the administration of user permissions. By clearly delineating responsibilities and access levels, businesses can prevent unauthorized access, ensuring compliance with internal policies and regulations. This setup will support effective inventory management by safeguarding critical data while permitting necessary access for operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria
Administrator assigns user roles and permissions directly from the mobile application without requiring additional IT support.
Given an administrator logged into the mobile app, when they navigate to the user management section and select a user, then they should be able to assign or revoke roles with clear feedback on changes made.
Different users with assigned roles access the inventory data relevant to their permissions levels during daily operations.
Given a user with a defined role, when they attempt to access inventory data, then they should only see information permitted by their role, preventing unauthorized views.
An administrator reviews user permission settings and adjusts them to align with new compliance requirements.
Given the administrator is in the user permissions settings, when they modify a user's access rights, then the changes should be reflected in real-time and logged for audit purposes.
A user attempts to access a restricted area of the inventory management system.
Given a user without proper access rights, when they attempt to view or edit restricted inventory information, then they should see a clear error message stating that access is denied.
An administrator checks the system logs for tracking user access and permission changes.
Given the administrator is accessing audit logs, when they filter by user permissions changes, then they should see a comprehensive history detailing who made changes, what changes were made, and when they were executed.
The system sends notifications to administrators upon a role change that affects access rights for any user.
Given a role change has been executed, when it is processed, then an automatic notification should be sent to the administrator detailing the change and the impacted user.
Audit Trail for Permissions Changes
"As an administrator, I want to view a log of permission changes so that I can track who modified user access and ensure accountability."
Description

The audit trail requirement will provide a systematic record of all changes made to user permissions within the platform. This functionality captures details such as who made the change, what changes were made, and when they occurred. This is essential for accountability and traceability. By implementing this feature, administrators can monitor adjustments in user access levels over time, which is crucial for security reviews and audits. An effective audit trail not only bolsters the application's security posture but also fosters trust within the organization regarding data access management.

Acceptance Criteria
User Audit Trail Creation on Permission Change
Given an administrator modifies user permissions, when the change is saved, then an audit record must be created capturing the admin's ID, the timestamp, and the changes made.
Audit Trail Access for Administrators
Given an administrator accesses the audit trail feature, when they view the audit logs, then all records must display with correct filtering options and detailed change descriptions.
Integrity of Audit Trail Records
Given multiple users have made changes to permissions, when the administrator retrieves the audit logs, then all entries should accurately reflect the permissions changes without any missing or duplicate records.
Compliance with Access Reviews
Given the need for compliance audits, when the audit trail is reviewed by an external auditor, then the records must provide a clear history of all changes in user permissions over the last 12 months.
Timestamp Accuracy in Audit Logs
Given permission changes are made at various times, when the audit trail is displayed, then all timestamps must accurately reflect the time zone set in the administration settings.
Notification of Permission Changes
Given that a user permission change has occurred, when an administrator looks at the notification section, then a notification must be displayed summarizing the changes made and the relevant audit trail link.
Search Functionality in Audit Trail
Given the administrator needs to find a specific change, when they use the search functionality in the audit trail, then the system must return relevant results based on user ID, date, or type of permission change.
Multi-Factor Authentication for Admins
"As an administrator, I want to enable multi-factor authentication for my account so that I can enhance the security of sensitive inventory information."
Description

This requirement focuses on enhancing security for administrative accounts through multi-factor authentication (MFA). By requiring a secondary form of verification when admins log in or make significant changes to user permissions, this feature minimizes the risk of unauthorized access. Implementing MFA is a best practice that helps protect sensitive inventory information from potential breaches. The goal is to provide a robust security layer that not only satisfies compliance standards but also reassures users that their data is well protected.

Acceptance Criteria
MFA Setup for Admin Accounts
Given an admin user, when they attempt to set up multi-factor authentication in their profile settings, then they must receive a confirmation message indicating that MFA has been enabled and a secondary verification method must be required during the next login attempt.
Login with MFA for Admins
Given an admin user with MFA enabled, when they log in to their admin account, then they should be prompted to enter a secondary verification code sent to their registered mobile device before gaining access to their account.
Changing User Permissions with MFA
Given an admin user who is logged in with MFA enabled, when they attempt to change user permissions, then they must be prompted for a secondary verification step before the changes can be saved.
Backup Codes Provisioning
Given an admin user, when they enable multi-factor authentication, then they must be provided with a set of backup codes to use in case they lose access to their primary MFA method, and they should be instructed to store these codes securely.
Session Timeout and MFA Re-entry
Given an admin user logged in with MFA, when their session times out due to inactivity, then they must re-enter their MFA verification to regain access to the application.
Audit Trail for MFA Access Events
Given an admin user with MFA configured, when they log in and perform actions requiring MFA, then an audit trail must be recorded which logs the time, user details, and actions taken in the system related to MFA authentication.
User Access Review Reports
"As an administrator, I want to generate reports on user permissions so that I can review and adjust access according to current job roles and responsibilities."
Description

This requirement involves the creation of user access review reports that provide administrators with insights into current user permissions and roles. These reports can highlight anomalies or permissions that no longer align with a user's responsibilities, assisting in proactive security management. With a clear snapshot of authorization levels, businesses can maintain compliance and perform regular audits more efficiently. This feature also empowers organizations to enforce the principle of least privilege, ensuring users only have access necessary for their roles.

Acceptance Criteria
Administrator generates a user access review report after a scheduled audit period to evaluate and ensure proper user permissions within the organization.
Given the administrator has logged into the InvenTrack web application, when they navigate to the 'User Access Review' section and select 'Generate Report', then a PDF report of current user permissions and roles should be created and downloadable within 5 seconds.
An administrator reviews a user access report to identify any anomalies in permissions that do not align with user responsibilities.
Given the administrator opens the user access review report, when they review the roles assigned to each user, then any discrepancies between user roles and their assigned permissions should be highlighted and flagged within the report.
An administrator schedules a recurring automated report for user access reviews to ensure ongoing compliance with their access control policies.
Given the administrator is on the 'User Access Review' page, when they set up a schedule for automated reporting (daily, weekly, or monthly), then the system should confirm the schedule and automatically generate reports as per the defined frequency without manual intervention.
The administrator conducts an audit based on the user access review report to ensure all user permissions comply with the principle of least privilege.
Given the administrator has identified a user with excessive permissions in the report, when they attempt to modify the user's permissions, then the permissions should be updated successfully, and an audit log should be created to record this change.
An administrator needs to export the user access review report to share with compliance officers for regulatory audits.
Given the administrator has generated the user access review report, when they choose to export the report in CSV format, then the report should be downloadable, correctly formatted, and include all user details as outlined in the report.
An administrator wants to filter user permissions on the report by specific roles to ease the review process.
Given the administrator is viewing the user access review report, when they apply a filter to display only users with 'Admin' role, then the report should refresh to show only the corresponding users and their permissions related to the selected role.
Self-Service User Permission Requests
"As a team member, I want the ability to request changes to my permissions so that I can quickly gain the access I need for my tasks without burdening administrators."
Description

This requirement allows users to request changes to their permissions directly through the application. Users can submit requests for additional access or role changes, which will then be routed to their administrators for approval. This streamlined process enhances user experience and reduces the administrative burden of handling permission adjustments manually. By facilitating self-service requests, organizations can ensure prompt attention to user needs while maintaining control over permissions through an approval workflow.

Acceptance Criteria
User requests a change in their permissions via the InvenTrack mobile app while managing inventory at a remote location.
Given a logged-in user in the InvenTrack app, When they access the 'User Permissions' section and submit a request for increased permissions, Then the request is sent to the administrator for approval and a confirmation message is displayed to the user.
Administrator reviews and processes user permission change requests from the admin dashboard on their mobile device.
Given an administrator reviewing pending user permission requests, When they select a user request and choose to approve or deny it, Then the corresponding user receives an update notification reflecting the approval or denial of their request.
User submits a request for role change to a higher access level, such as moving from 'Viewer' to 'Editor'.
Given a user logged in with 'Viewer' permissions, When they submit a request for a role change to 'Editor', Then the system validates the request against the specified role requirements and routes it to the admin for review.
An administrator receives a notification when a user submits a permission request for their review.
Given that a user has submitted a permission request, When the admin logs into the InvenTrack app, Then they should see a notification alerting them to the new request with an option to review it.
User checks the status of their submitted permission change request within the application.
Given a user who recently submitted a permission request, When they navigate to the 'Request Status' section, Then they should see the current status of their request (Pending, Approved, or Denied) with a timestamp of the last update.
An administrator can set permissions on multiple users at once where the permission set is the same.
Given an administrator managing user accounts, When they select multiple users and apply a new permission set, Then all selected users should have their permissions updated accordingly, verifying the changes through the system logs.
System logs all permission requests and changes for auditing purposes.
Given that a permission change has been made, When the system processes the request, Then it should log the details of the request, including the user ID, request time, action taken, and admin ID for review in the audit log.

Offline Mode Functionality

This capability allows users to continue using key inventory functions even without an internet connection. Users can perform stock checks, update inventory counts, and create orders offline, with automatic synchronization once reconnected. This feature ensures continuous productivity, regardless of network availability.

Requirements

Data Sync Management
"As an inventory manager, I want to update stock levels and create orders offline so that I can continue working without disruption during internet outages."
Description

The Data Sync Management requirement encompasses the functionality to store local changes made to inventory data when the application is in offline mode. Users will be able to perform operations such as stock counting, order generation, and updates, which will be queued for synchronization with the central system once an internet connection is re-established. This functionality is essential for ensuring data integrity and seamless user experience, even in environments with unreliable internet access. Effective implementation will reduce the risk of data loss and enhance user trust in the system's reliability.

Acceptance Criteria
User performs stock checks offline and wants to ensure the data is saved for syncing later.
Given a user is offline, when they perform a stock check, then the updated stock count should be stored locally until the connection is restored.
User generates an order while offline and needs to ensure it will sync once back online.
Given a user is offline, when they create a new order, then the order should be queued for synchronization with the central system upon reconnection.
User needs to ensure data integrity when reconnecting from offline mode.
Given a user has made multiple changes while offline, when they reconnect to the internet, then all local changes should sync without data loss, and the user should receive a confirmation message.
User is updating inventory counts offline and expects changes to be recorded.
Given a user is offline, when they update an inventory count, then the update should be stored locally and available for review after reconnection.
User experiences a disconnection and needs to manage inventory seamlessly.
Given the application is in offline mode, when the user resumes the application after disconnection, then they should be able to access all previously made changes for review and further action.
Admin reviews the synchronization log after reconnection to ensure all changes are incorporated.
Given a user has gone offline and then reconnects, when they access the sync log, then it should accurately reflect all synchronized transactions and their statuses.
Admin needs to verify the number of changes made while offline.
Given a user has made multiple changes offline, when they check the number of queued changes, then it should reflect the exact count of operations performed while offline.
User Interface for Offline Mode
"As a user, I want to see a clear indication of when the app is offline, so that I can understand my limitations and plan my actions accordingly."
Description

The User Interface for Offline Mode requirement focuses on designing an intuitive interface that clearly indicates the current online or offline status to the user. The UI will include visual cues and functionalities specific to offline operations, allowing users to navigate and use the platform without confusion. This requirement aims to minimize user frustration by providing clear instructions and feedback regarding their actions while offline, ensuring a smooth user experience and maintaining productivity.

Acceptance Criteria
User attempts to access the InvenTrack platform in offline mode after losing internet connectivity while managing inventory in a warehouse.
Given the user is in offline mode, when they navigate to the inventory management section, then they should see an 'Offline Mode' indicator clearly displayed on the top of the interface.
User updates inventory counts while offline and wants to ensure data is saved before reconnecting to the internet.
Given the user updates inventory counts while offline, when they save the changes, then a confirmation message stating 'Changes saved locally and will sync when online' should be displayed.
User acknowledges that some functionalities are limited while in offline mode.
Given the user is in offline mode, when they access the features of the application, then all offline available functions should be clearly marked, and functions that require online access should be inaccessible or greyed out.
User reconnects to the internet after using the platform in offline mode and wants to ensure all changes made offline are synchronized with the main system.
Given the user was working offline and reconnects to the internet, when they sync their offline changes, then all updates should be accurately reflected in the online inventory records.
User wants to understand how to navigate the interface while offline without confusion.
Given the user is in offline mode, when they initiate help or guidance, then a clear tutorial or pop-up should explain the available offline functions and limitations.
User wishes to receive alerts in offline mode regarding potential issues with inventory levels.
Given the user is in offline mode, when they view their inventory alerts, then they should still be able to see alerts that were generated prior to going offline, but not new alerts generated during offline usage until they reconnect.
Offline Inventory Reporting
"As an inventory manager, I want to generate inventory reports while offline so that I can review stock levels and plan orders without needing an internet connection."
Description

The Offline Inventory Reporting requirement involves enabling users to generate and view inventory reports even when offline. Users should have access to essential data and analytics, such as stock levels and order history, that can be utilized to make informed decisions while offline. This reporting functionality will enhance the efficiency and effectiveness of users working in areas with poor connectivity, ensuring they have the information needed to manage inventory without delay.

Acceptance Criteria
User is in a remote warehouse location with limited or no internet access and needs to generate an inventory report to assess stock levels and order history for upcoming shipments.
Given the user is offline, when they attempt to access the offline inventory report feature, then they should be able to view a summary of stock levels and order history without an internet connection.
User has completed updating inventory counts offline while in a location without internet access and now needs to generate an aggregated report of recent inventory changes made during that offline period.
Given the user is offline and has made updates to inventory counts, when they open the offline inventory reporting feature, then they should see a report reflecting all changes made while offline.
User is at a trade show where they do not have a reliable internet connection and needs to prepare for a real-time meeting with potential clients to discuss inventory levels and order fulfillment.
Given the user is offline at a trade show, when they access the offline inventory reporting feature, then they should have the ability to generate a detailed inventory report that includes stock levels and analytics available up to the last sync.
User has returned to a location with internet access after working offline and must ensure that all generated offline inventory reports and updates are synchronized with the main database.
Given the user has reconnect to the internet, when they access the offline inventory sync feature, then they should see a confirmation message indicating that all offline reports and inventory updates have been successfully synchronized with the system.
User regularly works in a warehouse with sporadic internet connectivity and needs to be assured that all essential data is available offline for immediate access during inventory audits.
Given the user is offline, when they attempt to access the offline inventory reporting module, then they should have immediate access to at least 30 days of historical stock level data and order history.
User is conducting an inventory count in a rural area with poor internet service and needs to create a printed report for documentation purposes.
Given the user is offline and has accessed the offline inventory reporting, when they select the option to print the inventory report, then a printable version of the report should be generated without requiring an internet connection.
Error Handling in Offline Mode
"As a user, I want to receive notifications about potential data conflicts when I reconnect so that I can promptly resolve issues and ensure data accuracy."
Description

The Error Handling in Offline Mode requirement addresses the need for robust mechanisms to detect and communicate issues that may arise when users operate offline. This includes notifying users of any data conflicts that may occur once they reconnect, as well as providing clear instructions on how to resolve these conflicts. Ensuring that users are well-informed about potential errors will maintain trust in the system and provide clarity on how data synchronization will proceed once reconnected.

Acceptance Criteria
User operates the InvenTrack platform offline in a warehouse setting, updating inventory counts without an internet connection. After updating, the user reconnects to the internet and syncs the changes with the cloud system.
Given that the user has updated inventory data offline, when they reconnect to the internet and initiate synchronization, then the platform should detect and display any data conflicts that occurred during the offline period.
A user performs stock checks both online and offline over a period of time and later reconnects to see the accumulated changes reflected accurately in the system.
Given that the user has made multiple stock checks and updates offline, when the user reconnects to the internet, then all offline updates should be correctly integrated into the online inventory database without data loss or duplication.
User receives a notification of conflict upon reconnection after making offline updates to inventory data that directly conflicts with updates made by another user while they were offline.
Given that the user had conflicting updates with another user while offline, when they reconnect, then a clear notification should be displayed that explains the conflict, along with step-by-step instructions on how to resolve it.
A user performs inventory updates in offline mode, then intentionally disconnects to simulate a loss of internet, returning to online mode later.
Given that the user performed updates while offline, when they return to online mode, then the system should provide a summary of all changes made offline and any potential conflicts encountered during synchronization.
A user attempts to sync after updating inventory data while offline, and the connection times out due to network issues.
Given that there is no successful internet connection, when the user attempts to sync their offline changes, then an appropriate error message should be displayed informing them of the timeout and prompting them to try syncing again later.
A user accesses the error handling interface to resolve conflicts that occurred during offline mode synchronization.
Given that the user is in the error handling interface after a sync conflict, when they review the displayed conflicts, then they should have the ability to resolve each conflict individually or choose a bulk resolution option with adequate explanations about each choice available.

Product Ideas

Innovative concepts that could enhance this product's value proposition.

Smart Inventory Assistant

A virtual assistant integrated into InvenTrack that uses AI to provide real-time insights, suggestions, and alerts for inventory management. This feature would help users make better purchasing decisions and adapt to market changes rapidly, driving efficiency and minimizing stock discrepancies.

Idea

Collaborative Inventory Dashboard

An advanced dashboard feature that allows different user types (Inventory Managers, Finance Analysts, etc.) to collaborate on inventory management within InvenTrack. It offers customizable views, shared notes, and real-time updates to improve team communication and performance.

Idea

Sustainability Insights Module

A module within InvenTrack that analyzes inventory practices through a sustainability lens. It provides users with insights into waste reduction, sustainable sourcing suggestions, and carbon footprint assessments of their inventory processes, promoting eco-friendliness and responsibility.

Idea

Smart Reorder Scheduler

An intelligent algorithm that predicts optimal reorder points and quantities based on sales trends, seasonal changes, and supplier reliability. It proactively manages stock levels, minimizes manual oversight, and ensures businesses react appropriately to demand fluctuations.

Idea

Supplier Performance Tracker

A tool integrated into InvenTrack to monitor and evaluate supplier performance using key performance indicators (KPIs). Users can analyze delivery times, order accuracy, and overall reliability to make informed decisions about partnerships and negotiations.

Idea

Mobile Inventory Management App

A dedicated mobile application for InvenTrack that allows users to manage inventory on-the-go. Features include stock checks, barcode scanning, and order creation, enabling users to stay connected and manage tasks from anywhere, improving flexibility and responsiveness.

Idea

Press Coverage

Imagined press coverage for this groundbreaking product concept.

P

Revolutionizing Inventory Management: InvenTrack Launches Cutting-Edge SaaS Platform for SMBs

Imagined Press Article

FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE **Revolutionizing Inventory Management: InvenTrack Launches Cutting-Edge SaaS Platform for SMBs** February 26, 2025 - [Your Company Name], a leader in innovative technology solutions, is thrilled to announce the launch of InvenTrack, a state-of-the-art Software as a Service (SaaS) platform designed to empower small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs) in managing their inventory with precision and ease. By integrating advanced features such as real-time inventory monitoring, automated reorder alerts, and intelligent demand prediction, InvenTrack aims to eliminate stockouts and overstock situations, ultimately optimizing operational efficiency. InvenTrack seamlessly integrates with existing Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems to provide a user-friendly, cloud-based solution that enhances collaboration across multiple locations with robust security protocols. This platform is tailored to address the specific needs of various user types including Inventory Managers, Small Business Owners, Supply Chain Coordinators, Finance Analysts, Retail Associates, and IT Managers. "InvenTrack is more than just an inventory management system; it’s a comprehensive toolkit for businesses looking to improve their operational efficiency and customer satisfaction," said [Your Name], CEO of [Your Company Name]. "Our platform provides data-driven insights that not only reduce costs but also improve cash flow. We believe this tool will redefine inventory management for SMBs, making it more profitable and streamlined than ever before." **Key Features of InvenTrack:** - **Intelligent Alert System:** Provides timely alerts about low stock levels, potential stockouts, and overstock situations through real-time data analysis. - **Predictive Analytics Engine:** Leverages historical sales data to forecast future inventory needs accurately, allowing users to make informed purchasing decisions. - **Smart Suggestion Engine:** Offers tailored recommendations for restocking, optimal order quantities, and product discontinuation based on AI algorithms. - **Market Trend Tracker:** Monitors external market conditions to help users adapt their inventory strategies. - **Performance Metrics Dashboard:** Provides a comprehensive view of key performance indicators related to inventory levels and cost efficiencies. InvenTrack’s user-friendly interface allows businesses to quickly navigate through features, ensuring that all team members can utilize the platform effectively. Furthermore, the platform fosters real-time collaboration among team members through shared notes, integrated workflows, and an activity feed overview. As sustainability becomes a growing concern within the industry, InvenTrack also offers features like Eco-Friendly Sourcing Suggestions and a Carbon Footprint Calculator, allowing businesses to monitor their environmental impact and align with modern sustainability goals. "With InvenTrack, we are not just providing a product; we’re initiating a transformational journey for our clients. Our commitment is to deliver a system that contributes positively to their bottom line while promoting eco-friendliness," said [Your Name]. **Availability:** InvenTrack is available now for demonstration and subscription. SMBs interested in elevating their inventory management processes are encouraged to visit [Your Website] or contact our sales team at [Contact Information]. **Contact:** [Your Name] [Your Position] [Your Company Name] [Phone] [Email] [Website] **About [Your Company Name]:** [Your Company Name] is dedicated to providing innovative technology solutions that simplify business operations. With a focus on customer satisfaction and sustainable practices, we are committed to delivering products that enhance efficiency and foster growth across various sectors. **End of Release**

P

InvenTrack Unveils New Features to Enhance User Experience and Sustainability Practices

Imagined Press Article

FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE **InvenTrack Unveils New Features to Enhance User Experience and Sustainability Practices** February 26, 2025 - [Your Company Name] is excited to announce the latest update to InvenTrack, which includes a suite of new features aimed at improving user experience while promoting sustainable business practices. This update comes in response to user feedback and the ongoing commitment to enhancing the inventory management capabilities offered to our clients. The recent enhancements include: - **Sustainability Insights Module:** This module provides users with actionable insights into waste reduction and sustainable sourcing suggestions, helping businesses align their inventory practices with eco-friendly initiatives. - **Smart Inventory Assistant:** A virtual assistant feature that utilizes AI to provide real-time insights, alerts, and purchasing suggestions based on current inventory levels and market trends. - **Collaborative Inventory Dashboard:** An advanced dashboard that enables different user types to work together effectively, fostering team communication and dynamic decision-making. "At [Your Company Name], we always strive to stay ahead of our clients’ needs. The new features in InvenTrack are designed not only to enhance functionality but also to assist businesses in adopting more responsible and sustainable practices," said [Your Name], Head of Product Development. **User-Centric Developments** By leveraging input from our diverse user base, we have ensured that these new features address everyday challenges faced by our clients. For example, the Sustainability Insights Module helps businesses make informed decisions about their sourcing practices while reducing carbon footprints. "The updates made to InvenTrack give us the tools to manage our inventory more effectively and sustainably," said [Existing User's Name], Inventory Manager at [User Company Name]. “With the Smart Inventory Assistant, we can focus more on strategic tasks rather than getting bogged down by routine checks." The enhancements to InvenTrack illustrate our persistent drive toward delivering value and supporting our customers in achieving their operational goals. **Availability:** The new features are available immediately to all InvenTrack users. For a full overview of the updates or to schedule a demo, users can visit [Your Website] or reach out to our support team at [Contact Information]. **Contact:** [Your Name] [Your Position] [Your Company Name] [Phone] [Email] [Website] **About [Your Company Name]:** [Your Company Name] is committed to developing innovative SaaS solutions that empower businesses through enhanced efficiency and environmental accountability. Our dedicated team works tirelessly to ensure our clients have the tools they need to succeed in today’s rapidly evolving market. **End of Release**

P

InvenTrack Expands to Global Markets: A New Era of Inventory Management for SMBs

Imagined Press Article

FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE **InvenTrack Expands to Global Markets: A New Era of Inventory Management for SMBs** February 26, 2025 - [Your Company Name] is proud to announce the global launch of InvenTrack, aimed at revolutionizing inventory management for small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs) around the world. This move represents a significant step in our commitment to empowering SMBs with the tools necessary for efficient inventory management, regardless of geographical barriers. InvenTrack’s diverse array of features—including Real-Time Collaboration Tools, Performance Metrics Dashboard, and Intelligent Alert System—are now accessible to businesses worldwide. This platform is designed with a focus on user-friendliness and integration, allowing businesses to adapt quickly and benefit from enhanced operational efficiency. "Expanding InvenTrack to global markets is a milestone for us. We believe every small and medium-sized business deserves access to top-notch inventory management tools that can propel them to success, no matter where they are located," said [Your Name], Chief International Officer at [Your Company Name]. **Adaptable Solutions for Diverse Markets** InvenTrack’s ability to seamlessly integrate with existing ERP systems and provide localized data analysis equips users from different regions with relevant insights tailored to their markets. "This expansion opens new possibilities for us. The flexibility and adaptability of InvenTrack mean we can monitor our inventory with real-time insights, no matter where our operations are situated," said [Existing User's Name], Small Business Owner at [User Company Name]. **Commitment to Customer Support** To ensure a smooth transition for our global users, [Your Company Name] has established robust support channels, complete with multilingual assistance. This enables customers to receive guidance on optimizing their own inventory processes without interruption. The global launch of InvenTrack underlines our mission to empower SMBs by providing them with cutting-edge resources that enhance their operational capabilities, foster growth, and secure a competitive edge in their respective markets. **Get Started Today:** Businesses interested in learning more about InvenTrack or requesting a demo can visit [Your Website] or contact our sales team directly at [Contact Information]. **Contact:** [Your Name] [Your Position] [Your Company Name] [Phone] [Email] [Website] **About [Your Company Name]:** [Your Company Name] has been dedicated to driving innovation in technology solutions that support businesses across diverse industries. Our commitment to quality and user satisfaction ensures that all our products deliver measurable results and lasting impact. **End of Release**

Want More Amazing Product Ideas?

Subscribe to receive a fresh, AI-generated product idea in your inbox every day. It's completely free, and you might just discover your next big thing!

Product team collaborating

Transform ideas into products

Full.CX effortlessly brings product visions to life.

This product was entirely generated using our AI and advanced algorithms. When you upgrade, you'll gain access to detailed product requirements, user personas, and feature specifications just like what you see below.